USER'S MANUAL

USER'S MANUAL
Cat. No. V091-E1-01
NT20
Programmable Terminal
USER’S MANUAL
NT-series
Programmable Terminal
User’s Manual
Produced March 2007
iv
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator
and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Always heed
the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or damage to property.
!DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.
!WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.
!Caution
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury, or property damage.
OMRON Product References
All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when it refers to
an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product.
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often means
“word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in this sense.
The abbreviation “PLC” means Programmable Controller. “PC” is used, however, in some Programming Device displays to mean Programmable Controller.
The abbreviation “Host” means a PLC that controls the NT20.
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of
information.
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product.
1,2,3...
1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.
 OMRON, 2007
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or
by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of
OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without
notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility
for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in
this publication.
v
vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
1
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xviii
2
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xviii
3
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xviii
4
Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xix
5
Application Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xix
6
EC Directives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xx
SECTION 1
Functions of the NT20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
1-1
Role and Operation of NT20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
1-2
Functions of NT20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
1-3
Method for Connection to the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
1-4
Communications with PLC by Direct Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
1-5
Communications Using RS-232C (NT20-ST128) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
1-6
Before Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
SECTION 2
Hardware Settings and Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
2-1
Description of Parts and Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
2-2
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
2-3
Connecting Link Adapters and RS-422A Converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
2-4
Connecting the NT Support Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
2-5
Using a Memory Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36
2-6
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
2-7
Communicating with the PLC Using C200H Direct Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73
2-8
Host Connections by RS-232C (NT20-ST128). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
79
SECTION 3
System Menu Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
81
3-1
Operation Flow by the System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
82
3-2
Starting the NT20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
83
3-3
Operation Modes and the System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
84
3-4
Initializing Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
88
3-5
Setting the Conditions of Communications with the Host by Using the Memory Switches.
91
3-6
Registering the Screen Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
102
3-7
Starting the Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
105
3-8
Various System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
106
3-9
System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
115
3-10 Transferring the System Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
126
3-11 Transferring the Resource Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
129
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 4
NT20 Functions and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
4-1
Screen Creation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
134
4-2
Outline of Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
136
4-3
Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
140
4-4
Memory Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
144
4-5
Bar Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
147
4-6
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
150
4-7
Touch Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
152
4-8
Numeral Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
156
SECTION 5
How to Use the Host Link/NT Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
5-1
Overview of Direct Connection Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
166
5-2
Memory Tables and Bar Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
177
5-3
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
191
5-4
NT20 Status Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
203
5-5
Notification of the Operating Status to the PLC
(Determining the NT20 Operating Status) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
208
SECTION 6
Using RS-232C Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
6-1
Table of Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
212
6-2
RS-232C Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
213
6-3
Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
216
6-4
Memory Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
218
6-5
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
221
6-6
Controlling the NT20 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
227
6-7
Terminal Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
229
6-8
Key to Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
234
SECTION 7
Troubleshooting and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
7-1
Hardware Faults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
248
7-2
Responding to Displayed Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
249
7-3
Maintenance of the NT20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
253
7-4
Inspection and Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
253
Appendices
viii
A
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
255
B
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
261
C
Transporting and Storing PTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
263
TABLE OF CONTENTS
D
Making the Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
265
E
Making the Cable for Connecting a Personal Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
267
F
Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
269
G
Option List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
277
H
Special Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
279
I
Function Restrictions Depending on the Support Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
281
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS
x
About this Manual:
This manual describes the basic functions and operation procedures of the NT-series programmable
terminal NT20, its operations when connected to a PLC or a Host, and includes the sections described
below.
Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before
attempting to install and operate the NT-series programmable terminal NT20.
!WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in
personal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each
section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the
section and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations
given.
Precautions provides general precautions for using the NT20 and related devices.
Section 1 describes the operation functions, system configuration, and the direct connection function
of the NT20.
Section 2 describes the NT20 hardware settings, its installation in an operation panel, its connection
to the Host, etc.
Section 3 describes the procedure before operating the NT20, and useful functions when operating it.
Also describes how to perform an operation check.
Section 4 describes the functions of the NT20 when it is connected to a Host.
Section 5 describes how to operate the NT20 when the host link/NT link is used for communications.
Section 6 describes how to operate the NT20 when the RS-232C interface is used for communications. Read this section only when using the NT20-ST128.
Section 7 describes the procedures to follow when the system does not operate correctly, and the procedure for routine maintenance of the NT20.
APPENDIX describes the specifications and the method for making connecting cables, and includes
an area list for the PLC.
!WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in personal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each section
in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and
related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.
xi
Related Manuals and Their Contents:
The related manuals are indicated below.
The @ symbol at the end of the manual number is the revision history symbol.
Operating the Programmable Terminal and Communicating with the Host
• NT20 Programmable Terminal User’s Manual (V091)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - This manual
This user’s manual is the manual for the NT20 itself.
The NT20 is a unit which integrates a programmable terminal body and host interface unit. This user’s
manual describes the functions and handling of both the programmable terminal body and the host
interface function.
Creating and Transferring Screen Data
• NT Support Tool for Windows [email protected] Operation Manual ([email protected])
The screens displayed on the NT20 are created with the Support Tool and transferred to the NT20.
This manual describes how to create and transfer screen data. It also describes how to download a
system program to a PT using the System Installer.
Connection to Other Makers’ PLCs
• PLC Connection [email protected]
NT20-ST121-E can be connected to Mitsubishi A series PLCs. This manual describes how to make
the connection and how to make settings when connecting the PT to a Mitsubishi A series PLC.
In order to use the PT while connected to a PLC made by a manufacturer other than OMRON, the Ver.
2.3 Support Tool must be used.
xii
Read and Understand this Manual
Please read and understand this manual before using the product. Please consult your OMRON
representative if you have any questions or comments.
Warranty and Limitations of Liability
WARRANTY
OMRON's exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a
period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON.
OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING NONINFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE
PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS
DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR
INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY
OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS,
WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT
LIABILITY.
In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which
liability is asserted.
IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS
REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS
WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO
CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR.
xiii
Application Considerations
SUITABILITY FOR USE
OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the
combination of products in the customer's application or use of the products.
At the customer's request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying
ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a
complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine,
system, or other application or use.
The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not
intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the uses
listed may be suitable for the products:
• Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or
uses not described in this manual.
• Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical
equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate
industry or government regulations.
• Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property.
Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR
PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO
ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED
FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.
PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS
OMRON shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable product, or any
consequence thereof.
xiv
Disclaimers
CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other
reasons.
It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when
significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be changed
without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key
specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative at any
time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products.
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when
tolerances are shown.
PERFORMANCE DATA
Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does
not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON's test conditions, and the users must
correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and
Limitations of Liability.
ERRORS AND OMISSIONS
The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no
responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions.
xv
xvi
PRECAUTIONS
This section provides general precautions for using the Programmable Terminal.
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of the Programmable
Terminal. You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or
operate a Programmable Terminal.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xviii
xviii
xviii
xix
xix
xx
xvii
1
Intended Audience
1
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have
knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
• Personnel in charge of introducing FA systems into production facilities.
• Personnel in charge of installing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of designing and connecting FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.
2
General Precautions
• The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications described in the operation manuals.
• Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the
manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, safety equipment, and other systems,
machines, and equipment that may have a serious influence on lives and
property if used improperly, consult your OMRON representative.
• Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product
are sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to
provide the systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.
• This manual provides information for using the Programmable Terminal.
Be sure to read this manual before attempting to use the software and
keep this manual close at hand for reference during operation.
!WARNING It is extremely important that Programmable Terminals and related devices be
used for the specified purpose and under the specified conditions, especially
in applications that can directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult with your OMRON representative before applying Programmable Terminals to the abovementioned applications.
!WARNING Do not use the input functions of the PT, such as touch switches or function
keys, for applications where danger to human life or serious property damage
is possible or for emergency switch applications.
3
Safety Precautions
Read these safety precautions carefully and make sure you understand them
before using the Programmable Terminal so that you can use it safely and correctly.
!WARNING Do not attempt to take the PLC apart and do not touch any internal parts while
the power is being supplied. Doing either of these may result in electrical
shock.
!Caution Carefully check the wiring before turning ON the power.
!Caution Do not connect AC power to the DC terminals. Incorrect wiring may result in
burning.
xviii
Operating Environment Precautions
4
!Caution If the DIP switch settings have been changed when the NT20 is powered,
reset the power to the NT20. The changes with the DIP switches become
effective only after the power supply is reset.
4
Operating Environment Precautions
1,2,3...
1. Do not install the PT in any of the following locations.
• Locations subject to rapid changes in temperature
• Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified
in the specifications
• Locations subject to condensation as the result of high humidity
• Locations subject to splashing chemicals or solvents
• Locations subject to oil splashes
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases
• Locations subject to strong shock or vibration
• Locations outdoors subject to direct wind and rain
• Locations subject to strong ultraviolet light
2. Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems
in the following locations.
• Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise
• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic or magnetic fields
• Locations close to power supply lines
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity
5
Application Precautions
1,2,3...
1. When unpacking the PT, check carefully for any external scratches or other
damage. Also, shake the PT gently and check for any abnormal sound.
2. Turn OFF the power supply to the PT before mounting or dismounting any
Interface Unit, such as a Memory Unit. Correctly mount the Interface Unit
according to the NT20 User's Manual.
3. Do not touch PCBs with bare hands. Discharge static electricity accumulated in your body in advance.
4. The mounting panel must be between 1.6 and 4.8 mm thick. Tighten the
Mounting Brackets evenly to a torque of between 0.5 and 0.6 N·m to maintain water and dust resistance. Make sure the panel is not dirty or warped
and that it is strong enough to hold the PT.
5. Do not let metal particles enter the PT when preparing the panel.
6. Do not perform a dielectric voltage test on the PT.
7. Use a DC power supply that is isolated between DC output and AC input,
and has minimal fluctuation voltage.
Rated power supply voltage: 24 VDC (Allowable range: 20.4 to 27.6 VDC)
Capacity: 10 W min.
8. Use a twisted-pair cable of at least 2 mm2 to connect to the power supply
terminals. Tighten the terminal screws to 0.8 N·m. Make sure the screws
are properly tightened.
9. Turn OFF the power supply to the PT before connecting or disconnecting
cables between devices.
xix
6
EC Directives
10. Always tighten the connector screws after connecting communications cables.
11. The maximum pull load for cables is 30 N. Do not apply loads greater than
this.
12. Confirm that the current capacity of the connected device is 150 mA or less
before using the 5-V power supply from pin 6 of serial port A or port B. The
5-V output of the NT20 is 150 mA maximum at 5 V ±5%.
13. Confirm the safety of the system before turning ON or OFF the power supply or pressing the reset switch.
14. The whole system may stop depending on how the power supply is turned
ON or OFF. Turn ON or OFF the power supply according to the specified
procedure.
15. Start actual system application only after sufficiently checking screen data
and the operation of the program in the PLC (host).
16. Do not press any touch switch with a force greater than 30 N.
17. Do not accidentally press touch switches when the Backlight is not lit or
when the display does not appear. Confirm the safety of the system before
pressing touch switches.
18. Signals from the touch switches may not be input if the switches are
pressed consecutively at high speed. Confirm each input before proceeding to the next touch switch.
19. To ensure greater safety for numeric inputs, use the upper/lower limit setting function.
20. When transferring data in screen units, also transfer any data associated
with the screen, such as memory tables or direct connection data, if any of
this data has changed.
21. To assure system safety, incorporate a program that periodically calls PT
operation bits from the host side to check that the PT is properly operating.
22. An afterimage will remain if the same patterns are displayed continuously
for extended periods of time (e.g., 24 hours). Use the screen saver or periodically change the display to prevent afterimages.
23. Do not use benzene, paint thinner, or other volatile solvents, and do not
use chemically treated cloths.
24. Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify the PT in any way.
25. The backlight in the PT contains mercury. Do not dispose of the PT together with waste to be processed at disposal plants. Dispose of the PT according to all local laws, regulations, and ordinances as they apply.
26. Confirm the installation conditions periodically when the PT is being used
in an environment subject to oil or water.
27. Water resistance will be lost if the front sheet is not present. Confirm that
the front sheet is present before using the PT.
6
EC Directives
Conforming Directive
The NT20 PTs conform to the EMC Directive.
xx
6
EC Directives
EMC Directive Conformance
OMRON products are designed as electrical devices for use built into other
devices or the overall machine. As individual devices, they comply with the
related EMC standards (see note) so that they can more easily be built into
other devices or the overall machine. The actual products have been checked
for conformity to EMC standards. Whether they conform to the standards in
the system used by the customer, however, must be checked by the customer.
EMC-related performance of the OMRON devices will vary depending on the
configuration, wiring, and other conditions of the equipment or control panel
on which the OMRON devices are installed. The customer must, therefore,
perform the final check to confirm that devices and the overall machine conform to EMC standards.
Note
Applicable EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) standards are as follows:
EMS (Electromagnetic Susceptibility):
EMI (Electromagnetic Interference):
EN 61131-2
EN 61131-2 (Radiated emission:
10-m regulations)
Complying with EC Directives
NT-series PTs comply with EC Directives. Observe the following precautions
to ensure that the customer’s device and the overall machine also comply with
EC Directives.
1,2,3...
1. The PT is designed for installation inside a control panel. The PT must be
installed within a control panel.
2. Use reinforced insulation or double insulation for the DC power supply to
the PT. Ensure that a stable power output can be provided even if a 10-ms
interruption occurs at the input.
3. The PT conforms to the EN 61131-2, but the radiated emission characteristics (10-m regulations) may vary depending on the configuration of the
control panel used, other devices connected to the control panel, wiring,
and other conditions. You must therefore confirm that the overall machine
or equipment complies with EC Directives.
xxi
EC Directives
xxii
6
SECTION 1
Functions of the NT20
NT20 is a new programmable terminal (PT) which incorporates a host interface unit and two RS-232C interface units in a
programmable terminal body. It can be easily installed and used. This section gives the operation examples and
characteristics of the NT20 so that you will understand the applications of the NT20.
1-1
Role and Operation of NT20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1-1
1-2
2
Operations of NT20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
Functions of NT20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
1-2-1
Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
1-2-2
Principal Functions of NT20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
1-2-3
Comparison between NT20S, NT20M, and NT20. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
1-2-4
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
1-3
Method for Connection to the Host. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
1-4
Communications with PLC by Direct Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
1-4-1
Functions of the Allocated Bits and Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
1-4-2
Connecting to PLC from Other Companies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
1-5
Communications Using RS-232C (NT20-ST128) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
1-6
Before Operating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
1
Section 1-1
Role and Operation of NT20
1-1
Role and Operation of NT20
NT20 is a programmable terminal used to display and transmit the information
in an FA site. The following gives a general description of the role and operation of the NT20 for those who use a programmable terminal (PT) for the first
time.
Production Line Status
Monitoring
The NT20 displays real-time information about the system and equipment
operating status, etc.
1994/1/25
Production Control
Product
NT20M/NT20S
Today's target
Current Production
560 units
441 units
305 units
275 units
54.5 %
63.0 %
% achieved
Messages
NT600M
The NT20 warns of system or equipment failures and prompts the appropriate
remedial action.
Alarm
Assembly line B
-
Positioning pin
is defective.
Panel Switch Functions
Setting touch switches on the NT20 allows workers to use the NT20 as an
operating panel. Production data input to the NT20 or the Host can be transmitted to a PLC.
Electroplating Control
Transport
Clamp
2
UnClamp
Section 1-1
Role and Operation of NT20
1-1-1
Operations of NT20
Displays Screens
The information to be displayed (screen data) can be created on a computer
by using the Support Tool and stored in the NT20. The screen data can be
displayed on the NT20 in response to the instructions from a Host or touch
switch operation.
Host
The screen data designated by
instructions from Host or touch
switch operation is displayed.
Receives Data from a Host
The NT20 can be connected to the Host using the host link or NT link communications method to enable reception of the required data from the Host.
Host link, NT link, RS-232C,
C200H direct communications
Sends Data to a Host
Host
Data input through a touch panel can be sent to a Host.
Host
Touch panel
ON/OFF information,
numeric data, etc.
Screen Data
The screen data to be displayed on the NT20 can be created by a computer
by using the Support Tool. Connect the NT20 to a PC/AT with an RS-232C
cable so that the screen data are transferred to the NT20.
Create screen data.
RS-232C
PC/AT
(Support Tool)
Screen data
When the host is connected at serial port A,
the personal computer is connected only
when transferring screen data between the
NT20 and NT Support Tool.
3
Section 1-2
Functions of NT20
1-2
Functions of NT20
The NT20 has the following features which are different from those of existing
NT20M/NT20S;
1-2-1
Features
Downsized Body
• The connectors are located at other than the front.
• The communications cable connectors are housed in the unit so that they
do not protrude from the unit.
• The tool connectors and the Host communications connectors are used in
common (when the host link/NT link is used).
Construction Best Suited to the FA Environment
• Easy-to-read screen even in direct sunlight.
• Long-lived backlight leads free from maintenance.
• Waterproof structure equivalent to oil-resistant IP65.
256 dots
128 dots
Wide angle of visibility ±35°
A Host Link I/F Unit, Screen Data Memory, and a System ROM Are All Incorporated
• With the NT link communications method, 1:1 connections and 1:N connections are possible.
• There is no complicated installation work except a simple connection to a
Host.
• A flash memory is used for the screen data memory. There is no need of
backup battery.
• The following communications methods are standard for each model:
NT20-ST121-E: Host Link (direct) and NT Link
NT20-ST121-E + NT20-IF001 + NT600M-LB122-V1: C200H direct communications
NT20-ST128: RS-232C communications (command control)
• The NT20 can be connected to Mitsubishi FX-series and Mitsubishi Aseries PLCs. (Refer to PLC Connection, Operation Manual (Cat. No.
[email protected])).
Touch Switch Operation
The System Menu can be displayed by using the touch switches located in
four corners of the screen.
Compatibility with NT20M/
NT20S
Existing screen data, user programs, are compatible.
4
Section 1-2
Functions of NT20
1-2-2
Principal Functions of NT20
Functions Related to the Data Display
• Character display
Characters of various sizes can be displayed. Characters can flash or be highlighted.
• Figure display
Straight lines, circles, and other graphic figures can be displayed.
• Memory data display
Contents of the character-string memory table and the numeral memory table can be
displayed. The memory table contents can be changed from the PLC/Host.
• Bar graph display
Bar graphs corresponding to the contents of the numeral memory table can be displayed.
• Lamp display
Lamps which turn on or flash as controlled by the Host can be displayed.
Functions Related to the Data Input
• Input by the touch switch
Data can be input by simply touching the screen.
• Numeric setting function
The touch keys can be assigned with numeric
values so that the numeric values can be input at
the operation site and sent to the PLC/Host.
Other Functions
• Buzzer
A built-in buzzer can be used.
• Communications with a PLC
By connecting the NT20 with a PLC using the host link, NT link, C200H,
or RS-232C communications method, data can be received from the
host and touch switch status information can be sent to the host.
• System function
The system setting and maintenance can be executed by using the
System Menu on the screen.
• Screen data creation
The screen data can be created by using support tools on the computer
and stored in the unit.
• Unrestricted screen display
When the NT20 is connected to the host via an RS-232C interface,
characters and graphics can be displayed independently of the
registered screens (terminal function) (only with NT20-ST128).
5
Section 1-2
Functions of NT20
1-2-3
Comparison between NT20S, NT20M, and NT20
The NT20 is a unitary PT which incorporates a system ROM, screen memory,
and a host I/F unit (Host link, NT link, RS-232C, and C200H direct communications) as the standard equipment in one body.
The NT20 has the following features which are different from those of existing
NT20/NT20S:
Function
Communications
NT20S
• Host link/NT link incorporated NT20S-ST121-EV3
• C200H direct communications incorporated
NT20S-ST122-V1
• RS-232C incorporated
NT20S-ST128
(other host I/F units cannot
be connected)
NT20M-DT121-V2
Host I/F units are required.
Communications connector
• The communications connector (9-pin) for a Host is
shared with that for the Support Tool. (NT20S-ST121EV3/ST128)
• Connectors for Support Tool
(9-pin) and Host connections on the rear face
(NT20S-ST122-V1).
The Support Tool connector • The communications con(9-pin) is located on the front. nector (9-pin) for a Host is
The Host connector (25-pin)
shared with that for the Supis located on the back.
port Tool. (Port A)
• The communications connector (9-pin) for a Host
(Port B)
Host RUN input terminal/
Alarm output terminal
System keys
Not provided
Provided
Not provided
Not provided
Provided
Not provided
Back
Equivalent to oil-resistant
IP65
Not guaranteed
Front
Conforms to IP54F.
Back
Equivalent to oil-resistant
IP65
Not guaranteed
Built in (not replaceable)
System ROM compatible with Flash ROM rewriteable
host I/F unit is required.
Resume function
History retaining function
Not provided
Not provided
Provided
Provided
Not provided
Not provided
Screen transfer
❍
❍ (Only possible if screen
data memory is an SRAM)
❍
Screen data compatibility
PLC ladder compatibility
❍ (Note)
❍
–
–
❍ (Note)
❍
Backlight replacement
Screen data memory
❍
Built in (flash ROM only)
Screen data memory
capacity
Outside dimensions
96KB
Possible with NT20M-DT131. Do not need
Built in (Flash ROM)
Optional (select from
EPROM, SRAM, and
EEPROM)
128 KB max.
512 KB
190 × 110 × 58 mm
220 × 110 × 82 mm
Contrast control
Waterproof performance
Allowable momentary
power interruption time
System ROM
Note
5 ms
NT20
• Host link/NT link
• C200H direct communications
Host I/F unit for C200H communications is required.
• RS-232C incorporated
NT20-ST128 (other host I/F
units can not be connected)
190 × 108 × 53.5 mm
If a system key function is required on continuous screens or for numerical
setting or buzzer stop, use the Support Tool and set the touch switches which
have the system key function in such screens.
For details, refer to 4-7-3 System Key Functions on page 154.
6
Section 1-2
Functions of NT20
1-2-4
Displays
The NT20 can display various kinds of elements such as characters, lamps,
touch switches, and bar graphs on a screen. The screen data displayed on the
NT20 are created by using the Support Tool on a computer.
Touch switches
Characters
(character string)
Characters (text)
Emergency
stop
Line 1 Status
Restart
Numeric value
(Numeral table)
Machine name : NT20
Production qty. : 137 units
30%
Bar graph
0%
50%
Stage 1
Characters (Text)
Stage 2
100%
Stage 3
Lamps
Characters and marks which do not need to be changed can be written
directly to the screen.
Characters (Character-string Memory Table)
Character-strings stored in the character-string memory table are displayed.
The display characters can be changed by changing the data stored in the
character-string memory table.
Numeric Values (Numeral Table)
Numbers stored in the numeral table are displayed. The display numbers can
be changed by changing the data stored in the numeral table. Hexadecimal
values can also be displayed.
Lamps
Lamps are displayed as square or round frames and indicate the operating
status. They are controlled by the Host and can be lit (reversed) or made flash
(alternates normal with reversed displays).
Touch Switches
Touch switches can be set anywhere on the screen. Touching the screen at a
touch switch location can switch the display (display switch function) or notify
the Host (notification function). The touch switches can be lit or made flash by
controlling from the Host in the same way as the lamps.
Numeric Keys
These are the touch switches used to input numeric values.
Bar Graphs
The bar graph extends and contracts in proportion to the data stored in the
numeral table. A percentage value can also be displayed simultaneously.
Marks
Marks can be designed, created, and handled like characters by the user.
7
Section 1-3
Method for Connection to the Host
1-3
Method for Connection to the Host
This section describes the methods for connection to the host used with the
NT20, and the relationship between the connection method and the communications method.
NT20 Communications Ports and Communications Methods
The NT20 has two communications ports. Their uses are indicated in the
table below.
Communications
Usable Communications
Port
Methods
Serial port A
Host Link
1:1 NT Link
1:N NT Link (See note.)
RS-232C (command control) (NT20-ST128)
(NT Support Tool connection)
Serial port B
Host Link
1:1 NT Link
1:N NT Link (See note.)
RS-232C (command control) (NT20-ST128)
Note
Communications
RS-232C
RS-232C
There are two 1:N NT Link communications rates: standard and high-speed.
Converting Communications Type with the RS-232C/RS-422A Link
Adapter and RS-422A Converter
An OMRON NT-AL001 Link Adapter or CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Converter can
be used convert from RS-232C communications to either RS-422A or RS485.
• RS-232C ⇔ RS-422A
• RS-232C ⇔ RS-485
There are two models of Link Adapter/RS-422A Converter are available. They
provide different features:
• NT-AL001 Link Adapter
The RS-232C port is insulated from the RS-422A/485 terminals. An RS232C cable (2 m max.) can be connected to either serial port A or B on
the NT20.
• CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Converter
The RS-232C port is not insulated from the RS-422A/485 terminals. The
CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Converter can be connected to either serial port A
or B on the NT20.
• Communications Distance
Use the NT-AL001 if the communications distance exceeds 50 m.
8
Section 1-3
Method for Connection to the Host
Combinations of Communications Method and Connection Method
The connection methods that can be used depending on the communications
method used and the communications type for communications between the
NT20 and the host are indicated in the table below.
Communications
type at Host
RS-232C
Usable Connection Method
Direct 1:1 connection
PT
Usable Communications Method
Host Link
1:1 NT Link 1:N NT Link
❍
❍
❍
×
×
❍
×
×
❍
Host
RS-232C (15 m max.)
RS-232C
1:N connection with RS-422A through
Link Adapter and RS-422A Converters
PT
NT-AL001 (See note 1.)
or CJ1W-CIF11 RS422A Converter NT-AL001
Link Adapter
Host
RS-422A
(total length 500 m, RS-232C
(2 m max.)
See note 2.)
RS-232C
1:N connection with RS-485 through
Link Adapter and RS-422A Converters
PT
NT-AL001 (See note
1.) or CJ1W-CIF11
RS-422A Converter NT-AL001
Link Adapter
RS-485
(total length 500 m,
See note 2.)
Host
RS-232C
(2 m max.)
❍: Connection possible ×: Connection not possible
Note
(1) An RS-232C Cable (not shown in the diagram) is required when connecting an NT-AL001 Link Adapter to a PT.
(2) If the CJ1W-CIF11 is used, the total communications distance is 50 m.
This also applies if both the NT-AL001 and CJ1W-CIF11 are used in the
same communications path.
9
Section 1-4
Communications with PLC by Direct Connection
1-4
1-4-1
Communications with PLC by Direct Connection
Functions of the Allocated Bits and Words
When using an [email protected] with the direct connection function (host link or
NT link), the elements displayed on the NT20 and the NT20 status can be
allocated to the bits and words of the PLC. By changing the contents of the
bits and words, the NT20 can be controlled by the PLC. It is also possible to
send data to the PLC by pressing the touch switches on the NT20.
• Controlling the NT20 by a PLC
The following NT20 functions can be controlled by a PLC.
Screens:
Display of designated screens, confirmation
of screen numbers, etc.
Memory tables:
Writing to a memory table, copying from a
memory table entry to another memory table
entry, etc.
Lamps and touch switches: Display instructions, confirmation of display
status, etc.
System control:
Buzzer ON/OFF, backlight ON/OFF, and other NT20 status
• Notifying the PLC from the NT20
Data in the NT20 is sent to a PLC when a touch switch is pressed. The following types of data are sent to a PLC.
• NT20 status
• Touch switch status
• Numerical values input with touch switches by using the numeral setting function
• Changes in a memory table after copying between memory table entries
Functions of Display Elements
• Lamps
Allocation destination: Bit
Lamp #1 (Bit 000100)
NT20
PLC
Lit
Switch 1: ON (Bit 000100)
Unlit
Switch 2: OFF (Bit 000101)
Lamp #2 (Bit 000101)
PLC’s bit status is displayed by the “Lamp” on the NT20.
The lamp comes on (flashes) when the PLC’s bit status (lamp bit) is ON
(1), and goes off when it is OFF (0).
10
Section 1-4
Communications with PLC by Direct Connection
• Touch Switches
Allocation Destination: Bit
Touch switch
12 Bit 009012
NT20
PLC
Bit 009012: ON
The lamp comes on (flashes) when the PLC’s control bit is ON (1) and
goes off when it is OFF (0). When the touch switch is pressed, the PLC’s
notification bit comes ON (1) or goes OFF (0).
• Numeral Memory Table
Allocation destination: Word
Numeral memory
table entry 1 (TIM003) NT20
PLC
Numeral memory table entry 150 (word 0005)
Allocate the numeral memory table entries to arbitrary words in the PLC. If
word contents change when corresponding numeral memory table entry is
displayed on the screen, the value on the screen will also change. Monitoring of words can also be made easily.
Reading and writing are executed so that the contents of allocated words
and contents of numeral memory table entries are always the same during
display.
• Character-string Memory Table
Allocation destination: Word
NT20
PLC
("a", "b")
("c", "d")
("e", "f")
Character-string memory table entry 1
Allocated word number: 3
First word: DM0100
Allocate character-string memory table entries to arbitrary words in the
PLC. If word contents change when corresponding character-string memory table entry is displayed on the screen, the value on the screen will also
change. Messages can be displayed easily.
Reading and writing are executed so that the contents of allocated words
and contents of character string memory table entries are always the same
during display.
11
Section 1-4
Communications with PLC by Direct Connection
Functions of the PT Status Control Area (PLC to NT20)
The “PT status control area” is used to control the NT20 status. When data is
written to this area in the PLC, the NT20 reads the contents and operates
according to the contents.
Example of the PT Status Control Area Application
When data is written to the PT status control area, the NT20 will operate as
given below.
Screen 3
display
PLC
NT20
PT status control area
Screen switch setting
Memory table entry
Copy setting
PT status control bits
Continuous
buzzer sound
Numeral memory table entry 50
Copy
Numeral memory table entry 7
Functions of the PT Status Notify Area (NT20 to PLC)
The “PT status notify area” is used to notify the PLC of changes of the NT20
status. When a change is made in the NT20 status, the change is written to
this area in the PLC. By reading the data from the area, the NT20 status can
be checked.
Example of the PT Status Notify Area Application
When a change is made in the NT20 status, such change will be indicated in
the PT status notify area as described below.
NT20
12345678
PLC
Numeral memory table entry 13
12345678 PT status notify area
Currently display screen
Updated memory table entry
PT status
Allocated word (numeral table entry 13)
12345678
1-4-2
Start
Start + 1
Connecting to PLC from Other Companies
The NT20 can be connected to PLCs from other companies using the computer link method.
Connectable PLCs
The NT20 can be connected to the following PLCs.
• Mitsubishi A-series Sequencers (via Computer Link Unit)
• Mitsubishi FX-series Sequencers
Refer to the PLC Connection Manual (Cat. No. V042) for connection methods.
NT Series Support
Software
The following Support Software is required when connecting PLCs from other
companies.
Support Software: NT-ZJCAT1-EV4(S) (NT Series Support Software for
Windows, Version [email protected])
12
Communications Using RS-232C (NT20-ST128)
1-5
Section 1-5
Communications Using RS-232C (NT20-ST128)
This section gives a brief description of the NT20 control commands sent from
the host through the RS-232C interface when the NT20-ST128 is used.
For details on each of the commands sent through the RS-232C interface,
refer toSECTION 6 Using RS-232C Communications.
Control of the NT20 by a Host is executed by two kinds of commands supported by the RS-232C interface that is built into the NT20.
Operation Commands
Operation commands are used to control the display and status of the running
NT20 as well as to provide notification.
They are used for purposes such as screen display, data writing, and enquiries.
Notification of the NT20 operation contents can be provided to the Host.
Terminal Commands
Terminal commands are used to use the NT20 as a display terminal of the
Host.
When the NT20 is used as a display terminal, it can display characters and
figures according to instructions given by the Host, independently of the
screens registered to the NT20.
These commands are also used if unexpected problems occur.
13
Section 1-6
Before Operating
1-6
Before Operating
Follow the procedure given below to start the system of the NT20.
Host
NT Support Tool
NT20
Set the host settings.
• For the Host Link, refer
to page 44, and the manuals for the Host Link
Unit and Programming
Device.
• For a 1:1 NT Link, refer
to page 56.
• For 1:N NT Links, refer to
page 60.
• For high-speed 1:N NT
Links, refer to page 65.
• When using C200H
direct communications,
no settings are required.
• For RS-232C, refer to
page 79 and the manuals for the Host.
Connect to the NT20.
Set the DIP switch pins.
(page 19)
Install the NT Support
Tool in the computer.
(Refer to the NT Support Tool
Operation Manual.)
Install the PT in the
operation panel.
(page 22)
Connect the power supply
and peripheral device.
(page 23)
Install the system program.
(See note.)
(Refer to page 126 and the NT
Support Tool operation manual.)
Transmit the screen data.
Create the screens.
(Refer to the NT Support Tool
Operation Manual.)
(page 102)
Set the memory switches.
(page 91)
Connect to the host.
Create the host program.
Confirm the settings and
check communications.
Start operation.
Note
14
System program installation is only done in special circumstances, for example when changing the system program, or when recovering the original status of the installed program. This operation is not normally necessary.
Section 1-6
Before Operating
Refer to the following manuals for the equipment and software.
Device or Software
Manual Title
Cat. No.
NT20
System Installer
User’s Manual
NT-series Support Tool for Windows (Ver. 4.8) Operation Manual
[email protected]
[email protected]
NT Support Tool
PLC
NT-series Support Tool for Windows (Ver. 4.8) Operation Manual
SYSMAC CPM1 Operation Manual
[email protected]
[email protected]
SYSMAC CPM1A Operation Manual
SYSMAC CPM2A Operation Manual
[email protected]
[email protected]
SYSMAC CPM2C Operation Manual
SYSMAC C200H Operation Manual (for CPU01/03/11) (Programming)
[email protected]
[email protected]
SYSMAC C200H Operation Manual (for CPU21/23/31) (Programming)
SYSMAC C200HS Installation Guide
[email protected]
[email protected]
SYSMAC C200HS Operation Manual (Programming)
SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE (-Z) Installation Guide
[email protected]
[email protected]
SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE Operation Manual
SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE-Z Operation Manual
[email protected]
[email protected]
SYSMAC CQM1/CPM1/CPM1A/SRM1 Programming Manual
SYSMAC CQM1H Operation Manual
[email protected]
[email protected]
SYSMAC CVM1/CV500/CV1000/CV2000/CVM1 Operation Manual: Ladder Diagrams
[email protected]
CS Series Programmable Controllers Operation Manual
CJ Series [email protected]@-E Programmable Controllers Operation Manual
[email protected]
[email protected]
CS/CJ Series Programming Manual
CS/CJ Series Serial Communications Boards/Units Operation Manual
[email protected]
[email protected]
SYSMAC CQM1H Series Serial Communications Board Operation Manual
SRM1 (-V2) Operation Manual
[email protected]
[email protected]
SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manual: C-series PLCs
[email protected]
SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manual: CVM1 PLCs
SYSMAC CPT User Manual and Quick Start Guide
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
CX-Programmer Ver. 4 User Manual
SYSMAC C Series Host Link Unit System Manual
[email protected]
[email protected]
SYSMAC CVM1/CV Series Host Link Operation Manual
SYSMAC C200HW-COM01 C200HW-COM02-V1 to C200HW-COM06-EV1 Communications Board Operation Manual
[email protected]
[email protected]
CompoBus Master
Control Unit
Programming Tools
Host Link Unit/
Serial Communications Board
15
Before Operating
16
Section 1-6
SECTION 2
Hardware Settings and Connections
This section describes the settings of the NT20, connections to a Host, and other hardware settings.
2-1
2-2
2-3
Description of Parts and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
2-1-1
Description of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
2-1-2
Operation Status DIP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
2-2-1
Installation Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
2-2-2
Installation to the Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22
2-2-3
Power Supply Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
Connecting Link Adapters and RS-422A Converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
2-3-1
Connecting an CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
2-3-2
Connecting an NT-AL001 Link Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28
2-4
Connecting the NT Support Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
2-5
Using a Memory Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36
2-5-1
Installation Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
2-5-2
2-6
2-7
2-8
Method of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
2-6-1
Host Types and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44
2-6-2
Connecting Directly between RS-232C Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
69
Communicating with the PLC Using C200H Direct Communications . . . . .
73
2-7-1
Applicable PLC Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73
2-7-2
Connection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73
2-7-3
Turning the Power ON/OFF When Using C200H Direct
Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77
Host Connections by RS-232C (NT20-ST128) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
79
2-8-1
Host Computer Communications Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
79
2-8-2
Connector Pin Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
79
17
Section 2-1
Description of Parts and Settings
Note
2-1
On unpacking the NT20 and peripheral devices, check their external appearance and confirm that there is no damage. Also confirm that there is no abnormal noise when you shake the PT lightly.
Description of Parts and Settings
Before getting to the operation, confirm the names and functions of parts.
Also set the DIP switches on the NT20.
2-1-1
Description of Parts
Front View
RUN indicator
Touch switches can be created
• Lit green while the PT is in in the desired locations on the
RUN mode.
display and used as lamps,
input switches, and other
functional objects.
Note
The NT20 comes in two body colors.
• NT20-ST121-E: Ivory
• NT20-ST121B-E: Black
• NT20-ST128: Ivory
• NT20-ST128B: Black
Rear View
Expansion interface connector
When using an Expansion Interface Unit
such as a Memory Unit, connect it here.
Battery cover
There is a battery holder beneath this
cover. The Battery is not installed when the
PT is shipped.
Type name
Contrast control
Use a fine flat-blade screwdriver.
Reset switch
DIP switch
Power input terminals
Connect the power to the NT20 at
these terminals
Serial port B connector
Connect this connector to communicate with a
host. An RS-232C 9-pin connector is required. A
CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Converter can be
connected directly.
Serial port A connector
Connect this connector to a host or to
a computer running Support Software.
An RS-232C 9-pin connector is
required. A CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A
Converter can be connected directly.
18
Section 2-1
Description of Parts and Settings
2-1-2
Operation Status DIP Switch Settings
Set the NT20 operation status with the DIP switches located in the bottom
right corner on the rear of the body.
Switch #
SW2-1
Function
Screen data forced initialize effective/ineffective
Note When this switch is ON, SW2-4, SW2-5 and SW2-6 must be OFF.
ON
The NT20 will start in a special RUN mode in which the screen data memory is initialized. When it
is started, the memory initialization menu will be displayed. For the initialization procedure, refer to
Section 3-4 Initializing Memory.
SW2-2
[OFF]
The NT20 will start in normal RUN mode.
Screen display language mode. DIP SW2-2 is used to indicate language selection. If it is turned ON, then display language will use English and the language parameter in memory SW is not selectable (User can't
choose other language than English.) But if it is turned OFF, then user can choose other language through
language parameter in memory SW.
[ON]
OFF
SW2-3
SW2-4
SW2-5
Messages are displayed in English.
Language can be selected.
Switching to the System Menu enabled/disabled
ON
The System Menu cannot be displayed. If an error occurs during a start-up, the System Menu will
be automatically displayed. However, “transfer mode” cannot be entered.
[OFF]
The System Menu can be displayed.
Unused (Reserved for system use)
System resource initialize
Note When this switch is ON, SW2-1, SW2-4 and SW2-6 must be OFF.
ON
Effective
SW2-6
[OFF]
Invalid
System program initialize
Note When this switch is ON, SW2-1, SW2-4 and SW2-5 must be OFF.
ON
Effective
[OFF]
Invalid
[ ] indicates factory setting.
!Caution If the DIP switch settings have been changed when the NT20 is powered,
reset the power to the NT20. The changes with the DIP switches become
effective only after the power supply is reset.
Note
(1) ln addition to the DIP switches, set also the “communications type”, “host
link baud rate”, etc. at the memory switches when host link/NT link is
used.
For these settings, refer to Section 3-5 Setting the Conditions of Communications with the Host by Using the Memory Switches (page 91).
(2) It may be necessary to change the DIP switch settings after installing the
NT20 in an operation panel. Bear this in mind when deciding the installa-
19
Description of Parts and Settings
Section 2-1
tion position.
During work at the panel, take care to ensure that no metal scraps enter
the unit.
20
Section 2-2
Installation
2-2
Installation
Install the NT20 to the operation panel and connect the power to the NT20 as
described below.
2-2-1
Installation Environment
Observe the following points when installing the PT in an operation panel.
!Caution Do not install the NT20 at sites subject to the following conditions.
Otherwise, the product may malfunction.
• Severe temperature variations
• Temperatures or humidities outside the ranges stated in the specifications
• High humidity, condensation
• Splashing chemical agents
• Severe oil splashing
• Corrosive or flammable gases
• Strong vibrations or shocks
• Direct exposure to wind and rain (outdoor sites)
• Strong ultra-violet irradiation
Take adequate measures to ensure shielding if the NT20 is used at a location
subject to any of the following conditions.
• Static electricity, or noise from other equipment
• Strong electric or magnetic fields
• Nearby power cables
• Potential exposure to radioactivity
!Caution Do not perform a withstand voltage test. Performing with stand voltage tests
may result in malfunction.
21
Section 2-2
Installation
2-2-2
Installation to the Operation Panel
The NT20 can be flush mounted to an operation panel.
Use the panel fittings and tools included in the product package and follow the
procedure below.
!Caution During work at the panel, take care to ensure that no metal scraps enter the
unit. Otherwise, the product may malfunction.
Note
The thickness of applicable operation panel is 1.6 mm to 4.8 mm. All fittings
must be tightened uniformly to a torque of at least 0.5 to 0.6 N·cm in order to
ensure water- and dust-resistance. The panel must not be soiled or warped,
and must be able to support an installation that will remain secure and strong.
1. Open a hole, shown below, in the panel and install the NT20 from the front
of the panel.
mm
98.5 +0.5
0 mm
mm
178.5 +0.5
0 mm
2. Attach the panel fittings at four positions, shown below, on the rear of the
NT20.
Fit the hook of the fitting in the square hole in the body and tighten the
screw with a Phillips head screwdriver while lightly pulling the fitting.
Note
22
In order to ensure adequate water and dustproof performance, tighten the four
panel fittings uniformly and make sure there are no gaps between the fittings
and the NT20 panel.
Section 2-2
Installation
2-2-3
Power Supply Connection
Connect a 24 VDC power supply to the power input terminals.
!Caution Carefully check the wiring before turning ON the power.
!Caution Do not connect AC power to the DC terminals. Incorrect wiring may result in
burning.
Note
(1) Depending on how the power is turned ON/OFF, the entire system may
stop. Follow the correct procedure when turning the power ON/OFF. Otherwise the system may operate unpredictably.
(2) Use DC power supplies with low voltage fluctuation. An incorrect power
supply may result in malfunctions.
(3) Do not perform a dielectric strength test. Otherwise, the product may malfunction.
(4) If complying with EC directives (low voltage directives), use a power supply with reinforced insulation (compliance with EC directives is planned
for June 1998).
NC
24 V
DC
Circuit
breaker
24 VDC
power supply
Power Supply
The applicable power supply specifications are as follows.
Item
Value
Power supply
Allowable power supply voltage fluctuation range
Power supply voltage capacity
24 VDC
20.4 VDC to 27.6 VDC
(24 VDC −15%, +15%)
10 W or more
Parts Used for Connection
Note
For the connection to the power supply terminal block, use stranded wire of
2 mm2 or greater cross sectional Area (14 AWG stranded wire) and M3.5 size
crimp terminals.
Tighten the screws on the terminal block to a torque of 0.8 N⋅m.
Otherwise the product may malfunction.
Fork type
7 mm or less
Round type
7 mm or less
Recommended Terminals
Maker
Fork type
Round type
Japan Solderless Terminal MFG
Fuji Terminal
2-YS3A
2-YAS3.5
2-3.5
V2-S3.5
Nichifu Terminal
2Y-3.5
2-3.5
Stranded wire
size
2.0 to 2.63 mm2
(14 to 13 AWG)
23
Section 2-3
Connecting Link Adapters and RS-422A Converters
2-3
Connecting Link Adapters and RS-422A Converters
This section describes the installation of the NT-AL001 Link Adapter and
CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Converter, including the external dimensions, procedure for mounting and removal, and specifications. Refer to this information
when designing the control panel. For further details, refer to the Instruction
Sheet supplied with the NT-AL001 or CJ1W-CIF11.
2-3-1
Connecting an CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Converter
The CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Converter connects directly to the NT20’s serial
port A or B and converts RS-232C communications to RS-422A or RS-485.
The NT20 supplies power to the RS-422A Converter through pin 6 of the RS232C connector, so an external power supply is not required.
Note
1. The RS-232C connector is not insulated from the RS-422A/RS-485 connector within the CJ1W-CIF11 RS-422A Converter. If there are concerns
about differences in ground potential or noise, we recommend using the
NT-AL001 Link Adapter.
2. Always turn OFF the NT20’s power supply before installing/removing a RS422A Converter or connecting/disconnecting cables.
3. Always discharge any static electricity by touching a grounded object before installing the RS-422A Converter or connecting cables.
Specifications
General Specifications
Item
Specification
Dimensions
Weight
18.2 × 34.0 × 38.8 mm (W × H × D)
20 g max.
Ambient operating temperature
Ambient storage temperature
0 to 55°C
–20 to 75°C
Ambient operating humidity
Rated power supply voltage
10% to 90% (with no condensation)
5V
(Supplied from pin 6 of the RS-232C connector.)
40 mA max.
Current consumption
Operating atmosphere
No corrosive gases
Vibration resistance
Shock resistance
Same as NT20 Series.
Same as NT20 Series.
Isolation method
Not isolated
Maximum communications distance 50 m (Use the NT-AL001 if the total communications distance exceeds 50 m.)
RS-232C Connector
Connector Pin Arrangement for
RS-232C Port
24
Pin number
Signal
1
2
FG
RD
3
4
SD
CS
5
6
RS
+5V
7, 8
NC
9
Hood
SG
NC
Section 2-3
Connecting Link Adapters and RS-422A Converters
Note
The hood will have the same electrical potential as the connector on the other
end of the cable.
RS-422A/485 Terminal
Block
Signal
RDA–
RDB+
SDA–
SDB+
FG
Block Diagram
SDB(+)
SD
SDA( -)
SW.6
RS
SW.3
CS
SW.2
SW.1
SW.5
RDB(+)
RD
RDA(-)
ER
DR
SV
SG
FG
FG
DIP Switch Settings
Pin
number
Function
ON
1
Terminating resistance
2
Two-wire/four-wire method selection (See note 1.)
3
4
5
6
OFF
With (at both ends of the communications path)
Two-wire method
Without
Two-wire/four-wire method selection (See note 1.)
Two-wire method
Four-wire method
Not used.
Selection of RS control for RD
(See note 2.)
Selection of RS control for SD
(See note 3.)
--With RS control
--Without RS control (always ready
to receive)
Without RS control (always ready
to send)
Note
With RS control
Four-wire method
(1) Set pins 2 and 3 to the same setting. (ON for the two-wire method or OFF
for the four-wire method.)
(2) To prohibit echoback, set pin 5 to ON (with RS control).
25
Section 2-3
Connecting Link Adapters and RS-422A Converters
(3) When connecting to several devices using the four-wire method in a 1:N
connection, set pin 6 to ON (with RS control). When connecting using the
two-wire method, set pin 6 to ON (with RS control).
Dimensions
38.8
18.2
34.0
5.8
DIP Switch Settings,
Wiring, and Installation
The DIP switch settings must be changed to perform communications according to settings other than the default settings.
1. Remove the DIP switch cover using a flat-bladed screwdriver in the way
shown below.
Note
Press the cover gently while removing it to prevent it from popping out suddenly.
2. Using a fine pair of tweezers or other tool with a fine point, change the settings of the DIP switch pins to match the desired communications conditions.
3. Be sure to remount the cover after finishing the DIP switch settings.
1
2
O
N
3
4
5
6
O
N
All the pins are factory-set to OFF.
Wiring the RS-422A/485
Terminal Block
26
• Use either two-wire or four-wire shielded cable.
Recommended cable: CO-HC-ESV-3P×7/0.2 (Hirakawa Hewtech)
Connecting Link Adapters and RS-422A Converters
Section 2-3
• Connect the shield wire at both ends of the cable carrying RS-422A/485
signals to ground, and ground the ground terminal on the Power Supply
Unit of the CPU or Expansion Rack to 100 Ω max.
1. Taking care not to damage the shield, strip between 30 and 80 mm of
sheath off the end of the cable.
30 to 80 mm
2. Carefully twist the shield mesh together to form a single wire, and carefully
cut off the material surrounding the signal wires and any unnecessary signal wires.
3. Strip the sheath off the signal wires to a length sufficient to attach crimp
terminals. Apply vinyl tape or heat–shrinking tube to the sheathes and
stripped parts of communications lines.
4. Attach stick-type crimp terminals to ends of the signal lines and crimp them
using a crimp tool.
• Recommend crimp terminals:
Phoenix Contact
AI Series
AI-0.5-8WH-B (serial number: 3201369)
• Recommended crimp tool:
Phoenix Contact ZA3
With four-wire cables, insert two signal lines into each crimp terminal together
before crimping.
• Recommend crimp terminals:
Phoenix Contact
AI Series
AI-TWIN2×0.5-8WH (serial number: 3200933)
• Recommended crimp tool:
Phoenix Contact
UD6 (serial number: 1204436)
5. Connect the signal lines and the shield line to the RS-422A/485 terminal
block.
27
Section 2-3
Connecting Link Adapters and RS-422A Converters
RS-422A/485 Cable Shield
Connections
When using the CJ1W-CIF11 (with or without the NT-AL001), connect the signal lines, shields, and grounds as shown in the following diagram.
CPU Rack
CPU Unit Power
or Commu- Supply
nications
Unit
Unit
LG
GR
PT
RS-422A/485 shield
connected at both ends
CJ1W-CIF11
Signal line
PT
CJ1W-CIF11
PT
CJ1W-CIF11
2-3-2
Connecting an NT-AL001 Link Adapter
The NS-AL001 Link Adapter connects to serial port A or B of the NT20 with an
RS-232C cable and converts the RS-232C communications to RS-422A or
RS-485. (Serial ports A and B cannot be used simultaneously.)
The NT20 supplies +5 V power (150 mA max.) to the Link Adapter through pin
6 of the RS-232C connector, so an external power supply is not required.
Note
1. The RS-232C connector is insulated from the RS-422A/RS-485 connector
within the NT-AL001 Link Adapter.
2. Always turn OFF the NT20’s power supply before installing/removing a
Link Adapter or connecting/disconnecting cables.
28
Section 2-3
Connecting Link Adapters and RS-422A Converters
Dimensions
The following diagram shows the dimensions of the NT-AL001 Link Adapter.
All dimensions are in mm.
53.5
(2.11)
110 (4.33)
omRon
74.5 (2.93)
100.2 (3.94)
105 (4.13) max.
4 (0.16)
NT-AL001-E
(30)
(1.18)
45 (1.77)
30 (1.18)
Units: mm (inch)
Dimensions with RS-422A Terminal Block Cover Closed
30 × 114 × 100.2 mm (W × H × D)
Dimensions with RS-422A Terminal Block Cover Open
30 × 114 × 119.5 mm (W × H × D)
Installation and Removal
The NT-AL001 Link Adapter can be mounted on a DIN Track or in a control
panel. The Link Adapter’s RS-422A terminal block can be removed easily.
Mounting to a DIN Track
Latch the hook (a) on the rear of the Link Adapter onto the top edge of the DIN
Track, and pivot the Link Adapter downwards (b) as shown in the diagram
below.
Next, fit End Plates at the right and left of the Link Adapter to secure it so that
it cannot shift laterally.
(a)
(b)
29
Section 2-3
Connecting Link Adapters and RS-422A Converters
Removal from a DIN Track
Remove the End Plates from the right and left of the Link Adapter, insert a flat
blade screwdriver into the catch at the bottom of the Link Adapter, and pull it
down to release the catch.
Mounting to a Control Panel
The control panel must be at least 2 mm (5/64 inch) thick. Drill two mounting
screw holes in a control panel and secure the Link Adapter with screws.
30
(1.18)
100
(3.94)
110
(4.33)
21
(0.83)
Note
Specifications
2-M4 holes
Units: mm (inch)
The control panel must be at least 2 mm (5/64 inch) thick for a secure and
strong mount.
The following tables list the NT-AL001 Link Adapter’s general and communications specifications.
General Specifications
Item
Specification
With RS-422A terminal block cover closed:
30 × 114 × 100.2 mm (W × H × D)
With RS-422A terminal block cover open:
30 × 114 × 119.5 mm (W × H × D)
Dimensions
Weight
Ambient temperature
30
Operating
200 g max.
0 to 55°C
Storage
Operating ambient humidity
–20 to 75°C
10% to 90% (with no condensation)
Rated power supply voltage
+5 V ± 10%
(through pin 6 of the RS-232C connector)
Rated power supply current
Inrush current
150 mA max.
0.8 A max.
Insulation resistance
20 MΩ min., measured between the RS-422A terminal signal lines and FG terminal (at 500 VDC)
Section 2-3
Connecting Link Adapters and RS-422A Converters
Item
Dielectric strength
Operating environment
Specification
1,500 VAC for 1 minute between the RS-422A terminal signal lines and the FG terminal
Leakage current: 10 mA max.
No corrosive gases
Vibration resistance
Conforms to JIS C0911, 60 minutes each in X, Y, and
Z directions
Shock resistance
Conforms to JIS C0912, 147 m/s2, 3 times each in X,
Y, and Z directions
Communications Specifications (RS-232C Interface)
Item
Specification
Baud rate
Transmission distance
115.2k bps max.
2 m max.
Connector
9-pin D-SUB connector (female)
Communications Specifications (RS-422A/485 Interface)
Item
Specification
Baud rate
115.2k bps max. (depends on the RS-232C baud
rate)
Transmission distance
Terminal block configuration
500 m max.
8-terminal detachable terminal block, M3.0
31
Section 2-3
Connecting Link Adapters and RS-422A Converters
DIP Switch Settings
The NT-AL001 Link Adapter has a 6-pin DIP switch that sets the RS-422A/
RS-485 communications conditions. Set the DIP switch before connecting the
communications cable.
(Factory settings)
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6
omR on
NT-AL001-E
SW1-1: Not used (always ON)
SW1-2: Built-in terminator setting
- OFF Terminator not set
- ON Terminator set
SW1-3 and SW1-4: 2-wire/4-wire
SW1-3 SW1-4
OFF
2-wire (RS-485)
ON
SW1-3 SW1-4
OFF
4-wire (RS-422A)
ON
SW1-5 and SW1-6: RS-422A send mode
SW1-5 SW1-6
OFF
No RS/CS control
ON
SW1-5 SW1-6
OFF
RS-232C CS control (high)
(Data sent at CS high)
ON
SW1-5 SW1-6
OFF
RS-232C CS control (low)
(Data sent at CS low)
ON
When using Host Link or 1:1 NT Link communications, set the RS-422A send
mode to “no RS/CS control” by turn OFF both SW1-5 and SW1-6.
When using 1:N NT Link communications (standard or high-speed), set the
communications mode to “RS/CS control” by turning ON either pin SW1-5 or
SW1-6.
Note
1. Do not turn ON both SW1-5 and SW1-6 at the same time. This may damage internal circuits.
2. The power supply to the device supplying +5 V must be turned OFF before
starting wiring work.
3. Before connecting the RS-232C cable and turning ON the power to an RS232C device such as a PT (i.e., turning ON the power to the Link Adapter),
check that the cable is wired correctly and that the DIP switch settings are
correct. If the power is turned ON and there is a wiring fault, the internal
circuits of the Link Adapter or the RS-232C device may be damaged.
32
Section 2-3
Connecting Link Adapters and RS-422A Converters
4. When the Link Adapter is connected to a C200HX/HG/HE (-ZE), CQM1H,
CS1G/H, CS1G/H-H, or CJ1G model of OMRON PLC as an RS-422A device, set pins SW1-5 and SW1-6 as indicated below.
SW1-5
OFF
SW1-6
ON
5 6
Terminal Pin Allocation
The NT-AL001 Link Adapter has a terminal block for an RS-422A/485 interface connection and a connector for an RS-232C interface connection.
The pin allocations for the RS-422A/485 terminal block and the RS-232C connector are as follows.
RS-422A/485 Terminal Block
The CSB and CSA signals are for specialized applications.
Pin
7
5
3
8
6
4
2
1
Signal name
Code
8
Request to send (–)
CSA
Signal direction
(Link Adapter ⇔ Device)
Link Adapter → RS-422A/485 Device
7
6
Request to send (+)
Receive data (–)
CSB
RDA
Link Adapter → RS-422A/485 Device
Link Adapter ← RS-422A/485 Device
5
4
Receive data (+)
Send data (–)
RDB
SDA
Link Adapter ← RS-422A/485 Device
Link Adapter → RS-422A/485 Device
3
2
Send data (+)
Signal ground
SDB
SG (GND)
Link Adapter → RS-422A/485 Device
---
1
Functional ground
---
Compatible Crimp Terminals
Use crimp terminals for M3 screws.
Fork terminal
Round terminal
6.2 mm max.
6.2 mm max.
Manufacturer
J.S.T. Mfg Co., Ltd.
Fork
Style
Model
V1.25-N3A
Molex
Round
Fork
V1.25-MS3
VSY1.25-3.5L
Round
RAV1.25-3
Compatible wire
AWG22 to AWG16
(0.25 to 1.65 mm2)
AWG22 to AWG16
(0.3 to 1.65 mm2)
RS-232C Connector
The connector hood is connected to the RS-422A terminal block’s frame
ground terminal.
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
Not used
---
Signal direction
(RS-232C Device ⇔ Link Adapter)
---
2
3
Send data
Receive data
SD
RD
RS-232C Device ← Link Adapter
RS-232C Device → Link Adapter
9
4
Request to send
(shorted to CS internally)
RS
RS-232C Device ← Link Adapter
5
Clear to send
(shorted to RS internally)
CS
RS-232C Device → Link Adapter
6
+5 V (150 mA) input for Link
Adapter
Data set ready
(shorted to ER internally)
+5 V
RS-232C Device → Link Adapter
DR
RS-232C Device → Link Adapter
7
Signal name
Code
33
Section 2-3
Connecting Link Adapters and RS-422A Converters
Pin
8
9
Block Diagram
Signal name
Code
Data terminal ready
(shorted to DR internally)
Signal ground
ER
Signal direction
(RS-232C Device ⇔ Link Adapter)
RS-232C Device ← Link Adapter
SG
---
The following diagram shows the internal block diagram of the NT-AL001 Link
Adapter. Refer to this diagram only when wiring custom cables or connecting
devices with special interfaces.
RS-232C side
D-SUB 9-pin Case
+5 V
SG
6 Fuse
R
RS-422A/485 side
8 terminal block
POWER
Indicator
RS-422A/485 Dr/Rec
DC-DC Converter
L
9
SD
L
Photocoupler
3
R
R
2
3
4
R
SW1-3
R
CS
DR
ER
4
SW1-4
6
Terminating
resistance
5
R
RDA
SW1-2
7
8
8
CSB
CSA
When using RS-422A or RS-485 cables for long-distance communications, do
not ground the shield at both ends of the communications line because large
currents can flow through the shield due to the difference in potential at the
two grounding points. We recommend grounding the shield at one end, as
shown in the following diagram.
Signal lines
NT-AL001
RS-232C
NT20
Host
RS-422A/485
shield
Connect to the
terminal block's
FG terminal.
RS-232C
NT20
RS-232C
NT20
34
RDB
RS-422A Dr
7
RS-422A/485 Cable Shield
Connections
SDB
SDA
SW1-5
5
RS
SG
2-wire/
4-wire
SW1-6
2
FG
REG
IS_0 V
RS-232C
Dr/Rec
RD
1
IS_5 V
Section 2-4
Connecting the NT Support Tool
2-4
Connecting the NT Support Tool
In order to install the system program in the NT20, or to transmit screen data
created with the NT Support Tool to the NT20, the NT20 must be connected to
a personal computer with an RS-232C cable.
The NT20 connects with the RS-232C cable from a personal computer at
serial port A. When the host is connected at serial port B, the connection with
the host can be maintained as it is while the NT20 is connected to the RS232C cable from a personal computer.
Serial port A
(RS-232C, 9-pin)
Communications Conditions
The communications conditions are automatically set when the system
installer and NT Support Tool are started.
Recommended Connector Cable
Use the cable indicated below.
• CV500-CN228 (length: 2 m), made by OMRON
(D-SUB 9-pin, male ⇔ D-SUB 25-pin, male)
• XW2Z-S001 (conversion cable), made by OMRON
(D-SUB 25-pin, female ⇔ half pitch 14-pin, male)
• XW2Z-S002 (length: 2 m), made by OMRON
(D-SUB 9-pin, male ⇔ D-SUB 9-pin, female)
For details on making a connector cable, refer to Appendix E Making the
Cable for Connecting a Personal Computer on page 267.
35
Section 2-5
Using a Memory Unit
2-5
Using a Memory Unit
This section explains how to use a Memory Unit with the NT20. By installing a
Memory Unit (NT-MF261) on the NT20, the system program or the screen
data in the NT20 can be recorded (backed up) in the Memory Unit.
In addition, the system program or the screen data in the Memory Unit can be
automatically read into the NT20 when it starts up. This means that system
program and screen data can be changed easily at the operation site without
connecting to the NT Support Tool.
The data in the Memory Unit is retained without backup by a battery or other
means.
In systems where there are frequent setup changes, by preparing a number of
Memory Units in advance and recording screen data in them according to the
control performed in each case, the NT20 screen data can be changed simply
by installing the Memory Unit, without connecting to the NT Support Tool.
Even if NT20 is replaced, the previous status can be maintained simply by
installing the Memory Unit that retains the system program and screen data of
the previous NT20.
By using the following combinations, data can be stored (backed up) to a
Memory Unit.
• Screen data for two PTs.
• System program for two PTs.
• System program and screen data for one PT.
One Memory Unit can store the screen data for two PTs.
Note
(1) Make sure that the power supply to the PT is OFF before connecting or
disconnecting a Memory Unit. After mounting a Memory Unit, be sure to
tighten its two screws. Otherwise the product may malfunction.
(2) During data transmission, do not turn OFF the power supply to the NT20.
(3) Do not touch the PCB (printed circuit board) with bare hands. Also, discharge any static electricity by touching a grounded object before connecting or disconnecting a Memory Unit. Static electricity may cause the
components to malfunction.
(4) Be sure that the combination of the system program and screen data is
correct in the NT20 before transferring data from the Memory Unit to the
NT20. If the system program and screen data are not combined correctly,
unexpected operation may result.
Reference:
• When a Memory Unit is mounted, the NT20 cannot be set to the operating
status. On completion of data transmission with a Memory Unit, always
disconnect the Memory Unit from the NT20 before starting NT20 operation.
• One Memory Unit can store a system program for up to two PTs of different models. In order to transmit a system program from the Memory Unit
to the NT20, the system program must be compatible to the target PT
model.
• The status of memory switch settings can be recorded to the Memory Unit
besides screen data. When the data in the Memory Unit is written into the
NT20, make sure that these settings can be adapted to the NT20 used
before transmission.
36
Section 2-5
Using a Memory Unit
2-5-1
Installation Method
Install the Memory Unit (NT-MF261) at the expansion interface connector at
the rear of the NT20 as shown in the figure below.
Mounting screws
Screw hole
2-5-2
Method of Use
As shown in the figure below, a Memory Unit has 2 four-pin DIP switches, and
the operation is determined by the DIP switch settings at startup.
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Factory setting is turned all to OFF .
OFF
OFF
SW1
Note
DIP Switch Functions
SW2
Always confirm that the power to the NT20 is OFF before setting the DIP
switches.
The functions of the DIP switches on the Memory Unit are indicated in the
table below.
SW1
Pin
SW1-1
Function
Automatic transmission (writing from the Memory Unit to the PT)
SW1-2
Automatic transmission (writing from the PT to
the Memory Unit)
SW1-3
Manual transmission (Direction of transmission
and bank used selected at the PT touch panel)
SW1-4
Data type to transfer
OFF: Not executed
ON: Executed
OFF: Not executed
ON: Executed
OFF: Not executed
ON: Executed
OFF: Screen data
ON: System program
SW2
Pin
SW2-1
SW2-2
SW2-3
SW2-4
Function
Disable/enable writing to PT
OFF: Disable
Disable/enable writing to the Memory Unit
ON: Enable
OFF: Disable
ON: Enabled
Area (bank) selection of automatic transmission OFF: Bank 0
(See note.)
ON: Bank 1
System/Screen simultaneous transmission
OFF: Disable
ON: Enable
37
Section 2-5
Using a Memory Unit
Note
The Memory Unit stores system program or screen data for one PT
in each of Areas (bank 0, bank 1). (The total data storage is for two
PTs.) SW2-3 sets which of these two banks is used for automatic
transmission.
Reference:
• In the following cases, a mode setting error occurs.
• More than one of the SW1-1 to SW1-3 switches are set to ON.
• None of the SW1-1 to SW1-3 switches are set to ON.
• In the following case, a protect setting error occurs.
Transmitting to the write destination has been disabled by the setting for
SW2-1 or SW2-2.
• In the following cases, a data transmission error occurs.
• An attempt is made to transmit data other than the system program to
PT System Program Area.
• An attempt is made to transmit the system program to PT Screen Data
Area.
• For details on mode setting errors and protect setting errors, refer to
Errors When Using a Memory Unit (page 42).
In this mode, system program or the screen data in the NT20 is forcibly written
to the Memory Unit irrespective of the setting status of the NT20.
Writing Screen Data to a
Memory Unit Using
Automatic Transmission
(PT to Memory Unit)
This mode is convenient if the touch panel is broken and touch switch operation is not possible, or if someone unfamiliar with touch switch operation at the
operation site is using the system.
Reference:
When screen data is written to the Memory Unit, the data that has been
stored in the specified Area up until that point is lost (if the data is written into
only one Bank, the other Bank will not be affected).
■
Method of Execution
Use the following procedure to write the system program or screen data in the
NT20 to the Memory Unit by automatic transmission.
1,2,3...
1. Check that the power supply to the NT20 is OFF, then set the DIP switches
of the Memory Unit as follows after installing Memory Unit to NT20.
ON
1
ON
2
SW1
3
4
1
2
SW2
SW1-4 ON: System program
OFF: Screen data
3
4
SW2-4 ON: System/Screen transmitted simultaneously
OFF: System/Screen not transmitted simultaneously
SW2-3 ON: Bank 1
OFF: Bank 0
It is not strictly necessary to set SW2-1 to OFF (to disable writing to the
PT), but it is recommended to do so to avoid loss of data in the event of
operating errors.
Reference:
• Setting SW2-4 to ON (System/Screen transmitted simultaneously) disables the setting of SW1-4.
• Setting SW2-4 to ON (System/Screen transmitted simultaneously) disables the setting of SW2-3, writes the system program into bank 0, and
the screen data into bank 1 at all times.
38
Section 2-5
Using a Memory Unit
2. Turn the NT20 power ON.
The screen data is automatically written into the Memory Unit. The screen
data in the NT20 is preserved.
The messages Preparing, Transmitting, Verifying, and Finished are displayed on the screen according to the progress of data writing.
At the same time, the progress of the data writing status is displayed by the
means of the number of bytes and blocks (1 bank = 16 block = 1024k byte).
RUN Indicator operates as follows according to the processing status.
Preparing: flashes at intervals of 1 second
Transmitting: flashes at intervals of 0.5 second
Verifying: flashes at intervals of 0.5 second
Finished: lights up
3. Turn the NT20 power OFF, remove the Memory Unit.
To operate NT20 continuously, turn the NT20 power back ON.
In this mode, the system program or screen data in the Memory Unit is forcibly
written to NT20 irrespective of the setting status of the NT20.
Writing Screen Data to the
PT Using Automatic
Transmission (Memory
Unit to PT)
Since data transmission by this method is faster than when the NT Support
Tool or system installer is used, it can save a lot of time. When transmitting the
same system program or screen data to multiple NT20, this mode becomes
convenient.
Reference:
When data is written to the NT20, the data that has been stored up until that
point is lost. When the system program is changed, the operation of NT20
also changes.
■
Method of Execution
Use the following procedure to write the screen data in Memory Unit to the
NT20 by automatic transmission.
1,2,3...
1. Check that the NT20 power is OFF, then set the DIP switches on the Memory Unit as follows after installing Memory Unit to NT20.
ON
1
ON
2
SW1
3
4
1
2
SW2
SW1-4 ON: System program
OFF: Screen data
3
4
SW2-4 ON: System/Screen transmitted simultaneously
OFF: System/Screen not transmitted simultaneously
SW2-3 ON: Bank 1
OFF: Bank 0
It is not strictly necessary to set SW2-2 to OFF (to disable writing to the
Memory Unit), but it is recommended to do so to avoid loss of data in the
event of operating errors.
39
Section 2-5
Using a Memory Unit
Reference:
• Setting SW2-4 to ON (System/Screen transmitted simultaneously) disables the setting of SW1-4.
• Setting SW2-4 to ON (System/Screen transmitted simultaneously) disables the setting of SW2-3. In this case, the data transmission becomes
possible only if the data inside Memory Unit is in either of following combinations.
Bank 0: system program, Bank 1: other than system program
Bank 0: other than system program, Bank 1: system program
If the combination is not as listed above, a data transmitting error occurs.
• When writing the system program into the NT20, the type of system program inside Memory Unit and the PT model must correspond.
2. Turn the NT20 power ON.
The screen data is automatically written into the PT.
The messages Preparing, Transmitting, Verifying and Finished are displayed on the screen according to the progress of data writing.
At the same time, the progress of data writing status is displayed by the
means of the number of bytes and blocks (1 bank = 16 block = 1024k byte).
The RUN Indicator operates as follows according to the processing status.
Preparing: flashes at intervals of 1 second
Transmitting: flashes at intervals of 0.5 second
Verifying: flashes at intervals of 0.5 second
Finished: lights up
3. Turn the NT20 power OFF, remove the Memory Unit.
To operate NT20 continuously, turn the NT20 power back ON.
Reading and Writing Data
by Manual Transmission
In this method, the direction of transmission and Area of the Memory Unit
used are set by touch switch operations at the NT20. Transmission can be
executed while checking the settings.
Reference:
When data is written to the NT20 or Memory Unit, the data that has been
stored up until that point is lost.
■
Method of Execution
Use the following procedure to write screen data using manual transmission.
1,2,3...
1. Check that the NT20 power is OFF, then set the DIP switches on the Memory Unit as follows.
ON
1
ON
2
3
4
1
SW1
Setting of SW1-4 not relevant
2
3
SW2
4
Setting of SW2-4 not relevant
Setting of SW2-3 not relevant
In order to avoid loss of data in the event of operating errors, it is advisable
to set SW2-1 and SW2-2 so as to disable writing to the Unit from which the
data is to be read.
2. Turn the NT20 power ON.
Display language select screen appears.
40
Section 2-5
Using a Memory Unit
3. Press the Japanese or English touch switches to select the display language.
The screen shown below is displayed.
Current PT Screen Data, System
The first line: System program name and version for the system program
inside the PT.
The second line: Resource name and version for the resource inside the
PT.
Current PT Screen Data, Screen
The comment for the screen data in the NT20 is displayed here.
Current Memory Unit Screen Data
• System Program:
The first line: System program name and version for the system program
inside the Memory Unit.
The second line: Resource name and version for the resource inside the
Memory Unit.
• Screen Data:
The comment for the screen data in the NT20 is displayed here.
The available transmitting destinations are altered depending on the settings
of the source of transmitting as described in the table below
Source
[PT]screen
[PT]system
[PT]system/screen
[Memory Unit] Bank 0
Description
[Memory Unit] Bank 0
[Memory Unit] Bank 1
[Memory Unit] Bank 0/1 (fixed)
• If system program is selected
[PT]system (fixed)
• If screen data is selected
[PT]screen (fixed)
[Memory Unit] Bank 0/1
[PT]system/screen (fixed)
[Memory Unit] Bank 1
Reference:
• When transmitting the system program and screen data simultaneously
from the PT to the Memory Unit, the setting of banks is Bank 0: system
program, Bank 1: screen data, and when transmitting them from the
Memory Unit to the PT, either of the following combinations must be used.
Bank 0: system program, Bank 1: other than system program
Bank 0: other than system program, Bank 1: system program
• When writing the system program into the NT20, the type of system program inside Memory Unit and the PT model must correspond.
41
Section 2-5
Using a Memory Unit
4. Press Execute.
The messages Preparing, Transmitting, Verifying, and Finished are displayed according to the progress of data transmission. At the same time,
the progress of data transmitting status is displayed by the means of the
number of bytes and blocks (1 bank = 16 block = 1024k byte).
When the data transmission is operated manually, RUN Indicator remains
OFF.
5. Turn the NT20 power OFF, remove the Memory Unit, then turn the NT20
power back ON.
Errors When Using a
Memory Unit
If an error occurs when using the Memory Unit, the NT20 operates as follows
• Details on the error and remedial action are displayed on the screen.
Each screen has touch switches to change the display language from one
to the other. When the manual data transmission is operating, the content
of error and remedial action are shown with selected language. When the
automatic transmission is operating, it is displayed in Japanese.
• The continuous buzzer sounds.
• The RUN Indicator flashes.
If a protect setting error occurs when executing manual transmission, it is possible to return to the Memory Unit manual transmission screen by pressing
the OK touch switch, but in the case of other errors, the status described
above remains in effect until the NT20 power is turned OFF or reset.
When an error occurs, take remedial action by referring to the table below.
Error
Probable Cause
Remedial Action
Mode setting error
DIP Switch pins SW1-1 to
SW1-3 are all OFF, or more
than one is ON.
Protect setting error
(manual transmission)
Writing to the data write desti- Perform either of the following
nation has been prohibited by procedures.
the setting of SW2-1 or SW2- • Press the OK touch switch to
2.
return to the Memory Unit
manual transmission screen,
make the correct settings,
then try again.
• Turn the NT20 power OFF,
correct the DIP switches settings of the Memory Unit,
then turn the power back
ON.
Flash memory error
An error occurred during initialization of the NT20 or
Memory Unit flash memory, or
during write processing.
Turn the NT20 power OFF, set
the Memory Unit DIP switches
correctly, then turn the NT20
power back ON.
Protect setting error Writing to the data write desti- Turn the NT20 power OFF, set
(automatic transmis- nation has been prohibited by the Memory Unit DIP switches
sion)
the setting of SW2-1 or SW2- correctly, then turn the NT20
2.
power back ON.
42
Turn the NT20 power OFF,
then back ON. If the error
recurs, the flash memory at
the write destination may be
faulty. In this case, replace the
Unit.
Section 2-5
Using a Memory Unit
Error
Verify error
Probable Cause
An error occurred during verification processing at the flash
memory of the NT20 or the
Memory Unit.
Remedial Action
Turn the NT20 power OFF,
then back ON. If the error
recurs, the flash memory at
the write destination may be
faulty. In this case, replace the
Unit.
Transmitting data
An attempt is made to trans- Perform either of the following
error (The automatic mit data other than a system procedures.
transmission only)
program or the system pro• Turn the NT20 power OFF,
gram of a different PT model
correct the DIP switch setinto the NT20 as the system
tings of the Memory Unit,
program.An attempt is made
and then turn the power
to write a system program into back ON.
the NT20 as screen data.
• Turn the NT20 power OFF,
set the DIP switch settings to
the manual transmission,
and then check the data
inside the Memory Unit.
43
Section 2-6
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
2-6
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
The method for connecting directly between the RS-232C port of the PT and
the RS-232C port of the host is as follows.
The following discussion is focused on the connection method to OMRON
PLCs.
Direct Connection between RS-232C Ports with RS-232C Cable
This is the easiest connection method. Depending on the host to which the
connection is to be made, it may be possible to use OMRON cables with connectors.
NT20
Host
RS-232C cable (15 m max.)
Note
2-6-1
The CS/CJ-series CPU Unit cannot be connected with the 1:1 NT link
method. Use the 1:N NT link method instead of making a 1:1 connection. For
details, refer to Using the 1:N NT Link on page 60 or Using the High-speed
1:N NT Links on page 65.
Host Types and Settings
The types of host that can be connected to a PT by using the RS-232C ports
of both devices, and the settings to be made at the host, are described here.
Using the Host Link Method
Compatible Hosts
Some models and series of OMRON PLCs have the Host Link function built
in.
In the CS-series (including the CS1-H PLCs), CJ-series, and CQM1H PLCs,
the Host Link method can be used by installing a Serial Communications
Board or Unit. In addition, some C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E have an integral CPU
Unit that can be connected in the Host Link method by installing a Communications Board.
Check the model and series of the PLC, the type of installed Serial Communications Board, Serial Communications Unit, or Host Link Unit before making a
connection.
The hosts that can be connected to the NT20 by the Host Link method using
the RS-232C ports of both Units are indicated in the table below.
PLC
Series
CS Series
CJ Series
44
Units with Built-in Host Link
Function
CPU Units Connectable with
Host Link Units or Expansion
Communications Board
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-EV1
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-EV1
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-EV1 CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-EV1
CS1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H CS1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H
CS1H-CPU63H/64H/65H/66H/ CS1H-CPU63H/64H/65H/66H/
67H
67H
CJ1G-CPU44/45
CJ1G-CPU44/45
Host Link Unit/
Communications
Board
CS1W-SCU21
CS1W-SCB21
CS1W-SCB41
CJ1W-SCU41
Connectable
to
CS1G
CS1H
CS1G-H
CS1H-H
CJ1G
Section 2-6
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
PLC
Series
C Series
Units with Built-in Host Link
Function
Host Link Unit/
Communications
Board
Connectable
to
---
C200HS-CPU01/03/21/23/31/
33-E
C200HE-CPU11/32/42-E
C200HE-CPU11/32/42-ZE
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-E
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-ZE
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64-E
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64/65/
85-ZE
C200H-LK201-EV1
C200HS
C200HE
C200HE-Z
C200HG
C200HG-Z
C200HX
C200HX-Z
C200HS-CPU21/23/31/33-E
C200HE-CPU42-E
C20HE-CPU42-ZE
C200HG-CPU43/63-E
C200HG-CPU43/63-ZE
C200HX-CPU44/64-E
C200HX-CPU44/64/65/85-ZE
--C200HE-CPU32/42-E
C200HE-CPU32/42-ZE
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-E
C200HG-CPU33/43/53/63-ZE
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64-E
C200HX-CPU34/44/54/64/65/
85-ZE
---
--C200HW-COM02/04/
05/06-EV1
C200HS
C200HE
C200HE-Z
C200HG
C200HG-Z
C200HX
C200HX-Z
---
CPM1
---
---
CPM2A-30/40/[email protected]@[email protected]
+CPM1-CIF01
(Peripheral port connection)
CPM2C-10/[email protected]@@@@@[email protected]
(See note 1.)
CQM1-CPU21-E
CQM1-CPU41/42/43/44-EV1
---
---
CPM2A
---
---
CPM2C
---
---
CQM1
CQM1H-CPU11/21/51/61 (See
note 2.)
CQM1H-CPU51/61
CQM1H-SCB41
CQM1H
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
CV500-LK201
CVM1
SRM1-C02-V1
---
---
SRM1
CPM1-10/20/[email protected]
+CPM1-CIF01
CPM1A-10/20/30/[email protected]@
+CPM1-CIF01
CVM1
Series
(See note
3.)
CompoBus/S
Master
Unit
CPU Units Connectable with
Host Link Units or Expansion
Communications Board
Note
(1) Use a CPM2C-CN111 or CS1W-CN114/118 Connecting Cable, CPM1CIF01 RS-232C Adapter, or CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter to connect.
(2) The CQM1H-CPU11 does not have a built-in RS-232C port, so connect
to the PT at the peripheral port with a CS1W-CN118 Connecting Cable.
(3) CPU Units of CVM1/CV-series PLCs without the suffix [email protected] cannot be
connected.
45
Section 2-6
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Settings at the Host
When using the Host Link method, the settings shown below must be made at
the host (depending on the Unit, some of these settings may not be necessary, or settings not shown here may be necessary).
Item
Note
Switch Setting
I/O port
RS-232C
Baud rate
Transfer code
Set the same baud rate as for the NT20. (See note 1.)
ASCII, 7 data bits, 2 stop bits
Parity
1-to-1/1-to-N
Even
Command level
Unit #
Level 1, 2, 3
00
1-to-N (See note 2.)
(1) Set the Host Link baud rate up to 115,200 bps with the memory switch at
the NT20.
(2) The 1-to-N setting enables BCC (Block Check Character). It is not actually possible to connect more than one NT20 in a single Host Link.
The setting methods for each Unit are described below.
Connecting to a C-series
Host Link Unit
C200H, C200HS, and C200HE/HG/HX (-Z)E Rack-mounted Unit:
C200H-LK201-V1
Setting the Front Switches
Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that the values or symbols in
the setting value window agree with the following.
LK201
XMT
RUN
RCV
ERROR
• Unit # (SW1, SW2)
Set these switches to 0.
SW2
SW1
0
0
5
2
SW3
• Command level, parity, and transfer code (SW4)
Set this switch to 2.
SW4
• Baud rate (SW3)
Set this switch to 5 to select 9,600 bps.
Set this switch to 6 to select 19,200 bps.
Setting the Rear Switches
ON
CTS selector switch
External
0 V (ON)
46
1
2
3
4
• 1-to-1/1-to-N selection (DIP switch)
Set pin 3 to ON.
• CTS selection (selector switch)
Set this always to 0V (ON).
Section 2-6
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Connecting to a CVM1/CVseries Host Link Unit
CVM1/CV-series Rack-mounted Unit: CV500-LK201
A CVM1/CV-series Host Link Unit (CV500-LK201) has two connectors (communications ports 1 and 2). Either of these ports can be used for connection
to an NT20 by the RS-232C method. However, since the connectors at these
ports are of different types, a cable that matches the connector must be prepared.
• Communications Port 1
Communications port 1 is a 25-pin connector for RS-232C use only.
• Communications Port 2
Communications port 2 is a 9-pin connector that allows selection of the
RS-232C or RS-422A method. When this port is used with the RS-232C
method, the I/O port selector switch on the front of the Unit must be set to
RS-232C (the upper position).
CPU Bus Unit Settings
When connecting to a CVM1/CV-series Host Link Unit, set the following communications conditions for the CPU Bus Unit settings.
Item
Note
Setting at Host
Baud rate
Transfer code
Set the same baud rate as set at the NT20 (See note 1.)
ASCII, 7 data bits, 2 stop bits
Parity
1-to-1, 1-to-N
Even
1-to-N (See note 2.)
Command level
Level 1, 2, 3
(1) Set the Host Link baud rate at 9,600 bps or 19,200 bps with the memory
switch at the NT20.
(2) The 1-to-N setting enables BCC (Block Check Character). It is not actually possible to connect more than one NT20 in a single Host Link.
Set the CPU Bus Unit settings directly from a Programming Device (e.g.,
SYSMAC Support Software).
For details on the CPU Bus Unit settings, refer to the SYSMAC CVM1/CVseries Host Link Unit Operation Manual ([email protected]).
47
Section 2-6
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Setting the Front Switches
• Unit # (SW3, SW4)
When using communications port 2, set
these switches to 0.
Communications port 1
(RS-232C)
• I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to RS-232C.
Communications port 2
(RS-232C/RS-422A)
• CTS selection (Pins 2 and 3)
Set pin 2 or 3 to ON. (Set this always to 0V.)
To use communications port 1, turn ON pin 2.
To use communications port 2, turn ON pin 3.
I/O port selector switch
RS-232C
RS-422A
• Communications condition setting (Pin 1)
Set this pin to OFF.
Communications are executed in accordance with
the CPU Bus Unit system settings made at the PLC.
The initial values for the system settings are as
- Baud rate: 9,600 bps
- Parity: Even
- Xon/Xoff control: Not executed
- Communications method: Full duplex
- Stop bits: 2 stop bits
- Data length: 7 bits
Connecting to a CS/CJseries Serial
Communications Unit
CS/CJ-series Rack-mounted Unit: CS1W-SCU21CJ-series: CJ1W-SCU41
(Port 2 is an RS-232C Port.)
Setting the Front Switches
Set the unit number of the Serial Communications Unit by using the rotary
switch located on the front panel. Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver
so that the values or symbols in the setting value window agree with the following.
CS1W-SCU21
SCU21
RDY
ERH
SD2
RD2
RUN
ERC
SD1
RD1
UNIT0
No. 3241
FE
D
C
56789AB
Set the unit number to 0 through F so
that it will not duplicate the numbers
used in other Units.
CJ1W-SCU41
Set the unit number to 0 through F so that
it will not duplicate the numbers used in
other Units.
Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU Unit
Settings are written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console
or CX-Programmer) directly into the allocated DM Area (PLC Setup) of the
CPU Unit. After the settings are written, they become effective by turning the
power ON, restarting the Unit, restarting the communications port, or execution of the STUP instruction.
48
Section 2-6
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
The following table shows the words allocated in the DM Area and the settings.
m = DM30000 + 100 × unit number
Allocated DM word
Port 1
Port 2
Connecting to a CPU Unit
Value
Settings
m
m+10
8000
Host Link mode, 2 stop bits, even parity, data
length 7 bits
m+1
m+11
0000
0007
Baud rate: 9,600 bps.
Baud rate: 19,200 bps.
0008
0009
Baud rate: 38,400 bps.
Baud rate: 57,600 bps.
m+2
m+12
000A
0000
Baud rate: 115,200 bps.
Transmit delay time 0 ms.
m+3
m+13
0000
No CTS control Unit No.0 for Host Link
CV-series and CVM1/CV-series ([email protected]) CPU Units
CVM1-CPU01-EV2/CVM1-CPU11-EV2/CVM1-CPU21-EV2
PLC Setup
When connecting to a CVM1/CV-series CPU Unit, set the following communications conditions for the PLC Setup.
Item
Note
Baud rate
Setting at Host
Set the same baud rate as set at the NT20 (See note.)
Stop bits
Parity
2 stop bits
Even
Data length
Unit #
ASCII 7 bits
00
Set the Host Link baud rate at 9,600 bps or 19,200 bps with the memory
switch at the NT20.
Either set PLC Setup directly from a Programming Device (e.g., SYSMAC
Support Software), or transmit the PLC Setup made at a Programming Device
to the CPU Unit.
For details on the PLC Setup, refer to the SYSMAC CVM1/CV500/1000/2000
Operation Manual: Ladder Diagrams ([email protected]).
49
Section 2-6
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Setting the Front Switches
• Host Link Communications method
(selector switch)
Set this to RS-232C.
I/O port selector switch
RS-232C
RS-422A
• System setting (Pin 4)
To effect the existing DIP switch
settings, set SW4 to ON.
To effect the existing PLC Setup,
set pin 4 to OFF.
Note
For CPU Units manufactured before or
during June 1995 (lot No. jj65), the
existing DIP switch settings differ from
the existing PLC Setup as follows.
- DIP switch settings:
2,400 bps, 1 stop bit, even parity, 7 bit
data length
- PLC Setup:
9,600 bps, 2 stop bits, even parity, 7 bit
data length
For CPU Units manufactured from July
1995 onward (lot No. @@75), the
stipulated values in the DIP switch
settings also are 9,600 bps and 2 stop
bits.
C-series C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CPM1, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1,
CQM1H CPU Units and SRM1
The connection method depends upon the model of PLC being used, as
shown in the following table.
PLC model
Connect to the CPU Unit’s built-in RS-232C port.
• Connect to the CPU Unit’s built-in RS-232C port.
• Connect to one of the RS-232C ports (port A or port B) on
a Serial Communications Board.
CQM1H
• Connect to the CPU Unit’s built-in RS-232C port.
• Connect to the peripheral port through a CS1W-CN118
Connecting Cable.
• Connect to the RS-232C port (port 1) on a Serial Communications Board.
Connect to the peripheral port through a CPM1-CIF01 RS232C Adapter.
CPM1
50
Connection method
C200HS, CQM1
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
CPM2A, SRM1
• Connect to the CPU Unit’s built-in RS-232C port.
• Connect to the peripheral port through a CPM1-CIF01 RS232C Adapter.
CPM2C
Connect to the CPU Unit’s RS-232C port or the peripheral
port through a Connecting Cable (CPM2C-CN111, CS1WCN118, or CS1W-CN114).
(The CPM2C-CN111 splits the Unit’s Communications Port
into a RS-232C port and a peripheral port. A CPM1-CIF01
RS-232C Adapter is also required to connect to this peripheral port.)
Section 2-6
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
PLC Setup Settings
When connecting to a C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CPM1, CPM2A,
CPM2C, CQM1, or CQM1H CPU Unit, or SRM1, set the following communications conditions for the PLC Setup.
Note
Item
Communications mode
Host Link mode
Setting at Host
Baud rate
Stop bits
Set the same speed as set at the NT20 (See note.)
2 stop bits
Parity
Data length
Even
ASCII 7 bits
Unit #
00
Set the Host Link baud rate at 9,600 bps or 19,200 bps with the memory
switch at the NT20.
Set the PLC Setup settings directly from a Programming Device (e.g., the CXProgrammer Support Software).
For details on operations relating to the PLC Setup, refer to the manual for the
PLC which is used.
The PLC Setup area word addresses and settings to be made depending on
the Unit and port to which the connection is made are shown below.
CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1H, or SRM1: Peripheral Port Connection
Word
DM6650
DM6651
DM6653
Writing Value
Settings
0001
Host Link mode, no CTS control
Communications conditions set by the contents of DM
0303
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity, baud rate:
9,600 bps
0304
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity, baud rate:
19,200 bps
0000
Unit # 00
C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CPM2A, CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H (other
than the CPU11), or SRM1: Built-in RS-232C Port Connection
Word
DM6645
Writing Value
Settings
0001
Host Link mode, no CTS control
Communications conditions set by the contents of DM
DM6646
0303
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity, baud rate:
9,600 bps
0304
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity, baud rate:
19,200 bps
0000
Unit # 00
DM6648
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E: Serial Communications Board Port A
CQM1H: Serial Communications Board Port 1
Word
Writing Value
Settings
DM6555
0001
Host Link mode, no CTS control
Communications conditions set by the contents of DM
DM6556
0303
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity, baud rate:
9,600 bps
0304
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity, baud rate:
19,200 bps
Unit # 00
DM6558
0000
51
Section 2-6
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E: Serial Communications Board Port B
Word
DM6550
DM6551
Writing Value
Settings
0001
Host Link mode, no CTS control
Communications conditions set by the contents of DM
0303
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity, baud rate:
9,600 bps
0304
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity, baud rate:
19,200 bps
DM6553
0000
Unit # 00
CPM1: Peripheral Port Connection through a CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter
Word
DM6650
DM6651
DM6653
Writing Value
Settings
0001
Host Link mode
Communications conditions set by the contents of DM
0303
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity, baud rate:
9,600 bps
0304
Data length 7 bits, 2 stop bits, even parity, baud rate:
19,200 bps
0000
Unit # 00
Connecting to a CPM2C
The CPM2C PLCs do not have the same kind of port connectors found on
CS1-series PLCs. The CPM2C’s communications port handles both RS-232C
and peripheral port connections, which are divided internally. Therefore, when
using the CPM2C, it is necessary to select RS-232C or peripheral port connections, according to the kind of cable and port (on the cable) used, as
shown in the following table. Refer to the CPM2C Operation Manual for more
details.
Port connecting to PT
RS-232C port (D-Sub 9-pin) of CPM2C-CN111
PLC Setup
Built-in RS-232C port settings
Peripheral port of CPM2C-CN111
RS-232C port (D-Sub 9-pin) of CS1W-CN118
Peripheral port settings
Built-in RS-232C port settings
Peripheral port of CS1W-CN114
Peripheral port settings
Peripheral port
CPM2C-CN111
CPM2C
RS-232C port
(D-Sub 9-pin, female)
CS1W-CN118
CPM2C
RS-232C port
(D-Sub 9-pin, female)
CS1W-CN114
CPM2C
Peripheral port
Setting the DIP Switches of a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1, or CQM1H
When using a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1, or CQM1H, the DIP switches on
the front panel must be set as shown below in order to make the settings in
the PLC Setup (in the DM Area) effective.
52
Section 2-6
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
CQM1
CQM1H
RS-232C port communications condition setting
Set pin 5 to OFF to make the settings made in
PLC Setup effective.
When using the CQM1H’s built-in peripheral port, turn ON SW7.
Setting the Switches of a CPM2A
When using a CPM2A, the switches on the front panel must be set as shown
below in order to make the PLC Setup settings effective.
Set the Communications
switch to OFF (down
position).
Setting the Switches of a CPM2C
When using a CPM2C, the switches on the front panel must be set as shown
below in order to make the PLC Setup settings effective.
The settings for SW1 and SW2 depend upon the usage of the
peripheral port and RS-232C port.
• Connecting PT to peripheral port
• Connecting PT to built-in RS-232C port
(A device that requires non-standard communications
settings is connected to the peripheral port.)
SW1: OFF
SW2: ON
• Connecting PT to built-in RS-232C port
(A Programming Console is connected to the peripheral port.)
SW1: OFF
SW2: OFF
Setting the Switches on an RS-232C Adapter
When using a CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter, set the mode switch as shown
in the following diagram.
CPM1CIF01
CPM1
Set the mode setting switch to HOST (upper position).
53
Section 2-6
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
CS/CJ-series CPU Units:
CS1G/[email protected]@-E (-V1)
CS1G/[email protected]@H
[email protected]@
Connect to the built-in RS-232C port of the CPU Unit, or the RS-232C port of
the Communications Board. Note that the connection to a peripheral port
must be made via an RS-232C Adapter (CS1W-CN118) specially designed
for connecting to a peripheral port.
PLC Setup
When connecting to a CS/CJ-series CPU Unit, set the following communications conditions for the PLC Setup. Since the settings shown below are the
PLC default settings for the CPU Unit, no change to the PLC Setup is necessary as long as the baud rate is maintained at 9,600 bps.
Item
Note
Baud rate
Setting at Host
Set the same speed as set at the NT20 (See note.)
Stop bits
Parity
2 stop bits
Even
Data length
Unit No. for the Host Link
ASCII 7 bits
00
Set the Host Link baud rate up to 115,200 bps with the memory switch at the
NT20. When the baud rate is set to 19,200 bps, the PLC Setup of the CPU
Unit need to be changed.
Either set the PLC Setup directly from a Programming Device (Programming
Console), or transmit the PLC Setup made at a Programming Device (CXProgrammer) to the CPU Unit.
For details on PLC Setup, refer to the SYSMAC CS Series Operation Manual
([email protected]) or SYSMAC CJ Series Operation Manual ([email protected]).
When using the built-in RS-232C port of a CS1G/H, CS1G/H-H, or CJ1G
Word address
Writing Value
Settings
CIO 160
8000
Host Link mode, data length 7 bits,
2 stop bits, even parity
CIO 161
0000
0007
Baud rate: 9,600 bps.
Baud rate: 19,200 bps.
0008
0009
Baud rate: 38,400 bps.
Baud rate: 57,600 bps.
000A
0000
Baud rate: 115,200 bps.
Unit #00
CIO 166
When using the peripheral port of a CS1G/H, CS1G/H-H, or CJ1G
Word address
CIO 144
8000
CIO 145
0000
Settings
Host Link mode, data length 7 bits,
2 stop bits, even parity
Baud rate: 9,600 bps.
0007
0008
Baud rate: 19,200 bps.
Baud rate 38,400 bps.
0009
000A
Baud rate 57,600 bps.
Baud rate 115,200 bps.
0000
Unit #00
CIO 150
54
Writing Value
Section 2-6
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Setting the Front Switches
Set pins 4 and 5 of the CPU Unit DIP switch according to the port that the
NT20 is connected to.
CS1G/H, CS1G/H-H
RUN
ERR/ALM
INH
PRPHL/COMM
SYSMAC
CS1G
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
CPU42
Peripheral port
OPEN
This is used mainly for
connection to the
Programming Device.
(This also supports the
RS-232C Unit connection.)
MCPWR
OPEN
BUSY
DIP switches (inside the battery storage)
• Set pin 4 to ON (establishing communications in
accordance with PLC Setup) when connecting the
NT20 to the peripheral port.
• Set pin 5 to OFF (establishing communications in
accordance with PLC Setup) when connecting the
NT20 to the RS-232C port.
PERIPHERAL
RS-232C port
This is used mainly for
connection to the RS232C Unit. (This also
supports a CXProgrammer
connection.)
PORT
CJ1G
Peripheral port
DIP switches (inside the battery storage)
• Set pin 4 to ON (establishing communications in
accordance with PLC Setup) when connecting the
NT20 to the peripheral port.
• Set pin 5 to OFF (establishing communications in
accordance with PLC Setup) when connecting the
NT20 to the RS-232C port.
This is used mainly for connection
to the Programming Device.
(This also supports the RS-232C
Unit connection.)
RS-232 port
This is used mainly for connection to the RS-232C
Unit. (This also supports a CX-Programmer
connection.)
Connecting to CS-series Serial Communications Board
Serial Communications Board equipped with a RS-232C port for CS-series
CPU Units: CS1W-SCB41/21
Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU Unit
Settings are written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console
or CX-Programmer) directly into the allocated DM Area (PLC Setup) of the
CPU Unit. After the settings are written, they become effective by turning the
power ON, restarting the Unit, restarting the communications port, or execution of the STUP instruction.
55
Section 2-6
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
The following table shows the words allocated in the DM Area and the settings.
Allocated DM word
Port 1
Port 2
Value
Settings
DM32000
DM32010
8000
DM32001
DM32011
0000
Host Link mode, 2 stop bits, even parity, data
length 7 bits
Baud rate 9,600 bps.
0007
0008
Baud rate 19,200 bps.
Baud rate 38,400 bps.
0009
000A
Baud rate 57,600 bps.
Baud rate 115,200 bps.
0000
0000
Transmit delay time 0 ms.
No CTS control Unit No.0 for Host Link
DM32002
DM32003
Using the 1:1 NT Link
DM32012
DM32013
Compatible Host Units
Some models and series of OMRON PLCs have the 1:1 NT Link function built
in. With CQM1H PLCs, a Serial Communications Board can be added to provide 1:1 NT Link communications. Some C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E CPU Units
can be connected by the 1:1 NT Link by installing a Communications Board.
Check the model and series of the PLC against the model of CPU Unit before
making the connections.
56
Section 2-6
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
The hosts that can be connected to the NT20 by the 1:1 NT Link using the
RS-232C ports of both Units are indicated in the table below.
PLC Series
C Series
CPU Units with Built-in
NT Link Function
CPU Units Connectable
with Expansion
Communications Board
(See note 1.)
Connectable to
C200HS-CPU21-E, -EC
C200HS-CPU23-E
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HS-CPU33-E
---
C200HS
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HE (-Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HG (-Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
C200HX (-Z)E
[email protected] (See note 2.)
[email protected] (See note 2.)
[email protected] (See note 2.)
[email protected]@ (See note 2.)
[email protected]@ (See note 2.)
[email protected]@ (See note 2.)
[email protected]@ (See note 2.)
---
CPM1
[email protected]@[email protected]
[email protected]@[email protected]
[email protected]@[email protected]
---
CPM2A
[email protected]@@@@@[email protected] (See note 3.) [email protected]@@@@@[email protected] (See note 3.)
CPM2C
CQM1-CPU41-EV1
CQM1-CPU42-EV1
CQM1-CPU43-EV1
CQM1-CPU44-EV1
CQM1-CPU45-EV1
---
CQM1
CQM1H-CPU21-E
CQM1H-CPU51-E
CQM1H-CPU61-E
CQM1H-CPU51 (See note 4.) CQM1H
CQM1H-CPU61 (See note 4.)
CVM1 Series CVM1-CPU01-EV2
(See note 5.) CVM1-CPU11-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
---
CVM1
CompoBus/S SRM1-C02-V2
Master Unit
---
SRM1
Note
(1) One of the following Communications Boards is required: C200HWCOM02/COM04/COM05/COM06-EV1.
(2) A CPM1-CIF01 adapter is required.
(3) Use a CPM2C-CN111 or CS1W-CN114/118 Connecting Cable, CPM1CIF01 RS-232C Adapter, or CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter to connect.
(4) A CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is required.
(5) CPU Units of CVM1/CV-series PLCs without the suffix [email protected] cannot be
connected.
Note
CS/CJ-series CPU Unit cannot be connected with the 1:1 connection NT link
method. Use the 1:N connection NT link method (standard or high-speed)
instead of making the 1:1 connection. For details, refer to Using the 1:N NT
Link (page 60) or Using the High-speed 1:N NT Links (page 65).
57
Section 2-6
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Settings at the Host
The setting methods for each Unit are as follows:
Connecting to a C-series C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CPM1, CPM2A,
CPM2C, CQM1, CQM1H, or SRM1
PLC Setup Settings
Write the PLC Setup (in the DM Area) settings directly from a Programming
Device (e.g., SYSMAC Support Software) according to the host model and
port.
Host Model
Note
Word
RS-232C port of C200HS, C200HX/
HG/HE(-Z)E, CPM2A, CPM2C,
CQM1, CQM1H, SRM1
DM6645
Port A of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E (See
note 1.)
DM6555
Port 1 of CQM1H (See note 2.)
Port B of C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E (See
note 1.
DM6550
CPM1
DM6650
Writing Value
4000
Setting
Use 1:1 NT
Link
(1) RS-232C port of the Communications Board
(2) RS-232C port of the Serial Communications Board
For details on operations relating to the PLC Setup, refer to the manual for the
PLC that is used.
Connecting to a CPM2C
The CPM2C PLCs do not have the same kind of port connectors found on CS/
CJ-series PLCs. The CPM2C’s communications port handles both RS-232C
and peripheral port connections, which are divided internally. Therefore, when
using the CPM2C, it is necessary to select RS-232C or peripheral port connections, according to the kind of cable and port (on the cable) used, as
shown in the following table. Refer to the CPM2C Operation Manual for more
details.
Port connecting to PT
PLC Setup
RS-232C port (D-Sub 9-pin) of CPM2C-CN111
Peripheral port of CPM2C-CN111
Built-in RS-232C port settings
Peripheral port settings
RS-232C port (D-Sub 9-pin) of CS1W-CN118
Peripheral port of CS1W-CN114
Built-in RS-232C port settings
Peripheral port settings
Peripheral port
CPM2C-CN111
CPM2C
RS-232C port
(D-Sub 9-pin, female)
CS1W-CN118
CPM2C
RS-232C port
(D-Sub 9-pin, female)
CS1W-CN114
CPM2C
Peripheral port
Setting the DIP Switches on the Front of a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1,
CQM1H
When using a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1, or CQM1H, the DIP switches on
the front panel must be set as shown below in order to make the settings in
the PLC Setup (data memory) effective.
58
Section 2-6
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
CQM1
CQM1H
RS-232C port communications condition setting
Set pin 5 to OFF to make the settings made in
PLC Setup effective.
Setting the Switches of a CPM2A
When using a CPM2A, the switches on the front panel must be set as shown
below in order to make the PLC Setup settings effective.
Set the Communications
switch to OFF (down
position).
Setting the Switches of a CPM2C
When using a CPM2C, the switches on the front panel must be set as shown
below in order to make the PLC Setup settings effective.
The settings for SW1 and SW2 depend upon the usage of
the peripheral port and RS-232C port.
• Connecting PT to peripheral port
• Connecting PT to built-in RS-232C port
(A device that requires non-standard communications
settings is connected to the peripheral port.)
SW1: OFF
SW2: ON
• Connecting PT to built-in RS-232C port
(A Programming Console is connected to the peripheral port.)
SW1: OFF
SW2: OFF
Setting the Switches on an RS-232C Adapter
When using a CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter, set the mode switch as shown
in the following diagram.
CPM1CIF01
Set the mode setting switch to NT (lower position).
59
Section 2-6
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Connecting to a CVM1/CV ([email protected])
Set the DIP switch on the front panel as follows:
I/O port selection (selector switch)
Set this to RS-232C.
DIP switch setting (Pin 3)
6
5
4
3
2
1
Set Pin 3 to use NT Link
(ON, right side).
ON
OFF ↔ ON
When using a CVM1/CV-series PLC, CPU Unit execution processing (execution control 2) in the PLC Setup must be set to Simultaneous processing.
Using the 1:N NT Link
Compatible Host Units
The OMRON PLCs that can be connected using the 1:N NT Link are the CSseries (CS1G/H or CS1G/H-H), CJ-series CJ1G, C-series C200HX/HG/HE(Z)E, CQM1H, and SRM1 only. With the CS/CJ-series PLCs, it is possible to
connect a 1:N NT Link using a CS1W-SCU21 or CJ1W-SCU41 Serial Communications Unit.
Check the model and series of the PLC as well as the model of Serial Communications Board or Unit being used before making the connections.
The hosts that can be connected to the NT20 by the 1:N NT Link using the
RS-232C ports of both Units are indicated in the table below.
PLC Series
60
CPU Units with Built-in
NT Link Function
CPU Units Connectable with
Communications Board or Unit
(See note 1.)
Connectable
to
CS Series
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-EV1
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-EV1
CS1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H
CS1H-CPU63H/64H/65H/66H/67H
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-EV1
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-EV1
CS1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H (See
note 1.)
CS1H-CPU63H/64H/65H/66H/67H
(See note 1.)
CS1G
CS1H
CS1G-H
CS1H-H
CJ Series
CJ1G-CPU44/45
CJ1G-CPU44/45 (See note 2.)
CJ1G
Section 2-6
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
PLC Series
CPU Units with Built-in
NT Link Function
C Series
CompoBus/S
Master Control
Unit
Note
CPU Units Connectable with
Communications Board or Unit
(See note 1.)
Connectable
to
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E (See note 3.)
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E (See note 3.)
C200HE (-Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E (See note 3.)
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E (See note 3.)
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E (See note 3.)
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E (See note 3.)
C200HG (-Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E (See note 3.)
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E (See note 3.)
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E (See note 3.)
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E (See note 3.)
C200HX-CPU65-ZE (See note 3.)
C200HX-CPU85-ZE (See note 3.)
C200HX (-Z)E
---
CQM1H-CPU51 (See note 4.)
CQM1H-CPU61 (See note 4.)
CQM1H
SRM1-C02-V2
---
SRM1
(1) A CS1W-SCB21 or CS1W-SCB41 Serial Communications Board or
CS1W-SCU21 Serial Communications Unit is required.
(2) A CJ1W-SCU41 Serial Communications Unit is required.
(3) One of the following Communications Boards is required:
C200HW-COM02/COM04/COM05/COM06 (-EV1)
(4) A CQM1H-SCB41 Serial Communications Board is required.
(5) The -V1 versions of CS-series PLCs and CJ-series PLCs support the
high-speed 1:N NT Link as well as the standard 1:N NT Link. Furthermore, the high-speed 1:N NT Link can be used in earlier versions of CSseries PLCs by installing a new version of Serial Communications Board
or Unit. For details, refer to Using the High-speed 1:N NT Links
(page 65).
Settings at the Host
The Settings required for each Unit are described below.
Connecting a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, CQM1H, or SRM1
PLC Setup Settings
Write the PLC Setup (in the DM Area) settings directly from a Programming
Device (e.g., SYSMAC Support Software) according to the host model and
port.
Connection to
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, SRM1
Built-in RS-232C port
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
Communications Board port A
(See note 1.)
Word
Writing
Value
DM6645 [email protected]
DM6555
Setting
Use 1:N NT Link
@ = largest unit number of
the connected PTs (1 to 7)
(See note 3.)
CQM1H port 1 (See note 2.)
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
Communications Board port B
(See note 1.)
Note
DM6550
(1) RS-232C port on the Communications Board
(2) RS-232C port on the Serial Communications Board
61
Section 2-6
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
(3) When using a C200HE (-Z)E, the maximum PT unit number is 3.
Refer to the PLC’s operation manual for details on changing PLC Setup settings.
Setting the DIP Switches of a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E
When using a C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E, the DIP switches on the front panel must
be set as shown below in order to make the settings in the PLC Setup (in the
DM Area) effective.
RS-232C port communications condition setting
Set pin 5 to OFF to make the settings made in
PLC Setup effective.
Connecting to CS/CJ-series CPU Units
CS-series CPU Unit: CS1G/[email protected]@-E(V1), CS1G/[email protected]@H
CJ-series CPU Unit: [email protected]@
PLC Setup
When connecting to a CS/CJ-series CPU Unit, set the following communications conditions for the PLC Setup, according to the communications port to
be used.
When using the built-in RS-232C port of a CS1G/H, CS1G/H-H, or CJ1G
Word
CIO 160
CIO 161
CIO 166
Note
Value
Settings
8200
1:N NT Link mode
0000 to 0009 (See Communications baud rate (standard)
note.)
[email protected]
@ = The largest model number of the connected PT (0 – 7)
Set any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex for the communications baud rate.
The same baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it is
between 0000 and 0009 Hex.
When using the peripheral port of a CS1G/H, CS1G/H-H, or CJ1G
Word
Note
Value
Settings
CIO 144
CIO 145
8200
1:N NT Link mode
0000 to 0009 (See Communications baud rate (standard)
note.)
CIO 150
[email protected]
@ = The largest model number of the connected PT (0 – 7)
Set any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex for the communications baud rate.
The same baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it is
between 0000 and 0009 Hex.
When connecting PTs with model numbers 0 and 2 to 5 to the built-in RS232C port, for example, set CIO 160 to 8200 Hex, CIO 161 to 0000 Hex and
set CIO166 to 0005 Hex.
62
Section 2-6
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Either set PLC Setup directly from a Programming Device (Programming Console), or transmit the PLC Setup made at a Programming Device (CX-Programmer) to the CPU Unit. For details on PLC Setup ,refer to the SYSMAC
CS Series Operation Manual ([email protected]) or SYSMAC CJ Series Operation
Manual ([email protected]).
Setting the Front Switches
Set pins 4 and 5 of the CPU Unit DIP switch according to the port that the
NT20 is connected to.
CS1G/H, CS1G/H-H
RUN
ERR/ALM
INH
PRPHL/COMM
SYSMAC
CS1G
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
CPU42
Peripheral port
OPEN
This is used mainly for
connection to the
Programming Device.
(This also supports the
RS-232C Unit connection.)
MCPWR
OPEN
BUSY
DIP switches (inside the battery storage)
• Set pin 4 to ON (establishing communications in
accordance with PLC Setup) when connecting
the NT20 to the peripheral port.
• Set pin 5 to OFF (establishing communications
in accordance with PLC Setup) when
connecting the NT20 to the RS-232C port.
PERIPHERAL
RS-232C port
This is used mainly for
connection to the RS232C Unit.
(This also supports a
CX-Programmer
connection.)
PORT
CJ1G
Peripheral port
DIP switches (inside the battery storage)
• Set pin 4 to ON (establishing communications in
accordance with PLC Setup) when connecting the
NT20 to the peripheral port.
• Set pin 5 to OFF (establishing communications in
accordance with PLC Setup) when connecting the
NT20 to the RS-232C port.
This is used mainly for
connection to the
Programming Device.
(This also supports the
RS-232C Unit connection.)
RS-232C port
This is used mainly for connection to the RS-232C
Unit. (This also supports a CX-Programmer
connection.)
Connecting to CS-series Serial Communications Board
Serial Communications Board equipped with a RS-232C port for CS-series
CPU Units: CS1W-SCB41/21
63
Section 2-6
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
CPU Unit Allocation DM Area Settings
Setting is written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or
CX-Programmer) directly into the allocated DM Area (PLC Setup) of the CPU
Unit. After the setting is written, it becomes effective by turning the power ON,
restarting the Unit, restarting the communications port, or execution of the
STUP instruction.
The following table shows the words allocated in the DM Area and the settings.
Allocated DM word
Port 1
Port 2
Note
DM32000
DM32001
DM32010
DM32011
DM32006
DM32016
Value
Settings
8200
1:N NT Link mode
0000 to 0009 (See Communications baud rate (standard)
note.)
[email protected]
@ = The largest model number of
the connected PT (0 - 7)
Set any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex for the communications baud rate.
The same baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it is
between 0000 and 0009 Hex.
For example, when connecting PTs with model numbers 3, 4, 5, and 6 to port
1, set DM 32000 to 8200 Hex, DM 32001 to 0000 Hex, and DM 32006 to 0006
Hex.
Connecting to CS/CJ-series Serial Communications Unit
A CS-series Rack-mounted Unit: CS1W-SCU21
CJ-series: CJ1W-SCU41 (Port 2 is an RS-232C port.)
Setting the Front Switches
Set the unit number of the Serial Communications Unit by using the rotary
switch located on the front panel. Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver
so that the values or symbols in the setting value window agree with the following.
CS1W-SCU21
SCU21
RDY
ERH
SD2
RD2
RUN
ERC
SD1
RD1
UNIT0
No. 3241
FE
D
C
56789AB
Set the unit number to 0 through F so
that it will not duplicate the numbers
used in other Units.
CJ1W-SCU41
Set the unit number to 0 through F so
that it will not duplicate the numbers
used in other Units.
64
Section 2-6
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU Unit
Setting is written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or
CX-Programmer) directly into the allocated DM Area (PLC Setup) of the CPU
Unit. After the setting is written, it becomes effective by turning the power ON,
restarting the Unit, restarting the communications port, or execution of the
STUP instruction.
The following table shows the words allocated in the DM Area and the settings.
m = DM30000 + (100 × unit number)
Allocated DM word
Port 1
Port 2
Note
Using the High-speed 1:N
NT Links
m
m+1
m+10
m+11
m+6
m+16
Value
8200
0000 to 0009 (See
note.)
[email protected]
Settings
1:N NT Link mode
Communications baud rate (standard)
@ = The largest model number of
the connected PT (0 - 7)
Set any value between 0000 and 0009 Hex for the communications baud rate.
The same baud rate will be used regardless of the value as long as it is
between 0000 and 0009 Hex.
Compatible Host Units
Only the -V1 versions of the CS1-series CS1G/H, CS1-H-series CS1G/H-H,
and CJ-series CJ1G PLCs support the high-speed 1:N NT Links directly.
Other CS/CJ-series PLCs can use the high-speed 1:N NT Links indirectly
through a CS1W-SCU21 or CJ1W-SCU41 Serial Communications Unit. (If a
Serial Communications Unit is used, even CS1-series Units without the “-V1”
suffix can be connected via high-speed 1:N NT Links.)
Be sure to check the model number of the PLC and Serial Communications
Board/Unit before trying to establish the high-speed 1:N NT Links.
The following table shows which CS1-series PLCs can be connected to an
NT20 with the high-speed 1:N NT Links.
PLC model
CPU Units with Built-in
NT Link Function
CPU Units Connectable only through a Connectable
Serial Communications Board or Unit
models
CS Series
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-EV1 (See note 1.)
CS1G-CPU42/43/44/45-E(V1) (See note
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-EV1 (See note 1.) 2.)
CS1H-CPU63/64/65/66/67-E(V1) (See
note 2.)
CS1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H (See note 1.)
CS1G-CPU42H/43H/44H/45H (See note
CS1H-CPU63H/64H/65H/66H/67H (See note 2.)
1.)
CS1H-CPU63H/64H/65H/66H/67H (See
note 2.)
CS1G
CS1H
CS1G-H
CS1H-H
CJ Series
CJ1G-CPU44/45
CJ1G
Note
CJ1G-CPU44/45 (See note 3.)
(1) The direct high-speed 1:N NT Link connection is not supported by CS1series CPU Units without the -V1 suffix.
(2) A CS1W-SCB21 or CS1W-SCB41 Serial Communications Board or
CS1W-SCU21 Serial Communications Unit is required.
(3) A CJ1W-SCU41 Serial Communications Unit is required.
Settings at the Host
The Settings required for each Unit are described below.
65
Section 2-6
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Connecting CS/CJ-series CPU Units
CS-series CPU Unit model: CS1G/[email protected]@-EV1, CS1G/[email protected]@H
CJ-series CPU Unit model: [email protected]@
PLC Setup
When connecting to a CS/CJ-series CPU Unit, set the following communications conditions for the PLC Setup, according to the communications port to
be used.
When using the built-in RS-232C port of a CS1G/H, CS1G/H-H, or CJ1G
Word
Value
Settings
160
8200
1:N NT Link mode
161
166
000A
[email protected]
Communications baud rate (high-speed)
@ = The largest model number of the connected PT (0 - 7)
When using the peripheral port of a CS1G/H, CS1G/H-H, or CJ1G
Word
Value
Settings
144
8200
1:N NT Link mode
145
150
000A
[email protected]
Communications baud rate (high-speed)
@ = The largest model number of the connected PT (0 - 7)
When connecting PTs with model numbers 0, 2, 3, 4, and 5 to the built-in RS232C port, for example, set CIO 160 to 8200 Hex, CIO 161 to 000A Hex, and
CIO166 to 0005 Hex.
Either set PLC Setup directly from a Programming Device (Programming Console), or transmit the PLC Setup made at a Programming Device (CX-Programmer) to the CPU Unit.
For details on PLC Setup, refer to the SYSMAC CS Series Operation Manual
([email protected]) or SYSMAC CJ Series Operation Manual ([email protected]).
Note
When using the CX-Programmer to set the high-speed 1:N NT Link, set the
communications baud rate to 115,200 bps.
Setting the Front Switches
Set pins 4 and 5 of the CPU Unit DIP switch according to the port that the
NT20 is connected to.
66
Section 2-6
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
CS1G/H, CS1G/H-H
RUN
ERR/ALM
INH
PRPHL/COMM
SYSMAC
CS1G
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
CPU42
DIP switches (inside the battery storage)
Peripheral port
This is used mainly for
connection to the
Programming Device.
(This also supports connection
of RS-232C devices.)
OPEN
MCPWR
OPEN
BUSY
• Set pin 4 to ON (establishing communications in
accordance with PLC Setup) when connecting the
NT20 to the peripheral port.
• Set pin 5 to OFF (establishing communications in
accordance with PLC Setup) when connecting the
NT20 to the RS-232C port.
PERIPHERAL
RS-232C port
This is used mainly for
connection of RS-232C
devices.
(This also supports the
connection of CXProgrammer.)
PORT
CJ1G
DIP switches (inside the battery storage)
• Set pin 4 to ON (establishing communications in
accordance with PLC Setup) when connecting
the NT20 to the peripheral port.
• Set pin 5 to OFF (establishing communications
in accordance with PLC Setup) when
connecting the NT20 to the RS-232C port.
Peripheral port
This is used mainly for
connection to the
Programming Device.
(This also supports connection
of RS-232C devices.)
RS-232C port
This is used mainly for connection of
RS-232C devices. (This also supports
the connection of CX-Programmer.)
Connecting to a CS-series Serial Communications Board
Serial Communications Board equipped with a RS-232C port for CS-series
CPU Units: CS1W-SCB41/21
Note
Serial Communications Boards and Serial Communications Units with lot
number 991220 (12/20/99) and later support the high-speed 1:N NT Link.
Boards and Units with earlier lot numbers cannot be used.
CPU Unit Allocation DM Area Settings
Setting is written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or
CX-Programmer) directly into the allocated DM Area (PLC Setup) of the CPU
Unit. After the setting is written, it becomes effective by turning the power ON,
restarting the Unit, restarting the communications port, or execution of the
STUP instruction.
67
Section 2-6
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
The following table shows the words allocated in the DM Area and the settings.
Allocated DM word
Port 1
Port 2
Value
Settings
DM32000
DM32001
DM32010
DM32011
8200
000A
1:N NT Link mode
Communications baud rate (high-speed)
DM32006
DM32016
[email protected]
@ = The largest model number of the connected PT (0 - 7)
For example, when connecting PTs with model numbers 3, 4, 5, and 6 to port
1, set DM 32000 to 8200 Hex, DM 32001 to 000A Hex, and DM 32006 to 0006
Hex.
Connecting to a CS/CJ-series Serial Communications Unit
A CS-series Rack-mounted Unit: CS1W-SCU21
CJ-series: CJ1W-SCU41 (Port 2 is an RS-232C port.)
Note
Serial Communications Boards and Serial Communications Units with lot
number 991220 (12/20/99) and later support the high-speed 1:N NT Link.
Boards and Units with earlier lot numbers cannot be used.
Setting the Front Switches
Set the unit number of the Serial Communications Unit by using the rotary
switch located on the front panel. Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver
so that the values or symbols in the setting value window agree with the following.
CS1W-SCU21
SCU21
RDY
ERH
SD2
RD2
RUN
ERC
SD1
RD1
UNIT0
No. 3241
FE
D
C
56789AB
Set the unit number to 0 through F so
that it will not duplicate the numbers
used in other Units.
CJ1W-SCU41
Set the unit number to 0 through F so
that it will not duplicate the numbers
used in other Units.
Allocation DM Area Settings for CPU Unit
Setting is written from the Programming Device (a Programming Console or
CX-Programmer) directly into the allocated DM Area (PLC Setup) of the CPU
Unit. After the setting is written, it becomes effective by turning the power ON,
restarting the Unit, restarting the communications port, or execution of the
STUP instruction.
The following table shows the words allocated in the DM Area and the settings.
Word m = DM30000 + 100 × unit number
Allocated DM word
Port 1
Port 2
m
68
m+10
Value
8200
Settings
1:N NT Link mode
Section 2-6
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
Allocated DM word
Port 1
Port 2
m+1
m+6
2-6-2
m+11
m+16
Value
000A
[email protected]
Settings
Communications baud rate (high-speed)
@ = The largest model number of the connected PT (0 - 7)
Connecting Directly between RS-232C Ports
The method for connection between the RS-232C ports of the NT20 and the
host is described here.
Recommended Connector Cable
When making the connector cable, as far as possible use the recommended
connectors, connector hoods, and cables indicated in the table below. Some
Units come supplied with one connector and one connector hood.
Check the required components and prepare them in advance.
Name
Connector
Connector
hood
Model
Remarks
XM2A-0901
9-pin
Made by OMRON
CS-series CS1G/CS1H,
CS1G-H/CS1H-H
CJ-series CJ1G
C-series CQM1, C200HS,
C200HX/HG/HE(-Z)E,
CVM1/CV-series CPU
Units
CV500-LK201
XM24-2501
25-pin
Made by OMRON
CV500-LK201
C200H-LK201-EV1
XM2S-0911
9-pin
Made by OMRON
XM2S-0913
9-pin
Made by OMRON
9-pin
Made by OMRON
C-series CQM1, C200HS,
C200HX/HG/HE-(Z)E,
CVM1/CV-series CPU
Units
CV500-LK201
---
XM2S-0911-E
Cable
Note
Delivered with
CS-series CS1G/CS1H,
CS1G-H/CS1H-H
CJ-series CJ1G
XM2S-2511
25-pin
Made by OMRON
CV500-LK201
C200H-LK201-EV1
AWG28×5P
IFVV-SB
CO-MA-VV-SB
5P×28AWG
Multi-core shielded cable
Made by Fujikura, Ltd.
Multi-core shielded cable
Made by Hitachi Cable,
Ltd.
-----
After connecting a communications cable, always secure it with the screws.
Otherwise the cable may disconnect, causing operation to fail.
69
Section 2-6
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
OMRON Cables with Connectors
The OMRON cables listed below can be used when connecting with a method
other than the RS-232C communications method.
Model
XW2Z-200S
2m
Cable Length
Connector Specification
9-pin ⇔ 25 pin
XW2Z-500S
XW2Z-200T
5m
2m
9-pin ⇔ 9-pin
XW2Z-500T
5m
The OMRON cable listed below can be used when connecting to a personal
computer using RS-232C communications.
Model
XW2Z-S002
Note
Wiring for a Host Link Unit
(25-pin) Connection
Cable Length
Connector Specification
9-pin ⇔ 9 pin
2m
The cable’s tensile load is 30 N. Do not subject it to loads greater than this.
Otherwise a discontinuity may occur, causing operation to fail.
Applicable Units: C200H-LK201-EV1
CV500-LK201 (communications port 1)
Compatible cables with attached connectors:
XW2Z-200S (9-pin ⇔ 25-pin, 2 m)
XW2Z-500S (9-pin ⇔ 25-pin, 5 m)
CVM1/CV-series Host Link Units (CV500-LK201) have two types of connector; a 25-pin connector (communications port 1), and a 9-pin connector (communications port 2). When using communications port 2, refer to Wiring for
Other Connections (Other Than the Memory Link Method) below.
6
1
NT20
Abbreviation
FG
RS-232C
interface
5
Pin
number
Connector
hood
1
2
SD
2
3
RD
RD
3
4
RS
RS
4
5
CS
CS
5
6
-
+5V
6
7
5G
7
8
-
8
-
-
9
-
-
(9-pin type)
1
14
13
25
Pin
Abbreviation
number
Connector
FG
hood
Shield
SD
5G
9
PLC (Host Link Unit)
(See note.)
-
-
-
ER
RS-232C
interface
(25-pin type)
Note
Wiring for Other
Connections
70
For Units that have a CTS setting selector switch, RS and CS do not have to
be shorted if this switch is set to 0 V.
Applicable Units:
CV500-LK201 (communications port 2)
CS1W-SCU21
CJ1W-SCU41
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]@
[email protected]@
[email protected]@
[email protected]@
[email protected]@
[email protected]@
[email protected]@
[email protected]@@@@@[email protected]
[email protected]@@@@@[email protected]
Section 2-6
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
CQM1-CPU21-E
CQM1-CPU41-EV1
CQM1-CPU43-EV1
CQM1H-CPU11
CQM1H-CPU51
CS1G-CPU42-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU44-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU63-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU65-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU67-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU42H
CS1G-CPU44H
CS1H-CPU63H
CS1H-CPU65H
CS1H-CPU67H
CJ1G-CPU44
C200HS-CPU21-E, -EC
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-ZE
CVM1-CPU01-EV2
CVM1-CPU21-EV2
SRM1-C02-V2
CQM1-CPU42-EV1
CQM1-CPU44-EV1
CQM1H-CPU21
CQM1H-CPU61
CS1G-CPU43-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU45-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU64-E(V1)
CS1H-CPU66-E(V1)
CS1G-CPU43H
CS1G-CPU45H
CS1H-CPU64H
CS1H-CPU66H
CJ1G-CPU45
C200HS-CPU23-E
C200HS-CPU33-E
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU85-ZE
CVM1-CPU11-EV2
Compatible cables with attached connectors:
XW2Z-200T (9-pin ⇔ 9-pin, 2 m)
XW2Z-500T (9-pin ⇔ 9-pin, 5 m)
CPU Units of CVM1/CV-series PLCs without the suffix [email protected] cannot be connected by any connection method.
1
6
NT20
PLC
Abbreviation Pin
number
Connector
FG
hood
RS-232C
interface
5
Note
Wiring for a RS-232C
Connection
9
Shield
-
1
2
SD
SD
2
3
RD
RD
3
4
RS
RS
4
5
CS
CS
5
6
-
+5V
6
7
-
7
8
-
-
8
9
SG
9
(See note.)
1
6
5
9
Pin
Abbreviation
number
Connector
FG
hood
RS-232C
interface
SG
(9-pin type)
(9-pin type)
For Units that have a CTS setting selector switch, RS and CS do not have to
be shorted if this switch is set to 0 V.
Compatible cables with attached connectors:
XW2Z-S002 (9-pin⇔9-pin, 2 m)
Prepare the adapter cable while referring to the following diagram.
71
Section 2-6
Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the Host
PLC
NT20
1
6
RS-232C
interface
5
72
9
FG
Pin
number
Connector
hood
-
1
SD
SD
2
RD
RD
3
RS
RS
4
CS
SG
Abbreviation
CS
5
+5V
6
-
7
-
8
SG
9
(9-pin type)
Shield
Abbreviation
Connector
hood
RS-232C
interface
Communicating with the PLC Using C200H Direct Communications
2-7
Section 2-7
Communicating with the PLC Using C200H Direct
Communications
Connect an NT20-ST121-E and PLC made by OMRON with an I/O cable.
2-7-1
Applicable PLC Units
Before making the connection, check the series and model of the PLC to
which the connection is to be made. A list of the PLCs that can be connected
to an NT20 using C200H direct communications is presented below.
CPU Unit
C20H/C28HC40H/C60H
C200H-CPU01-E
Model Name
[email protected]@H
C200H
C200H-CPU03-E
C200H-CPU11-E
C200H-CPU21-E
C200H-CPU23-E
C200H-CPU31-E
C200HS-CPU01-E
C200HS
C200HS-CPU03-E
C200HS-CPU21-E
C200HS-CPU23-E
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HS-CPU33-E
C200HE-CPU11-E
C200HE
C200HE-CPU32-E
C200HE-CPU42-E
C200HG-CPU33-E
C200HG-CPU43-E
C200HG
C200HG-CPU53-E
C200HG-CPU63-E
C200HX-CPU34-E
C200HX-CPU44-E
C200HX
C200HX-CPU54-E
C200HX-CPU64-E
!Caution With systems in which the user program operates according to the PLC cycle
time, since there is some fluctuation in the PLC cycle time, the system operation may not be consistent, and this should be born in mind when designing
the system.
2-7-2
Connection Method
The NT20 PT is connected to the PLC using the NT20-IF001 and NT600MLB122-V1.
The connection conditions are different for C200H/HS, C200HX/HG/HE and
[email protected]@H.
73
Communicating with the PLC Using C200H Direct Communications
Mounting the NT20-IF001
Section 2-7
1. As shown in the following diagram, connect the NT20 connector on the
back of the NT20-IF001 to the expansion interface connector on the NT20
PT.
2. After connecting the connector, secure the NT20-IF001 with the two
screws. The tightening torque is 0.6 N•m.
3. As shown in the following diagram, hold the Interface Unit with the notch
on the left and press the Interface Unit into the NT20-IF001 until it clicks
into place.
Notch
4. Connect the ground screw on the NT20-IF001 to the NT20 using a short
wire (100 mm max.), and connect the ground through the NC terminal.
Reference:
The NC terminal on the NT20 also serves as a functional ground. Do not connect this terminal when using only the NT20 (grounding is not required).
!Caution Always turn off the power at the PLC and PT before connecting the C200H
interface cable. Otherwise the system may operate unpredictably.
!Caution Make sure that the power supply to the PT is OFF before connecting or disconnecting the Interface Unit. After mounting an NT20-IF001, be sure to
tighten its two screws. Do not touch the PCB (printed circuit board) with bare
hands.
!Caution After connecting the communications cable, always secure it with the screws.
Otherwise the cable may disconnect, causing operation to fail.
74
Section 2-7
Communicating with the PLC Using C200H Direct Communications
I/O Connecting Cable
Use the following models of I/O Connecting Cable.
For connecting C200H/HS/HE/HG/HX
For connecting [email protected]@H
Note
Model
C200H-CN311
Cable Length (L)
30 cm
NT20M-CNP711
C200H-CN711
70 cm
NT20M-CNP221
C200H-CN221
2m
NT20M-CNP521
C200H-CN521
NT20M-CNP131
C200H-CN131
C20H-CN312
5m
10 m
30 cm
NT20M-CNP712
C20H-CN712
70 cm
NT20M-CNP222
C20H-CN222
2m
The C200H interface connector of [email protected]@@ has been
downsized.
!Caution Keep the total length of I/O cables used within 12 m (6 m for [email protected]@H).
!Caution The cable's tensile load is 30 N. Do not subject it to loads greater than this.
Otherwise a discontinuity may occur, causing operation to fail.
Reference:
If a [email protected]@@ or [email protected]@@ is used as the I/O Connecting Cable,
the connector will project beyond the bottom face of the NT20.
If the I/O cable is passed through a hole or other opening, the diameter of the
hole or opening must be at least 53 mmφ. Removing the top cover reduces
this requirement to 33 mmφ or larger. During installation, this cover must be
replaced before securing the PT.
Connection to C200H/
C200HS and C200HX/HG/
HE
Connect the CPU Rack or Expansion I/O Rack with an I/O cable. The following restrictions apply when making this connection.
• A maximum of one CPU Rack and one Expansion I/O Rack can be connected. Connection to two Expansion I/O Racks is not possible.
• Connection to a Remote Rack is not possible.
75
Section 2-7
Communicating with the PLC Using C200H Direct Communications
• There is only one C200H interface unit interface connector. This means
that it is not possible to connect an NT20 between a CPU Rack and an
Expansion I/O Rack. It must be the final connection in the system.
CPU Rack
Expansion I/O Rack
Expansion I/O Cable
([email protected]@1)
1 Rack max.
(Rear face of NT20)
Expansion I/O Cable
([email protected]@1/
[email protected]@1)
Host interface connector
Connection to [email protected]@H
Connect the CPU Unit with an I/O Connecting Cable. The following restrictions apply when making this connection.
• A maximum of one CPU Unit can be connected.
• Up to two I/O Units can be connected for the one CPU unit, but Expansion
I/O Units cannot be connected.
76
Section 2-7
Communicating with the PLC Using C200H Direct Communications
• It is not possible to connect a [email protected]@H I/O Unit after the NT20. It must be
the final connection in the system.
CPU Unit
I/O Connecting Cable
([email protected]@2)
I/O Unit
I/O Connecting Cable
([email protected]@2)
I/O Unit
2 Units max.
(Rear face of NT20)
I/O Connecting Cable
([email protected]@2
/C20H-CN
Host interface connector
Note
When connecting a [email protected]@H, always install a noise filter.
1. Insert the noise filter in the power supply line of the [email protected]@H.
2. Make the distance between the noise filter and the [email protected]@H as short as possible and separate it from the power supply line.
3. Install the noise filter case on the FG face.
4. Use a ZGB2202-01U (manufactured by TDK) or equivalent as the noise filter.
Noise filter
1
+24 V
2-7-3
2
4
IN
OUT
3
+
24 V
–
Turning the Power ON/OFF When Using C200H Direct
Communications
The NT20-ST121-E functions as an expansion I/O unit of the PLC. Use the
following procedure to turn the power ON and OFF.
!Caution Depending on the method used to turn the power ON and OFF, the entire system may stop. Follow the procedure described below to turn the power ON
and OFF.
Power ON
Turn the power ON as follows:
Turn ON the power to the NT20.
“Connecting to Host” is displayed on the NT20 screen.
77
Communicating with the PLC Using C200H Direct Communications
Section 2-7
↓
Turn ON the power to the PLC.
After “Connecting to Host” has been displayed for approximately 1 second,
normal operation starts.
Note
(1) If the power to the PLC is turned ON first, the CPU Unit of the PLC is subjected to a system reset, making operations such as programming console impossible. Then, when the power to the NT20 is turned ON,
“Connecting to Host” is displayed on the NT20 screen for approximately
1 second, after which normal operation starts.
(2) If the I/O Connecting Cable is disconnected during system operation, an
I/O bus error occurs at the PLC and operation stops. If this happens, connect the I/O Connecting Cable and cancel the error.
Power OFF
Turn the power OFF as follows:
Turn OFF the power supplies to the PLC and NT20 simultaneously.
The next time the power is turned ON, the NT20 displays the screen that was
displayed when the power was turned OFF.
Note
If the power to the NT20 is turned OFF first, the CPU Unit of the PLC is subjected to a system reset, making operations such as programming console
impossible.
Turn OFF the system temporarily before replacing the NT20 (when a fault
occurs, for example). If the power to the NT20 only is turned OFF, the system
stops immediately and this could cause an accident or damage machinery.
78
Section 2-8
Host Connections by RS-232C (NT20-ST128)
2-8
Host Connections by RS-232C (NT20-ST128)
Connect the NT20-ST128 with an RS-232C Interface Unit installed to the host
computer with an RS-232C cable.
An RS-232C connection allows a single NT20 to be connected to the host.
A computer or other control device with a built-in RS-232C interface is a suitable host for connection to the NT20.
2-8-1
Host Computer Communications Settings
Set the host communications conditions according to the following table.
Item
Note
Setting
Baud rate
Data bits
Set to the same baud rate as the NT20: 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200
7 bits/8 bits
Stop bits
Parity
1 bit/2 bits
Even, Odd, None
Flow control
RS/CS control
XON/XOFF control
None
Set the same communications conditions at the NT20 and Host.
Refer to the appropriate instruction manuals for the method of setting the Host
communications conditions.
Set to the maximum baud rate supported by both the NT20 and Host.
The communications condition settings of the NT20-ST128 are set with the
RS-232C communications conditions memory switches.
2-8-2
Connector Pin Arrangement
The RS-232C connection between the NT20 and Host is described below.
NT20 Interface Unit
The connector specifications are described below.
Electrical characteristics: Conforms to EIA RS-232C specifications.
Signal direction: Signal input and output are relative to the host computer.
1
5
Connector
pin #
Signal name
6
9
Abbreviation
Signal direction
NT20 ← → Host
2
3
Send data
Receive data
SD (TXD)
RD (RXD)
→
←
4
5
Request to send
Clear to send
RS (RTS)
CS (CTS)
→
←
79
Section 2-8
Host Connections by RS-232C (NT20-ST128)
Connector
pin #
6
9
Note
Note
Connecting to the Host
Computer
Signal name
Abbreviation
+5 V output, 150 mA
max.
Signal ground
Signal direction
NT20 ← → Host
+5 V
→
SG (GND)
---
Unlisted pins are not used.
For cable parts and the wiring method, refer to Appendix C Transporting and
Storing PTs on page 263.
Use a cable that is compatible with the RS-232C connector of the host to connect the NT20 and the host (see the example in the figure below).
In the example shown here, the cable connects the 9-pin connector of the
NT20 and 25-pin connector of the host. If the host has a 9-pin RS-232C connector, use an RS-232C cable with 9-pin connectors at both ends.
NT20
9-pin connector
Host Interface connector
(RS-232C, 9-pin type)
25-pin connector
RS-232C cable
!Caution When making the connection, turn OFF the power to the NT20 and PLC
before disconnecting or connecting any connector.
!Caution After connecting the communications cable, always secure it with the screws.
Otherwise the cable may disconnect, causing operation to fail.
Note
If using the +5 V supply of pin No.6, check first that the equipment that is to
receive the supply has a current capacity no greater than 150 mA. The +5 V
output of the NT20 is +5 V DC ±5%, 150 mA max.
Do not use both port’s +5 V output at the same time.
80
SECTION 3
System Menu Operation
This section describes the operation of the System Menu focusing on the procedure to start up the NT20. Functions which
will be convenient to use the NT20 and those which are useful for the system maintenance are also explained here.
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
Operation Flow by the System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
82
Starting the NT20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
83
3-2-1
Changing the System Settings or Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
83
Operation Modes and the System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
84
3-3-1
84
System Menu and the Operation Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3-2
Menu Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
84
3-3-3
Operations with the System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
86
Initializing Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
88
3-4-1
Initialization by Using the System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
88
3-4-2
Initialization by Using the DIP Switch (Forced Initialization). . . . .
90
Setting the Conditions of Communications with the Host by Using
the Memory Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
91
3-5-1
Selecting the Host Communications Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
93
3-5-2
Selecting the Host Communications Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
94
3-5-3
Selecting the Host Link Communications Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
95
3-5-4
Selecting the NT Link (1:N) Communications Speed . . . . . . . . . . .
96
3-5-5
Selecting Unit Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
97
3-5-6
Selecting the Automatic Reset Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
98
3-5-7
Setting RS–232C Communications Conditions (NT20-ST128). . . .
99
3-6
Registering the Screen Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
102
3-7
Starting the Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
105
3-8
Various System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
106
3-8-1
Setting the Key Press Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
106
3-8-2
Using the Buzzer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
107
3-8-3
Backlight OFF Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
109
3-8-4
Language Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
110
3-8-5
Support Tool Mode Setting (NT20-ST121-E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
111
3-8-6
Lamp Bit Control (NT20-ST128). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
112
3-9
System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
115
3-9-1
I/O Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
115
3-9-2
Checking the PT Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
122
3-9-3
Checking the NT20 DIP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
124
3-10 Transferring the System Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
126
3-11 Transferring the Resource Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
129
81
Operation Flow by the System Menu
3-1
Section 3-1
Operation Flow by the System Menu
Follow the procedure below when using the NT20 for the first time or when
changing the system.
Create the Screen Data
Create the screen data to be displayed on the NT20 by using the Support
Tool.
For the screen data creation, refer to the “NT Support Tool for Windows Operation Manual” ([email protected]).
Start Up the NT20 (Display the System Menu.) (page 84)
Turn ON the power to the NT20.
When no screen data has been registered, the “SYSTEM MENU” will be displayed. If the NT20 enters the RUN mode, press appropriate touch switches
to display the System Menu.
Initializing Memory (page 88)
Select a System Menu and initialize the NT20 unit memory.
Memory Switch Settings (page 91)
Select the System Menu and make settings such as the communications conditions for communications with the Host by setting the memory switches.
Registering the Screen Data (page 102)
Connect the Support Tool to the NT20 and transfer the screen data from the
Support Tool to the NT20.
For the connection of the Support Tool, refer to 2-4 Connecting the NT Support Tool on page 35.
Starting the Operation
(page 105)
Connect to the PLC/Host and start the operation.
System Maintenance (page 115)
If an error has occurred during operation, check the I/Os, settings, etc. referring to this guide.
82
Section 3-2
Starting the NT20
3-2
Starting the NT20
When the NT20 is started, it will enter the RUN mode if system settings and
screen data registration have been completed. If no screen data has been
registered or the screen data are destroyed, the System Menu will be displayed.
Before turning ON the power, check the following DIP switch settings on the
NT20.
• SW2-3 “Switch to the System Menu enabled/disabled” is set to OFF
(enabled).
• SW2-1 “Screen data forced initialize Yes/No” is set to No (ineffective).
For the DIP switch settings of the unit, refer to the 2-1-2 Operation Status DIP
Switch Settings (page 19).
3-2-1
Changing the System Settings or Screen Data
Follow the procedure below to change the system settings or screen data
contents.
Note
(1) Turn ON the power to the NT20.
The NT20 will enter the RUN mode and the start-up screen will be displayed. The start-up screen varies according to registered screen data.
(2) Press appropriate touch switches to display the System Menu, and
change system settings. For the method for calling the System Menu, refer to the 3-3-3 Operations with the System Menu on page 86.
(3) If the NT20 has failed to start up normally; an error message is displayed
or no screen is displayed, memory needs to be initialized.
For the memory initializing procedure, refer to 3-4 Initializing Memory on
page 88.
83
Section 3-3
Operation Modes and the System Menu
3-3
Operation Modes and the System Menu
The NT20 operates in either “RUN”, “Transmit”, or “Maintenance” mode. The
operation modes can be changed by using the System Menu.
3-3-1
System Menu and the Operation Modes
Select an operation mode by pressing the corresponding touch switch in the
System Menu. The operation modes with respect to the System Menu are
related to each other as shown below.
For the operations with the System Menu, refer to the 3-3-3 Operations with
the System Menu (page 86).
RUN mode
The NT20 runs in this
state. Controls from the
Host are enabled and
various indications and
I/O operations are made.
Transmit mode
When system
settings and screen
data registration have
been completed
Power ON
To change system settings
or screen data contents
Screen data and other
data are transmitted
between the NT20 and a
support tool.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance mode
Maintenance mode
The NT20 maintenance
operations such as
memory initialize and
setting check are
executed.
3-3-2
Menu Tree
The System Menu allows to effect various NT20 functions by using the touch
switches. The NT20’s functions with respect to the System Menu are related
as shown below.
For the operations with the System Menu, refer to the 3-3-3 Operations with
the System Menu (page 86).
84
Section 3-3
Operation Modes and the System Menu
Host Link, NT Link, C200H
Direct Communications
SYSTEM MENU
I/O CHECK MENU
Quit
Transmit Mode (page 86)
Maintenance Mode
MAINTENANCE MENU
Quit
PT Setting (page 107)
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
DIP-SW Status (page 109)
COMM. CHECK MENU
Quit
LED Check (page 105)
Buzzer (page 104)
Touch Switch (page 99)
Data Memory (page 106)
LCD Display (page 103)
Comm. Check
Quit
Tool I/F
RS-232C (NT20-ST128)
COMM. CHECK MENU
INITIALIZE MEMORY MENU
Quit
Init. Screen (page 88)
Quit
Tool I/F (page 101)
RS-232C I/F
Host Link, NT Link
MEMORY SWITCH MENU
Comm. Type
Key Sound
Buzzer Sound
BK light Off
Tool Mode
Automatic Reset
Unit No.
Baud Rate
Comm. Port
Language
(page 93)
(page 106)
(page 107)
(page 109)
(page 111)
(page 98)
(page 97) (See note 1.)
(pages 95, 96)
(page 94)
(page 110)
First screen
Second screen
C200H Direct Communications
MEMORY SWITCH MENU
Comm. Type
Key Sound
Buzzer Sound
BK light Off
Tool Mode
Automatic Reset
Language
(page 93)
(page 106)
(page 107)
(page 109)
(page 111)
(page 98)
(page 110)
First screen
Second screen
RS-232C (NT20-ST128)
MEMORY SWITCH MENU
(page 106)
(page 107)
(page 109)
BK light Off
(page 111)
Tool Mode
Automatic Reset (page 98)
(page 99)
Data Bits
(page 99)
Stop Bits
(page 99)
Partiy Check
(page 99)
Flow Control
(page 99)
Baud Rate
LMP Bit Control (page 112)
(page 94)
Comm. Port
(page 110)
Lanugage
Key Sound
Buzzer Sound
Note
First screen
Second screen
Third screen
The unit number must be set only for 1:N NT Link communications.
85
Section 3-3
Operation Modes and the System Menu
3-3-3
Operations with the System Menu
The following gives the procedure to call the System Menu, select the menu
items, and other operations with the System Menu.
Make sure that DIP SW2-3 “Switch to the System Menu enabled/disabled” is
set to OFF (enabled). If the setting is ON (disabled), the System Menu will not
be displayed by following the procedure given below.
Displaying the System
Menu
Press appropriate touch switches to display the System Menu as described
below. The “RUN” LED goes off when the System Menu is displayed.
The NT20 display screen has four touch switches to display the System Menu
in the four corners (about 9 mm x 9 mm size). Press any two of these switches
at the same time to call the System Menu screen.
RUN mode
Press any two of
these four corners
at the same time.
[SYSTEM MENU]
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance mode
Note that the touch switches used to call the System Menu are not displayed
on the screen. If a touch switch displayed in a corner is pressed first, the touch
switch will function and the System Menu will not be displayed. To successfully call the System Menu, first press a corner where no touch key is displayed, and then, press any other corner regardless of the presence of a
touch key.
If a screen has the touch switches registered at all of the four corners, it is
impossible to call the System Menu from the screen.
A “system key” function can be assigned to a touch switch. Pressing the touch
switch so assigned on the screen can easily display the System Menu. For the
relationship between the system key and the touch switch, refer to the 4-7-3
System Key Functions (page 154).
86
Section 3-3
Operation Modes and the System Menu
Selecting the Menu Items
Press (touch) a menu item on the screen to select the item.
Menu items allow to make the ON/OFF selection or to call subsequent menu
or screen.
Example 1
To call the “Maintenance mode menu” by pressing the “Maintenance Mode”
on the System Menu screen:
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
System Menu Items
The System Menu items and the functions are as given below.
Menu Item
Quit
Function
The System Menu screen is cleared and the NT20 will return to
the RUN mode.
Transmit Mode
The Transmit Mode screen will be displayed to allow the transmission of the screen data between the NT20 and the Support
Tool. For the transmission of the screen data, refer to3-6 Registering the Screen Data (page 102).
Maintenance Mode The MAINTENANCE MENU will be displayed to allow the maintenance of the NT20 system.
Switching from the
System Menu to the RUN
Mode
The NT20 will exit the System Menu and switch to the RUN mode in the cases
described below.
• Selecting “Quit” in the System Menu.
• The screen (touch switches) is not pressed for over 10 seconds.
87
Section 3-4
Initializing Memory
3-4
Initializing Memory
If the NT20 is used for the first time or if the screen data is ruined and the
NT20 cannot be normally started, the memory needs to be initialized.
The memory initialization is required in the cases described below.
• When the NT20 is used for the first time or when an error message indicating that the screen data is ruined etc. when the NT20 is started.
➡ Use the “Maintenance Mode” – “Init. Memory” in the System Menu.
• When the NT20 has made a buzzer sound and the screen has disappeared during the start-up or operation.
➡ Use the NT20 DIP SW2-1 “Screen data forced initialize Yes/No”.
When an error has occurred, the error messages such as “Screen data corrupted” will be displayed. For the error messages displayed on the screen,
refer to 7-2 Responding to Displayed Error Messages.
Note
Initializing the screen data memory will erase entire screen data registered in
the NT20. Make sure that there are backup copies of the screen data on
floppy disks before starting the initialization.
• Data of the NT20 to Be Initialized
Screen data
System memory
Memory tables
Mark data
Direct information
3-4-1
Initialization by Using the System Menu
Initialize the screen data memory by following the procedure given below.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
88
Select “Init. Memory”.
Section 3-4
Initializing Memory
[ INITIALIZE MEMORY MENU ]
Quit
Init. Screen
Initialize Screen Memory?
Yes
No
No direct information is set!
Use the Support Tool
to set the PT Control Area
and PT Notify Area
Select “Init. Screen”.
Select “Yes”.
The screen data memory is
initialized. During the initialization, the “Initializing” message will be displayed.
If “No” is selected, the memory initialization will be canceled and the NT20 returns
to the “operation mode”.
Example:
Direct information is also initialized. Set the direct information with the Support
Tool.
After initialization of the screen data memory, the system enters the operation
mode. At this point, nothing is displayed on the screen of the NT20. Return to
the System Menu, select the Transmit Mode, and transmit the screen data
from the Support Tool.
If the screen data cannot be initialized for any reason, the message “An Error
Occur Initializing Memory” is displayed.
89
Section 3-4
Initializing Memory
3-4-2
Initialization by Using the DIP Switch (Forced Initialization)
Note
Be sure to turn the power OFF before setting the NT20 DIP switch.
Set the DIP switch as follows to initialize the screen data memory.
1,2,3...
1. Set DIP SW2-1 on the NT20 to ON and turn the power ON or reset the
NT20.
Initialize Screen Memory?
Yes
No
Select “Yes”.
The screen data memory is initialized. During
the initialization, the “Initializing” message will
be displayed.
Initialized the
Screen Data Memory.
Turn OFF the DIP Switch 2-1
and push the Reset Switch,
then return to RUN mode.
2. Turn the NT20 power to OFF.
3. Set NT20 DIP SW2-1 to OFF and turn the power ON.
Note
(1) Selecting “No” will cancel the memory initialization. In either case, when
changing the system settings or registering screen data, display the system menu after setting DIP switch SW2-1 to the OFF position while the
NT20 power is OFF, then switching the power back ON.
(2) The NT20 DIP SW2-1 is used to set “Screen data forced initialize Yes/
No”. Setting this to Yes selects “effective”, and No “ineffective”.
90
Section 3-5
Setting the Conditions of Communications with the Host by Using the Memory Switches
3-5
Setting the Conditions of Communications with the Host
by Using the Memory Switches
The communications between the NT20 and a PLC/Host are called the host
communications.
The NT20 PTs can be connected to the host using the following communications methods.
NT20-ST121-E: Host Link or NT Link (both direct connections)
NT20-ST121-E + NT20-IF001 + NT600M-LB122-V1:
C200H direct communications (direct connection)
NT20-ST128:
RS-232C communications (command control)
With the NT20-ST121-E, the Host Link, 1:1 NT Link, or 1:N NT Link communications method is set using a memory switch. Other settings, such as the
band rate and automatic resetting of communications, are also set with memory switches. This section describes the communications condition settings
using the memory switches.
Memory Switches
The NT20 has the memory areas used to store the PLC connection method,
communications conditions, system settings, etc. which can be used as the
switches and called the “memory switches”. Since the memory switches use
the flash memory, the stored data can be held even when the power supply is
turned OFF.
If the memory switch memory is corrupted for any reason, a message will be
displayed when the operating mode is changed. Press the Write touch switch
and initialize the memory.
Setting Functions and the
Memory Switch Menu
The memory switches can be set easily by using the memory switch menu in
the System Menu.
The following settings can be made with the memory switches. Refer to the
subsequent pages and 3-8 Various System Settings for details on each setting and function.
• Host Link Method
(1/2)
[ MEMORY SW MENU ]
Comm. Type
Host Link
Key Sound
OFF
Buzzer Sound
OFF
Bk light Off
None
Tool Mode
NT20
Quit
Page
WRT&
EXIT
[ MEMORY SW MENU ]
(2/2)
Automatic Reset
No
Baud Rate
9600bps
Comm. Port
Port B
Language
English
Quit
Page
WRT&
EXIT
• NT Link (1:1) Method
[ MEMORY SW MENU ]
Comm. Type
(1/2)
Quit
NT Link
Key Sound
OFF
Buzzer Sound
OFF
Bk light Off
None
Tool Mode
NT20
Page
WRT&
EXIT
[ MEMORY SW MENU ]
(2/2)
Automatic Reset
No
Comm. Port
Port B
Language
English
Quit
Page
WRT&
EXIT
91
Section 3-5
Setting the Conditions of Communications with the Host by Using the Memory Switches
• NT Link (1:N) Method
[ MEMORY SW MENU ]
(1/2)
Comm. Type
NT Link 1: N
Key Sound
OFF
Buzzer Sound
OFF
Bk light Off
None
Tool Mode
NT20
Quit
Page
WRT&
EXIT
[ MEMORY SW MENU ]
(2/2)
Automatic Reset
No
Unit No.
7
Comm. Speed
Standard
Comm. Port
Port B
Language
English
Quit
Page
WRT&
EXIT
• C200H Direct Communications
[ MEMORY SW MENU ]
(1/2)
Comm. Type
C200H
Key Sound
OFF
Buzzer Sound
OFF
Bk light Off
None
Tool Mode
NT20S
Quit
Page
[ MEMORY SW MENU ]
(2/2)
Automatic Reset
No
Language
English
Quit
Page
WRT&
EXIT
WRT&
EXIT
• RS-232C (NT20-ST128)
[ MEMORY SW MENU ]
(1/3)
Key Sound
ON
Buzzer Sound
ON
Bk light Off
10 min
Tool Mode
NT20S
Automatic Reset
Yes
[ MEMORY SW MENU ]
Quit
Page
(3/3)
LMP Bit Control
Enable
Comm. Port
Port B
Language
English
WRT&
EXIT
Quit
Page
WRT&
EXIT
92
[ MEMORY SW MENU ]
(2/3)
Data Bits
8 bits
Stop Bits
1bit
Parity Check
Even
Flow Control
RS/CS
Baud Rate
9600 bps
Quit
Page
WRT&
EXIT
Setting the Conditions of Communications with the Host by Using the Memory Switches
3-5-1
Section 3-5
Selecting the Host Communications Method
The NT20 can be connected to a PLC by the Host Link, the NT link, or the
C200H Direct communications. Either link can be selected by setting the
“Comm. Type” memory switch. The factory setting has been made to the
“Host link”.
Select the host communications method by the menu operation from the System Menu as described below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
[ MEMORY SW MENU ] (1/2)
Comm. Type
Host Link
Key Sound
OFF
Buzzer Sound
OFF
Bk light Off
None
Tool Mode
NT20S
Quit
Page
WRT
&
EXIT
Select “Memory Switch”.
Repeatedly pressing the
“Comm. Type” touch switch
causes the setting to cycle
through the options “Host
link”, “NT link”, “NT Link
1:N”, and “C200H” in that
order.
To set and quit the menu, press the [WRT&EXIT] touch switch. To quit without
setting, press [Quit].
Note
The communications method must be selected according to the method that
the connecting PLC supports.
93
Setting the Conditions of Communications with the Host by Using the Memory Switches
3-5-2
Section 3-5
Selecting the Host Communications Port
Note
There are two communications ports in NT20. Either of them can be set for
communications. But Port A can be set to communications with either the host
(Host link, NT link 1:1, NT link 1:N, RS-232C) or Support Tool and Port B can
only be set to communications with the host (Host link, NT link 1:1, NT link
1:N, RS-232C).
The NT20 can not communicate with both two ports at one time.
The factory setting has been made at “Port B”.
Select the host communications port by the menu operation from the System
Menu as described below. (e.g., Host Link)
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
[ MEMORY SW MENU ] (1/2)
Comm. Type
Host Link
Key Sound
OFF
Buzzer Sound
OFF
Bk light Off
None
Tool Mode
NT20S
Select “Memory Switch”.
Select “Page”.
Quit
Page
WRT
&
EXIT
[ MEMORY SW MENU ] (2/2) Quit
Automatic Reset No
Baud Rate
9600bps Page
Comm. Port
Port B
WRT
Language
English
Each time the “Comm.
Port” touch switch is
pressed, the setting option
alternates between “Port A”
and “Port B”.
&
EXIT
To set and quit the menu, press the [WRT&EXIT] touch switch. To quit without
setting, press [Quit].
94
Setting the Conditions of Communications with the Host by Using the Memory Switches
3-5-3
Section 3-5
Selecting the Host Link Communications Speed
When using the NT20 with the host link, the baud rate of the communications
with the PLC can be set. Use the “Baud Rate” switch and select 9600 bps,
19200 bps, 38400 bps, 57600 bps, or 115200 bps.
The factory setting has been made at 9600 bps.
Select the baud rate of the communications with the PLC by the menu operation from the System Menu as described below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
[ MEMORY SW MENU ] (1/2)
Comm. Type
Host Link
Key Sound
OFF
Buzzer Sound
OFF
Bk light Off
None
Tool Mode
NT20S
Quit
Page
Select “Memory Switch”.
Select “Page”.
If the host link is not selected, press the “Comm.
Type” touch switch and select “Host link”.
WRT
&
EXIT
[ MEMORY SW MENU ] (2/2) Quit
Automatic Reset No
Baud Rate
9600bps Page
Comm. Port
Port B
WRT
Language
English
Each time “Baud Rate” is
pressed, the setting that is
displayed will change.
&
EXIT
To set and quit the menu, press the [WRT&EXIT] touch switch. To quit without
setting, press [Quit].
95
Setting the Conditions of Communications with the Host by Using the Memory Switches
3-5-4
Section 3-5
Selecting the NT Link (1:N) Communications Speed
When using the NT20 with the NT Link (1:N), the baud rate of the communications with the PLC can be set. Use the “Comm. Speed” switch and select High
or Standard.
Select the speed of the communications with the PLC by the menu operation
from the System Menu as described below.
Select “Maintenance
Mode”.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
Select “Memory Switch”.
[ MEMORY SW MENU ] (1/2)
Comm. Type
NT Link 1:N
Key Sound
OFF
Buzzer Sound
OFF
Bk light Off
None
Tool Mode
NT20
Select “Page”.
[ MEMORY SW MENU ] (2/2)
Automatic Reset No
Unit No.
7
Comm. Speed
Standard
Comm. Port
Port B
Language
English
Quit
Page
If the NT Link 1:N is not
selected, press the “Comm.
Type” touch switch and
select “NT Link 1:N”.
WRT
&
EXIT
Quit
Page
Each time the “Comm.
Speed” touch switch is
pressed, the setting option
alternates between “High”
and “Standard”.
WRT
&
EXIT
To set and quit the menu, press the [WRT&EXIT] touch switch. To quit without
setting, press [Quit].
96
Setting the Conditions of Communications with the Host by Using the Memory Switches
3-5-5
Section 3-5
Selecting Unit Numbers
When using NT20 with the NT link (1:N) communications method, set unit
numbers.
When using NT link (1:N), unit numbers are used to identify each of the multiple PTs connected to a single PLC port. Set a different unit number for each
of the PTs connected to the port.
The unit numbers that can be set differ according to the type of host PLC as
follows.
C200HE:
Unit Nos. 0 to 3
C200HG, C200HX: Unit Nos. 0 to 7
Set the unit numbers by following the menu operation from the System Menu
described below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
[ MEMORY SW MENU ] (1/2)
Comm. Type
NT Link 1:N
Key Sound
OFF
Buzzer Sound
OFF
Bk light Off
None
Tool Mode
NT20S
Quit
Page
Select “Memory Switch”.
Press the “Comm Type”
touch switch to select “NT
link (1:N)”.
Select “Page”.
WRT
&
EXIT
97
Setting the Conditions of Communications with the Host by Using the Memory Switches
[ MEMORY SW MENU ] (2/2)
Automatic Reset No
Unit No.
7
Comm. Speed
Standard
Comm. Port
Port B
Language
English
Quit
Page
Section 3-5
Repeatedly pressing the
“Unit No.” touch switch
cycles through the numbers
that can be set.
WRT
&
EXIT
To set and quit the menu, press the [WRT & EXIT] touch switch. To quit without setting, press [Quit]. The run mode will be established.
3-5-6
Selecting the Automatic Reset Function
The “Automatic Reset” memory switch is used to set whether or not the communications are automatically reset after the occurrence of a communications
error.
The factory setting has been made at “No”.
Select the baud rate of the communications with the PLC by the menu operation from the System Menu as described below.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
98
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
Select “Memory Switch”.
[ MEMORY SW MENU ] (1/2)
Quit
Comm. Type
Host Link
Key Sound
Page
OFF
Buzzer Sound
OFF
WRT
Bk light Off
None
&
Tool Mode
NT20S
EXIT
Select “Page”.
Setting the Conditions of Communications with the Host by Using the Memory Switches
[ MEMORY SW MENU ] (2/2) Quit
Automatic Reset No
Baud Rate
9600bps Page
Comm. Port
Port B
WRT
Language
English
&
Section 3-5
Each time the “Automatic
Reset” touch switch is
pressed, the setting option
“Yes” alternates with “No”.
EXIT
To set and quit the menu, press the [WRT&EXIT] touch switch. To quit without
setting, press [Quit].
• “No”: If a communications error has occurred, corresponding error message is displayed and the operation stops.
• “Yes”: If a communications error has occurred, corresponding error message will not be displayed and the operation will be automatically reset.
3-5-7
Setting RS–232C Communications Conditions (NT20-ST128)
When using an NT20-ST128 (using the RS-232C interface for communications with the host), set the following communications conditions.
• Data Bits
• Stop Bits
• Parity Check
• Flow Control
• Baud Rate
Set the same communications conditions at the host and the NT20. You are
recommended to set the highest baud rate that can be used by the host and
NT20.
The factory settings are as follows:
• Data Bits
8 bits
• Stop Bits
2 bits
• Parity Check
Even
• Flow Control
None
• Baud Rate
9600 bps
Set the conditions of the communications with the Host by the menu operation
from the System Menu as described below.
[SYSTEM MENU]
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
99
Setting the Conditions of Communications with the Host by Using the Memory Switches
[MAINTENANCE MENU]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
[MEMORY SW MENU] (1/3)
Key Sound
ON
Buzzer Sound
ON
Bk light Off
10 min
Tool Mode
NT20S
Automatic Reset Yes
[MEMORY SW MENU] (2/3)
Data Bits
8 bits
Stop Bits
1 bit
Parity Check
Even
Flow Control
RS/CS
Baud Rate
19200 bps
Section 3-5
Select “Memory Switch”.
Quit
Page
WRT
&
EXIT
Quit
Page
WRT
&
EXIT
[MEMORY SW MENU] (3/3)
Quit
LMP Bit Control Enable
Page
Comm. Port
Port B
Language
English
WRT
&
EXIT
The selected option displayed when the corresponding touch switch is
pressed: the options for each switch are indicated below:
100
• Data Bits:
7 bits/8 bits
• Stop Bits:
1 bit/2 bits
• Parity Check:
None/Even/Odd
Setting the Conditions of Communications with the Host by Using the Memory Switches
• Flow Control:
None/RS/CS/XON/XOFF
• Baud Rate:
2400 bps/4800 bps/9600 bps/19200 bps
Section 3-5
• LMP Bit Control: Enable/Disable
Note
Use the same condition settings as set for the host. It is recommended that
the highest baud rate possible is selected for both the host and the NT20.
For details on lamp bit control, refer to 3-8 Various System Settings on page
page 106.
101
Section 3-6
Registering the Screen Data
3-6
Registering the Screen Data
The screen data is created by using the Support Tool and registered to the
NT20 screen data memory. This section describes the procedure to register
the screen data to the NT20. For the screen data creation and the Support
Tool operation, refer to the NT-series Support Tool Operation Manual (Cat. No.
V061).
Note
The screen data transmission speed can be increased by setting “Hi speed”
for “Communications Mode” on the Tool Settings screen of the Support Tool.
Unit of Screen Transmission – Transmission in File Units
The NT20 uses several screens which are switched on its display. The screen
data of one NT20 unit corresponds to the files created by using the Support
Tool. Select a file which contains the screen data to be transmitted when
selecting the screen data to be transmitted to the NT20 so that the required
screen data can be transmitted to the NT20.
Screen data file
NT20
Screen 1
Screen 1
Screen 2
Screen 2
:
:
All screen data is transmitted
by one operation.
Screen N
Screen N
Memory tables
Memory tables
Mark data
Mark data
System memory
System memory
(Direct information)
(Direct information)
When the screen data is transmitted from the Support Tool to the NT20, the
screen data already existing in the NT20 will be erased.
If an error message and the System Menu are displayed immediately after the
NT20 has been started, the screen data memory needs to be initialized.
Data Transmission in Screen Units
The NT20 allows the transmission of data for specified screens. By selecting
the screen number of the screen to be transmitted using the Support Tool, it is
possible to transmit the required screen only to the NT20 (it is also possible to
transmit multiple screens in a batch).
When changes have also been made to the memory table entries or direct
connection information, transmit the changed data to the NT20 too, for example by using transmission in screen units.
Support Tool
NT20
Screen 1
Screen 2
Screen 2
:
Only the required screen data
is transmitted.
Screen N
Memory tables
(Direct information)
!Caution When screen data transmission is in screen units, if there is data other than
screen data, for example memory table or direct access changes, transmit
this data also.
102
Section 3-6
Registering the Screen Data
Note
When screen data is transmitted to an NT20, it is written into a free area of the
memory without overwriting the existing data. This means that if data transmission in screen units is performed frequently, there will come a time when
there is no more free area in the memory and further transmission is impossible. If this happens, transmit the data in file units to reorganize the contents of
the NT20 memory.
Transmitting the Screen Data from the Support Tool
To transmit the screen data from the Support Tool to the NT20, connect the
NT20 to the computer on which the Support Tool is being used, and follow the
procedure below.
Note
When the screen data transmission is attempted, the screen data memory in
the NT20 is automatically initialized before new screen data is transmitted. It
is not necessary to initialize the screen data memory by using the menu
before the screen data transmission.
The NT20-ST121-E/ST128 uses the same connector for screen data transmission and connection to the Host. If this connector is currently connected to
the host, disconnect the cable from it and connect it to the Support Tool (personal computer) before attempting screen data transmission.
1,2,3...
1. Connect the NT20 to a PLC in which the Support Tool has been installed
and turn on the power to the NT20.
2. Turn ON the computer and start up the Support Tool.
3. Enter the “Transmit Mode” by operating the menu of the NT20 as described
below.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Select “Transmit Mode”.
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
[ TRANSMIT MODE ]
ABORT
The transmit mode is established. When using an NT20,
the “Support Tool mode” setting will be displayed on the
bottom line of the screen, as
shown in the figure to the
left.
Tool Mode NT20S
4. Select a screen data to be transmitted to the NT20 in the File Selection
screen of the Support Tool, and press the Send key.
5. The NT20 will display the following screen when the screen data is being
transmitted.
103
Section 3-6
Registering the Screen Data
[ TRANSMIT MODE ]
Tool → PT
Screen Data
0 KB
ABORT
Tool Mode NT20S
6. When the screen data transmission is completed, the Support Tool will display the following screen.
7. Press any key on the Support Tool to return to the File Selection screen.
8. Pressing the ABORT touch switch in the Transmit Mode screen of the
NT20 will exit the Transmit Mode and enter the RUN Mode.
Note
Press the “Abort” touch switch on the NT20 when the screen data transmission is completed. Unless this touch switch is pressed, the screen data will not
be correctly registered. If the “Abort” touch switch is pressed during transmission, the screen data will not be correctly registered.
If screen data cannot be transmitted from the Support Tool, confirm normal
communications between the NT20 and the Support Tool (Personal computer). Use the tool communications check function in the Maintenance Mode
of the NT20 to check communications with the Support Tool. Refer to Checking the Communications with the Support Tool on page 116.
Precautions to Be Observed during Screen Data Transmission
When any of the following or a system error occurs during the screen data
transmission, the transmitted screen data will not be registered correctly to
the NT20. If an error message is displayed in the System Menu and the RUN
Mode cannot be selected, the screen data memory needs to be initialized.
• The power to the NT20 is interrupted or reset.
• The power to the computer on which the Support Tool is running is interrupted or reset.
• The cable connecting the NT20 to the computer on which the Support
Tool is running is interrupted or reset.
• The “Abort” touch switch on the NT20 screen is pressed to end the transmission.
• The ESC key on the Support Tool is pressed to end the transmission.
When the power to the NT20 is turned ON or reset, the screen data is
checked. However, if any of the above occurs during the screen data transmission, the screen may disappear and other unexpected problems may
occur.
In the case of such problems, set DIP SW2-1 to ON to initialize the memory.
For the memory initialization by using the DIP switch, refer to the 3-4-2 Initialization by Using the DIP Switch (Forced Initialization) on page 90.
104
Section 3-7
Starting the Operation
3-7
Starting the Operation
After completing the screen data transmission and setting the communications conditions, connect the NT20 to the Host and start operation.
Switching to RUN Mode
Press the Quit touch switch in the System Menu. The start-up screen in the
RUN mode will be displayed.
If the NT20 has failed to start correctly; e.g., the start-up screen is not displayed, an error message is displayed, or the screen is not displayed at all,
refer to 7-2 Responding to Displayed Error Messages and take appropriate
action.
Note
When using Host Link, NT Link, or C200H Direct communications, the screen
displayed on startup is the one specified in the screen switch setting of the PT
status control area.
When using an NT20-ST128, the startup screen is specified with the Support
Tool when creating the screen data. If no startup screen is specified, screen
No.1 becomes the startup screen. If no screen data is registered for the startup screen, the error message “Screen not registered” is displayed. For details
on screen numbers, see 4-3 Screen Display on page 140.
Confirming the Communications between the NT20 and the PLC/Host
When using the NT20-ST128, use the RS-232C communications check function in Maintenance Mode to confirm normal communications between the
NT20 and the host. Refer to Checking the Communications with the Host
(NT20-ST128) on page 117.
When using the NT20, run the Host program and check that the following
operations are executed normally.
• Confirm that the NT20 screens switch according to the Host program execution.
If the screens do not switch correctly, check the connection between the
NT20 and the Host and also check the settings.
Refer to SECTION 2 Hardware Settings and Connections.
• Confirm that the information selected by the NT20 touch switches has
been correctly sent to the PLC by displaying the information of bits and
words by using a Programming Device (e.g., CX-Programmer). If the
information sent from the NT20 has not been correctly received by the
PLC, check the screen data settings (specifically the switch settings).
For details on the screen data creation, refer to the NT Support Tool for
Windows Operation Manual (Cat. No. V061).
105
Section 3-8
Various System Settings
3-8
Various System Settings
The NT20 can set a variety of functions to the memory switches which are
convenient during the operation. This section describes the memory switch
settings related to the operation environment.
3-8-1
Setting the Key Press Sound
Whether or not the key press sound is given when the NT20 touch switch is
pressed can be set with the memory switch.
The factory setting has been set to give the key press sound when the touch
key is pressed.
Set the key press sound by the menu operation from the System Menu as
described below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
[ MEMORY SW MENU ] (1/2)
Comm. Type
Host Link
Key Sound
OFF
Buzzer Sound
OFF
Bk light Off
None
Tool Mode
NT20S
106
Quit
Page
WRT
&
EXIT
Select “Memory Switch”.
Each time the “Key Sound”
touch switch is pressed, the
setting option “ON” alternates with “OFF”.
Section 3-8
Various System Settings
To set and quit the menu, press the [WRT & EXIT] touch switch. To quit without setting, press [Quit].
• ON: The key press sound will be given for 0.2 second when a touch
switch is pressed.
• OFF: The key press sound will not be given when a touch key is pressed.
3-8-2
Using the Buzzer
The NT20 can set a buzzer to indicate the occurrence of an emergency or an
NT20 error.
Setting the Buzzer
Except when the buzzer has been set so as not to sound at all, the buzzer will
sound when an error occurs. To set the buzzer to sound in other cases, the
following two procedures can be used.
• Controlled by the Host
It is possible to control the NT20 from the Host to sound the buzzer during
the operation.
Refer to 5-4 NT20 Status Control on page 203.
• Set the buzzer as a screen data attribute by using the Support Tool.
When creating the screen data by using the Support Tool, set the buzzer
as a screen attribute so that the buzzer will sound. When the screen in
which this attribute has been set is displayed, the NT20 will give the buzzer
sound.
Note
Stopping the Buzzer
If the control by the Host and the display of the screen in which the buzzer
attribute has been set are executed simultaneously, the priority is given to the
control by the Host. Refer to the NT Support Tool for Windows Operation Manual (Cat . [email protected]).
The buzzer sound can be stopped by the following operation.
• Control by the Host
• Switch the screen to a screen which does not have a buzzer attribute.
• Press the touch switch to which the buzzer stop attribute has been set.
Note
If a buzzer stop attribute has been set to a touch switch created on the screen
in which the buzzer attribute has been set, such touch switch can be used to
stop the buzzer sound. For details on setting buzzer attributes for touch
switches, see Allocation of System Key Functions on page 154.
107
Section 3-8
Various System Settings
Types of Buzzer Sounds
The following buzzer sounds can be set.
• Continuous sound: The buzzer continues to sound.
• Intermittent sound: The buzzer sounds intermittently at constant intervals.
Note
Setting the Buzzer
If both the continuous buzzer and the intermittent buzzer are instructed by the
Host, the continuous buzzer will sound.
Use the memory switches to set whether or not the buzzer sounds when the
buzzer sound has been instructed by the Host or with a screen attribute or
when an error has occurred.
The factory setting is “ON”, which means that the buzzer will sound when a
command is received from the host, when a screen for which the buzzer
attribute is set is displayed, and when errors occur.
Set the buzzer sound by the menu operation from the System Menu as
described below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
[ MEMORY SW MENU ] (1/2)
Comm. Type
Host Link
Key Sound
OFF
Buzzer Sound
OFF
Bk light Off
None
Tool Mode
NT20S
108
Quit
Page
WRT
&
EXIT
Select “Memory Switch”.
Repeatedly pressing the
“Buzzer Sound” touch switch
cycles through the setting
options “ON”, “ERR ON”, and
“OFF”, in that order.
Section 3-8
Various System Settings
To set and quit the menu, press the [WRT&EXIT] touch switch. To quit without
setting, press [Quit].
• OFF: The buzzer will not sound at all during the operation.
• When “ON” is set, the buzzer will sound when a command is received
from the host, when a screen for which the buzzer attribute is set is displayed, and when errors occur.
• When “ERR ON” has been set, the buzzer will sound only when an error
has occurred.
Note
3-8-3
The buzzer will sound when “Buzzer check” is selected in the Maintenance
Mode regardless of the buzzer setting.
Backlight OFF Function
The NT20 has a function that turns off the backlight of the LCD panel to maximize its service life if no operation is performed for a certain period of time.
Turning ON the Backlight
When a touch switch on the NT20 is pressed or a screen is switched or redisplayed by the PLC when the backlight is off by the backlight off function, the
backlight will turn on. Any changes of numeric values or characters displayed
on the screen will not effect the backlight to turn on again.
Setting the Backlight OFF Function
Use the memory switches to set whether or not the backlight off function is
used and the length of time to turn off the backlight.
The factory setting has been made so as to turn off the backlight if no operation has been performed for 10 minutes.
Set the backlight off function by the menu operation from the System Menu as
described below.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
Select “Memory Switch”.
109
Section 3-8
Various System Settings
[ MEMORY SW MENU ] (1/2)
Comm. Type
Host Link
Key Sound
OFF
Buzzer Sound
OFF
Bk light Off
None
Tool Mode
NT20S
Quit
Page
Repeatedly pressing the
“BK light Off” touch switch
cycles through the setting
options “10 min”, 1 hour,
and None, in that order.
WRT
&
EXIT
To set and quit the menu, press the [WRT&EXIT] touch switch. To quit without
setting, press [Quit].
• None: The backlight off function is not used. As long as no operation is
performed, the same screen remains to be displayed.
• 10 minutes: The backlight will be turned off when no operation has been
performed for 10 minutes.
• 1 hour: The backlight will be turned off when no operation has been performed for 1 hour.
!Caution Do not press touch switches carelessly while the backlight is off or while nothing is displayed on the screen.
Otherwise the system may operate unpredictably.
Only press touch switches after confirming system safety.
Note
3-8-4
Continuous display of the same pattern for an extended time (as a guide,
about 1 hour) will lead to the formation of an afterimage.
In order to prevent this, either use the screen saver function or periodically
switch screens.
Language Function
The language selection items will be different according to the DIP-SW2-2.
When DIP-SW2-2 is pushed to ON, the language is fixed to English. That is,
user can't choose other language but English.
When DIP-SW2-2 is pushed to OFF, the languages can be switched in this
language item in Memory SW Menu. Both Japanese and English are available.
DIP-SW2-2 is ON.
(Host link)
(NT Link (1:1))
[ MEMORY SW MENU ] (2/2) Quit
Automatic Reset No
Baud Rate
9600bps Page
Comm. Port
Port B
WRT
Language
English
&
EXIT
110
[ MEMORY SW MENU ] (2/2) Quit
Automatic Reset No
Page
Comm. Port
Port B
Language
English
WRT
&
EXIT
Section 3-8
Various System Settings
(NT Link (1:N))
[ MEMORY SW MENU ] (2/2)
Automatic Reset No
Unit No.
7
Comm. Speed
Standard
Comm. Port
Port B
Language
English
Quit
Page
WRT
&
EXIT
DIP-SW2-2 is OFF.
(Host link)
(NT Link (1:1))
[ MEMORY SW MENU ] (2/2) Quit
Automatic Reset No
Baud Rate
9600bps Page
Comm. Port
Port B
WRT
Language
English
&
[ MEMORY SW MENU ] (2/2) Quit
Automatic Reset No
Page
Comm. Port
Port B
Language
English
EXIT
WRT
&
EXIT
(NT Link (1:N))
[ MEMORY SW MENU ] (2/2)
Automatic Reset No
Unit No.
7
Comm. Speed
Standard
Comm. Port
Port B
Language
English
3-8-5
Quit
Page
WRT
&
EXIT
Support Tool Mode Setting (NT20-ST121-E)
By setting “Tool Mode” to “NT20M”, the NT20 can be used in the same way as
the conventional NT20M/NT20S, and it becomes possible to use the NT
Series Support Tool (version [email protected]).
However, the following restrictions apply when “NT20M” is set:
• Version 5 of the direct connection function cannot be used.
• The PT type setting must be “NT20M”.
• High-speed data transfer with the Support Tool is not possible.
• It is not possible to transfer the direct information alone.
• When screen data transmission is in screen units, simultaneous transmission of multiple screens is not possible. An attempt to transmit multiple
screens may destroy the screen data.
• When screen data transmission is in screen units, transmission with verification set is not possible.
• The image data memory must be initialized before starting transfer in file
units.
• Screen data for RS-232C communications cannot be used.
111
Section 3-8
Various System Settings
Set the Support Tool mode by the menu operation from the system menu
shown below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
[ MEMORY SW MENU ] (1/2)
Comm. Type
Host Link
Key Sound
OFF
Buzzer Sound
OFF
Bk light Off
None
Tool Mode
NT20S
Quit
Page
WRT
&
EXIT
Select “Memory Switch”.
Each time the “Tool Mode”
touch switch is pressed, the
setting option alternates
between “NT20”, “NT20S”,
and “NT20M”.
(The figure to the left shows
the [email protected]
screen.)
To quit after setting the selected item, press the WRT & EXIT touch switch. To
quit without setting, press the Quit touch switch. The NT20 will enter the RUN
mode.
• When “NT20M” or “NT20S” is set, the NT20M/NT20S compatible mode is
established and the terminal can be used as an NT20M/NT20S.
• When “NT20” is set, the terminal can be used as an NT20.
Note
3-8-6
Before uploading screen data from the NT20 to the Support Tool,
confirm that the model information for the screen data in the NT20
and the Tool's transfer mode match. If they do not match, the upload may fail or data may change, preventing correct operation.
Lamp Bit Control (NT20-ST128)
When using the NT20-ST128 (using the RS-232C interface for communications with the host), you can select whether lamp status is controlled by bit
designation or not.
The factory setting for this function is “Enable” (lamps numbered 0 to 31 controlled by bits).
112
Section 3-8
Various System Settings
Set the lamp bit control function by the menu operation from the System Menu
as described below.
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
[MEMORY SW MENU] (1/3)
Key Sound
ON
Buzzer Sound
ON
Bk light Off
10 min
Tool Mode
NT20S
Automatic Reset Yes
[MEMORY SW MENU] (2/3)
Data Bits
8 bits
Stop Bits
1 bit
Parity Check
Even
Flow Control
RS/CS
Baud Rate
19200 ps
Select “Memory Switch”.
Select “Page down”.
Quit
Page
WRT
&
EXIT
Select “Page down”.
Quit
Page
WRT
&
EXIT
113
Section 3-8
Various System Settings
[MEMORY SW MENU] (3/3)
Quit
LMP Bit Control Enable
Page
Comm. Port
Port B
Language
English
Each time the “LMP Bit Control” touch switch is pressed,
the setting option “Enable”
alternates with “Disable”.
WRT
&
EXIT
To set and quit the menu, press the [WRT&EXIT] touch switch. To quit without
setting, press [Quit].
• When “Disable” is set, the control of lamp display status by bits is not possible. The lamps numbered 0 to 31 can be controlled only by specifying
lamp numbers.
• When “Enable” is set, lamp control by bits is possible. This means that the
lamps numbered 0 to 31 can be controlled by specifying either lamp numbers or bits. However, it is not possible to make “lit”/”flashing” status selections by specifying lamp numbers: the selection made when the screen
data was created remains effective.
114
Section 3-9
System Maintenance
3-9
System Maintenance
The NT20 has the self maintenance functions such as I/O check and setting
status check.
3-9-1
I/O Check
The I/O operations for the following items of the NT20 are checked by the I/O
check function.
• Touch Switch
• Communications with the Support Tool
• Communications with the Host (NT20-ST128 RS-232C only)
• LCD
• LED Check
• The Screen Data Memory
• Buzzer
Checking the Touch Switches
Execute a touch switch check by the menu operation from the System Menu
as described below.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
[ I/O CHECK MENU ]
Quit
LCD Display
LED Check
Comm. Check
Buzzer
Touch Switch
Data Memory
Select “I/O Check”.
Select “Touch Switch”.
115
Section 3-9
System Maintenance
A panel of 6-row x 12-column touch switches, each switch sized 1 x 1 cm, will
be displayed.
"EXIT" switch to exit the
touch switch check menu.
The touch switch is normal if it is
highlighted while it is pressed.
• Press a touch switch on the screen. If the touch switch is highlighted while
it is pressed, the touch switch is normally functioning.
• When the check is finished, press the EXIT touch switch. The I/O check
menu will be redisplayed.
Note
Checking the
Communications with the
Support Tool
If memory switch setting for the key press sound has been made for ON, the
key press sound will be made when a touch switch is pressed.
The status of touch switches pressed during an I/O check is not sent to the
host.
Execute a NT20-to-Support Tool communications check by the menu operation from the System Menu as described below.
The NT20-ST121-E/ST128 uses the same connector (Port A) for connection
to the Support Tool and connection to the Host. If this connector is currently
connected to the host, disconnect the cable from it and connect it to the Support Tool (personal computer) before attempting screen data transmission.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
116
Select “I/O Check”.
Section 3-9
System Maintenance
[ I/O CHECK MENU ]
Quit
LCD Display
LED Check
Comm. Check
Buzzer
Touch Switch
Data Memory
[ COMM. CHECK MENU ]
Quit
Tool I/F
[ TOOL I/F INPUT CHECK ]
Select “Comm. Check”.
Select “Tool I/F”.
The data received from the
connected Support Tool
are displayed in hexadecimal numbers.
EXIT
When the check is finished, press the Exit touch switch. The NT20 will enter
the I/O CHECK MENU.
Checking the
Communications with the
Host (NT20-ST128)
Execute a NT20-to-Host communications check by the menu operation from
the System Menu as described below.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
117
Section 3-9
System Maintenance
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
[ I/O CHECK MENU ]
Quit
LCD Display
LED Check
Comm. Check
Buzzer
Touch Switch
Data Memory
Select “I/O Check”.
Select “Comm.Check.
[ COMM. CHECK MENU ]
Quit
Tool I/F
RS-232C I/F
[ RS-232C I/F INPUT MENU ]
Exit
When the check is finished, press the EXIT touch switch. The NT20 will enter
the RUN mode.
Checking the LCD
118
Check the NT20 LCD by using the menu operation from the System Menu as
described below.
Section 3-9
System Maintenance
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
[ I/O CHECK MENU ]
Quit
LCD Display
LED Check
Comm. Check
Buzzer
Touch Switch
Data Memory
Select “I/O Check”.
Select “LCD Display”.
Select “RS-232C I/F”.
• The LCD displays dots (segments of the screen) line by line beginning
with the top left corner. If all the dots are displayed normally, the NT20 will
enter the I/O CHECK MENU after all the dots have been turned off.
• To cancel the LCD indication check, press any touch switch (anywhere)
on the screen. The I/O Check Menu will be redisplayed.
Checking the Buzzer
Check the NT20 buzzer by using the menu operation from the System Menu
as described below.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
119
Section 3-9
System Maintenance
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
[ I/O CHECK MENU ]
Quit
LCD Display
LED Check
Comm. Check
Buzzer
Touch Switch
Data Memory
Select “I/O Check”.
Select “Buzzer”.
• If the buzzer function is normal, the continuous buzzer sound will be
made.
• To stop the buzzer, press “EXIT” touch switch in the buzzer check screen.
The NT20 will enter the I/O CHECK MENU.
Note
Checking the LED
Though memory switch setting for the buzzer has been made for OFF, the
buzzer will sound when the buzzer check is executed.
Check the LED by using the menu operation from the System Menu as
described below.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
Select “I/O Check”.
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
120
Section 3-9
System Maintenance
[ I/O CHECK MENU ]
Quit
LCD Display
LED Check
Comm. Check
Buzzer
Touch Switch
Data Memory
Select “LED Check”.
The “RUN” LED on the front face of the NT20 will flash. Flashing cycle is about
1 s (500 ms ON and 500 ms OFF).
• To quit the LED check, press the “EXIT” touch switch. The NT20 will enter
the I/O CHECK MENU.
Checking the Screen Memory
Check the screen memory by using the menu operation from the System
Menu as described below.
Note
When the screen data memory is checked, the memory is initialized and all
the screen data is lost. Check that the screen data has been backed up using
the Support Tool before executing a screen data memory check.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
Select “I/O Check”.
121
Section 3-9
System Maintenance
[ I/O CHECK MENU ]
Quit
LCD Display
LED Check
Comm. Check
Buzzer
Touch Switch
Data Memory
[ SCREEN DATA MEMORY CHECK ]
Caution!!
This test will destroy
the Screen Data.
CANCEL
Select “Data Memory”.
Press “TEST START”.
Pressing “Cancel” will
cancel the memory
check.
TEST
START
The screen memory check will start.
While the screen memory is checked, the “Memory checking...” message will
be displayed.
• If the memory check has been normally completed, the “Memory is OK”
message will be displayed.
• To quit the memory check, press the “Cancel” touch switch. The NT20 will
enter the I/O CHECK MENU.
• If the “Memory error!” message is displayed, the screen data memory
may have been used up to its service life or there may be a hardware
fault. In that case, initialize the screen data memory and check the memory again. If the same error message is displayed again, consult the
OMRON Service Center.
3-9-2
Checking the PT Setting
Display the NT20 settings by using the menu operation from the System Menu
as described below.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
122
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
Section 3-9
System Maintenance
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
(Host link)
(NT Link (1:1))
[ PT SETTING ]
[ PT SETTING ]
PT Control Area
PT Notify Area
Comm. Type
Baud Rate
Select “PT Setting”.
DM0000
DM0010
Host Link
9600bps
PT Control Area
PT Notify Area
Comm. Type
DM0000
DM0010
NT Link
EXIT
EXIT
(NT Link (1:N))
[ PT SETTING ]
PT Control Area
PT Notify Area
Comm. Type
Unit No.
DM0000
DM0010
NT Link 1:N
7
EXIT
(C200H)
(RS-232C) (NT20-ST128)
[ PT SETTING ]
PT Control Area
PT Notify Area
Comm. Type
Unit No.
EXIT
DM0000
DM0010
C200H
0
[ PT SETTING ]
Data Bits
Stop Bits
Parity Check
Flow Control
Baud Rate
EXIT
8 bits
1 bit
Even
RS/CS
19200 bps
• The current PT settings will be displayed.
• Pressing the “EXIT” touch switch will exit the PT settings display, and the
NT20 will return to the RUN Mode.
123
Section 3-9
System Maintenance
3-9-3
Checking the NT20 DIP Switch Settings
Display the NT20 DIP switch settings by using the menu operation from the
System Menu as described below.
[ SYSTEM MENU ]
Quit
Transmit Mode
Maintenance Mode
Select “Maintenance Mode”.
[ MAINTENANCE MENU ]
Quit
DIP-SW Status
PT Setting
I/O Check
Init. Memory
Memory Switch
Select “DIP-SW Status”.
(1/2)
[ DIP-SWITCH STATUS ]
1. Forced Init.
No
2. Lanugage Select Enable Page
3. Mode Change
Enable
1
2
3
4
5
6
[SW2]
ON
OFF
EXIT
(2/2)
[ DIP-SWITCH STATUS ]
4. Reserved
OFF
5. Resouce Init.
Disable Page
6. System Init.
Disable
1
[SW2]
2
3
4
5
6
ON
OFF
EXIT
• The NT20 DIP switch status is displayed.
• Pressing the EXIT touch switch clears the DIP switch status display from
the screen and causes the NT20 to enter the RUN mode.
124
Section 3-9
System Maintenance
Note
If the DIP switch settings have been changed when the NT20 is powered,
reset the power to the NT20. The changes with the DIP switches become
effective only after the power supply is reset.
125
Section 3-10
Transferring the System Program
3-10 Transferring the System Program
The system program of the NT20 can be changed by the System Transfer
Tool.
The system transfer tool is automatically installed in the personal computer
when the NT20 support tool is installed.
For details on how to start up the System Transfer Tool, and the system transfer tool operation, refer to the NT-series Support Tool Operation Manual
([email protected]).
Note
An NT20 which has no system program registered in it will be able to execute
only the installation function.
For details on System Transfer Tool operations, refer to the NT-series Support
Tool Operation Manual ([email protected]).
Transferring the System
Program from the System
Transfer Tool
Reference
Operation
In order to transfer the system program from the System Transfer Tool, first
connect the NT20 to a personal computer running the System Transfer Tool
using the appropriate cable, then proceed as follows.
The NT20 uses the same connector (Port A) for connection to the Support
Tool and connection to the host. If this connector is currently connected to the
host, disconnect the cable from the host and connect it to the Support Tool
(personal computer) before attempting to transfer the system program.
1. Connect the NT20 to the personal computer running the System Transfer
Tool, then turn ON the power to the NT20.
2. Turn ON the power to the personal computer and start up the System
Transfer Tool.
3. When the power to the NT20 is turned ON, the screen shown below will be
displayed.
[System Installer V1.00]
-Download System ProgramReady for downloading.
Yes
4. Press the Yes button to enter the system transfer mode, as shown below.
[System Installer V1.00]
-Download System ProgramDownloading…
Abort
5. The NT20 is now on standby for reception. Start transfer of the program by
using the System Transfer Tool.
When the NT20 starts reception, the screen shown below will be displayed.
126
Section 3-10
Transferring the System Program
[System Installer V1.00]
-Download System ProgramDownloading…
Abort
6. When transfer of the system program has been completed, the NT20 will
display the screen shown below.
[System Installer V1.00]
-Download System ProgramDownloading is completed
Run System
7. Press the Run system Button when using the system transfer tool to return to run mode.
Points to Observe during
Transfer of the System
Program
If any of the following events or a system error occurs during transfer of the
system program, the program will not be installed in the NT20 correctly.
• The power to the NT20 is turned OFF, or the NT20 is reset during transfer.
• The power to the personal computer that is running the System Transfer
Tool is turned OFF, or the personal computer is reset, during transfer.
• The cable connecting the personal computer running the System Transfer
Tool and the NT20 becomes disconnected or sustains a wire breakage
during transfer.
• Transfer is terminated by pressing the Abort Button on the NT20.
• Transfer is terminated by pressing the ESC key of the personal computer
running the System Transfer Tool.
In the event of any of the above, there is a possibility that the NT20 will not
operate or that unpredictable malfunctions will occur.
To prevent this, turn ON DIP switch SW2-6 to erase the system program after
the problem has occurred. For details on erasing the system program with the
DIP switch, refer to Method for Erasing the System Program (page 127).
Method for Erasing the
System Program
In order to erase the system program, the system program area must be
cleared.
If a system program already exists, it must be erased before the new one can
be transferred.
Use the following procedure to erase the system program.
Operation
1. Set DIP SW2-6 to the ON position and turn ON the power or reset. The following screen will be displayed.
127
Section 3-10
Transferring the System Program
[System Installer
aller V1.00]
Exit
-Download System ProgramErase system program.
Are you sure?
Yes
2. Press the Exit key if you want to quit without erasing the program. If you do
want to erase the program, press Yes Button. This will start erasure of the
program.
During erasure, the screen shown below will be displayed:
[System Installer V1.00]
-Download System ProgramErasing…
3. On completion of erasure, the screen shown below will be displayed. At
this point, set DIP SW2-6 to the OFF position and reset the NT20.
[System Installer
aller V1.00]
-Download System ProgramErasing is completed.
Set DIP-SW2-6 to OFF, and
Power OFF/ON.
128
Section 3-11
Transferring the Resource Data
3-11 Transferring the Resource Data
The resource data of the NT20 can be changed using the System Transfer
Tool.
The System Transfer Tool is automatically installed in the personal computer
when the NT20 Support Tool is installed.
For details on how to start up the System Transfer Tool, and the System
Transfer Tool operation, refer to the NT-series Support Tool Operation Manual
([email protected]).
Note
An NT20 which has no resource data registered in it will display a resource
error screen.
For details on System Transfer Tool operations, refer to the NT-series Support
Tool Operation Manual ([email protected]).
Transferring the Resource
Data from the System
Transfer Tool
Reference
Operation
In order to transfer the resource data from the System Transfer Tool, first connect the NT20 to a personal computer running the System Transfer Tool using
the appropriate cable, then proceed as follows.
The NT20 uses the same connector (Port A) for connection to the Support
Tool and connection to the host. If this connector is currently connected to the
host, disconnect the cable from the host and connect it to the Support Tool
(personal computer) before attempting to transfer the resource data.
1. Connect the NT20 to the personal computer running the System Transfer
Tool, then turn ON the power to the NT20.
2. Turn ON the power to the personal computer and start up the System
Transfer Tool.
3. When the power to the NT20 is turned ON, the screen shown below will be
displayed.
[
Resource Transmit
]
Erase resource
Download resource
4. Press the Download resource Button to enter the resource transfer mode,
as shown below.
[
Download Resource
]
ABORT
5. The NT20 is now on standby for reception. Start transfer of the program
using the System Transfer Tool.
129
Section 3-11
Transferring the Resource Data
When the NT20 starts reception, the screen shown below will be displayed.
[
Download Resource
]
Downloading
0KB
ABORT
6. When transfer of the system program has completed, the NT20 will be displays the screen shown below.
Downloading is completed.
Turn OFF the DIP Switch 2-5
And push the Reset Switch.
Then return to RUN mode.
Points to Observe during
Transfer of the Resource
Data
If any of the following events or a system error occurs during transfer of the
resource data, the program will not be installed in the NT20 correctly.
• The power to the NT20 is turned OFF or the NT20 is reset during transfer.
• The power to the personal computer that is running the System Transfer
Tool is turned OFF or the personal computer is reset during transfer.
• The cable connecting the personal computer running the System Transfer
Tool and the NT20 becomes disconnected or sustains a wire breakage
during transfer.
• Transfer is terminated by pressing the ABORT Button on the NT20.
• Transfer is terminated by pressing the ESC key of the personal computer
running the System Transfer Tool.
In the event of any of the above, a resource error will occur.
To prevent this, turn ON DIP switch SW2-5 to erase the resource data after
the problem has occurred. For details on erasing the resource data with the
DIP switch, refer to Method for Erasing the Resource Data.
Method for Erasing the
Resource Data
In order to erase the resource data, the resource data area must be cleared. If
resource data already exists, it must be erased before the new data can be
transferred.
Use the following procedure to erase the resource data.
Operation
130
1. Set DIP SW2-5 to the ON position and turn ON the power or reset. The following screen will be displayed.
Section 3-11
Transferring the Resource Data
[
Resource Transmit
]
Erase resource
Download resource
2. If you do want to erase the resource data, press the Erase resource Button. The following screen will be displayed.
Erase resource?
Yes
No
3. Press the No Button if you want to quit without erasing the resource data.
If you do want to erase the resource data, press the Yes Button. This will
start erasure of the resource data.
During erasure, the screen shown below is displayed:
Erase resource?
Yes
Erasing
No
4. On completion of erasure, the screen shown below will be displayed.
[
Resource Transmit
]
Erase resource
Download resource
131
Transferring the Resource Data
132
Section 3-11
SECTION 4
NT20 Functions and Operation
This section describes the functions of the NT20.
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
Screen Creation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
134
Outline of Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
136
4-2-1
NT20 Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
136
4-2-2
Characters and Figures Which Can Be Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
137
4-2-3
Communications with the Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
138
Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
140
4-3-1
Classification of Screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
140
4-3-2
Screen Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
142
Memory Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
144
4-4-1
Character-String Memory Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
144
4-4-2
Numeral Memory Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
145
Bar Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
147
4-5-1
147
Bar Graph Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
150
4-6-1
Lamp Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
150
Touch Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
152
4-7-1
Functions of Touch Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
153
4-7-2
Screen Switching Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
154
4-7-3
System Key Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
154
Numeral Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
156
4-8-1
The Numeral Setting Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
156
4-8-2
Types of Numeral Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
157
4-8-3
Creating Numeric Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
158
4-8-4
Using Numeric Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
160
4-8-5
Using The Thumbwheel Type of Numeral Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
161
4-8-6
Settings for Numeral Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
162
133
Section 4-1
Screen Creation Procedure
4-1
Screen Creation Procedure
Follow the procedure shown below to create screens for the NT20.
The following gives the procedure assuming that the setting for the PT has
been completed. The operating procedure for the Support Tool is not given
here. For the operating procedure for the Support Tool, refer to the NT-series
Support Tool Version 4.8 for Windows Operation Manual (Cat. No. [email protected]).
Creating a New Screen
Correcting an Existing File
Importing DOS Version Data
Tool Setting (PT model)
File Designation
File Designation
Set the PT model as follows:
NT20: Set NT20.
NT20S: Set NT20S.
Designate a work file.
Designate the work file to be data converted.
System Setting (Memory Switch Setting)
Set the memory switches that
determine the basic operation of the
PT. The numeral/character string/bit
memory table entry settings should
also be made at this stage.
Setting for PT Status Control/Notify Area
Allocate words for the PT status control area
and PT status notify area, necessary for the
direct connection function, in the host.
For details, refer to 5-1-3 NT20 Status
Control and Notification to PLC.
134
Section 4-1
Screen Creation Procedure
Creating and Correcting a Screen
After designating a screen, set the screen properties and
register elements for the screen or correct the screen. If
necessary, create marks, image data, and library data,
and set the initial values of memory table entries. For
details of screens and elements, refer to SECTION 4
NT20 Functions.
Saving a File
Save the created screen data to a file.
Transmitting the Screen Data
Transmit the created screen data to the PT. After
setting the PT in the Transmit mode, execute the
screen data transmission operation with the
Support Tool.
Support Tool
!Caution Carefully check the operation of all screen data and host programs before
using them. Otherwise the system may operate unpredictably.
135
Section 4-2
Outline of Functions
4-2
4-2-1
Outline of Functions
NT20 Screen
This section gives the outline of the screen which is the basis of all NT20 functions.
For specific operation procedure such as screen switching, refer to 5-1-4
Switching the Screen Display (page 172).
Composition of the Screen
The NT20 screen is composed of horizontal 256 dots x vertical 128 dots.
Each dot is set by the combination of the X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) coordinates. The origin of coordinates (0, 0) is set at the top left corner of the
screen.
0
X coordinate (horizontal)
255
0
Y coordinate
(vertical)
127
Screen Management
Coordinates
(x, y)
255, 127
The screens displayed on the NT20 are managed by the screen numbers.
When using the NT20, up to 495 screens can be created and screen numbers
in the ranges 1 to 250 and 256 to 500 can be used (numbers 251 to 255 are
reserved for system use).
The display screens can be switched or the start-up screen can be set by designating the screen number from the Host.
Special Screen Number
136
Screen number “0” is reserved for the system as the no-display screen. Select
this to display nothing on the NT20 screen.
Section 4-2
Outline of Functions
4-2-2
Characters and Figures Which Can Be Displayed
The NT20 screen can display characters, figures, and other various elements.
This section describes the types and attributes of the characters and figures
which can be displayed and do not need to be changed at all.
For the settings, display, and use of the characters, numeric values, and
graphs which change according to the system operation status and other conditions, refer to 4-4 Memory Tables (page 144).
The power of expression of the screen can be increased by giving various
attributes such as the enlarged or reverse display to the characters and figures.
The character and figure attributes can be set in the edit screen when creating
the screen data by using the Support Tool.
When using the NT20-ST128 (RS-232C), character strings can also be displayed according to commands from the host, independently of the currently
displayed screen (this is the “terminal function”).
Types and Attributes of Characters and Figures
The following types of characters can be input by using the Support Tool and
be displayed during operation.
Character
Type
Dots
(vertical x
horizontal)
Character Set
Maximum Number of
Characters Displayed in One
Screen (without overwriting)
Half height
characters
8x8
Alphanumerics and
symbols
32 characters x 16 lines
(512 characters)
Normal
characters
16 x 8
Alphanumerics and
symbols
32 characters x 8 lines
(256 characters)
16 x 16
GB2312
16 characters x 8 lines
(128 characters)
16 x 16
Create by using the
Support Tool
Marks
• Marks
A mark is a graphic pattern created by combining 16 x 16 dots by using the
Support Tool. Marks can be handled the same as the wide size characters.
Up to 64 patterns can be defined within the total screen data using character code FF20 to FF5F.
• Enlarged Display of Characters and Marks
The characters and marks can be enlarged to the following scales.
Note
PT
PT
PT
PT
PT
PT
x1 scale
Double
width scale
Double
height scale
x4 scale
x9 scale
x16 scale
Smoothing
The characters and marks enlarged to the x4 scale or larger are displayed
with the outline automatically smoothed. This function is called “smoothing”.
137
Section 4-2
Outline of Functions
• Reverse and Flashing Display
Reverse display:
The display brightness of the character and
the background is reversed comparing with
the normal display.
Flashing display:
Characters are displayed as they flash. The
normal display alternates with no-display.
Reverse and flashing display: The reverse display alternates with the normal display.
Types and Attributes of the Figures
The following types of figures can be input by using the Support Tool and be
displayed during operation. Continuous straight lines including up to 256 vertices can be drawn (up to 255 straight lines can be connected).
Continuous straight lines
4-2-3
Circle
Communications with the Host
Communications Using Host Link/NT Link/C200H Direct Communications
The NT20 can communicate with the PLC through the host link/NT link. Bits
and words are allocated to areas of the PLC memory (selectable without
restriction) and the NT20 can write data to them or read from them directly.
This makes the following functions possible:
• Control/Notification of display elements
• Control/Notification of the NT20 status
• Screen switching
• Ascertaining the number of the screen currently displayed
• Memory table operations
For details on actual operations, refer to SECTION 5 How to Use the Host
Link/NT Link.
Communications through
RS-232C
The NT20-ST128 can communicate with the host through the RS-232C interface. In other words, it can receive and send commands through the RS-232C
interface, which allows various types of host to utilize the functions of the
NT20:
• Control/notification of display elements
• Control/notification of the NT20 status
• Memory table operations
• Screen operation
• Display/deletion of characters/graphics
For details on actual operations, refer to SECTION 6 Using RS-232C Communications.
Controllable NT20 Functions
The following NT20 status can be controlled:
• Screen switching: Screen is displayed or cleared.
• Continuous/intermittent buzzer: Buzzer operation is started or stopped.
• Back light mode: Back light is lit or made to flash.
For details on how these NT20 functions are actually controlled, refer to 5-4
NT20 Status Control on page 203, and Buzzer Control on page 228.
138
Section 4-2
Outline of Functions
Ascertainable Operating Status of the NT20
The following operating status of the NT20 can be ascertained:
• NT20 operating/stopped status: Whether the NT20 is active or inactive
• Screen number: Number of the screen currently displayed
• Numeral setting input: Whether or not numerical values have been input
by numeral setting
For details on how these NT20 operating status is actually detected, refer to
5-5 Notification of the Operating Status to the PLC (Determining the NT20
Operating Status) on page 208, Screen Number Response on page 217, and
Eight-digit Number Input Notify on page 225.
!Caution To ensure system safety, be sure to periodically read the PT operating status
bit from the host in order to ensure that the PT is always operating normally.
139
Section 4-3
Screen Display
4-3
Screen Display
This section describes the screen information required for the operation with
the NT20.
For details on how to change the displayed screen, refer to 5-1-4 Switching
the Screen Display on page 172, and Display Specified Screen on page 216.
For the methods used to ascertain the screen number of the screen currently
displayed, refer to 5-1-5 Notifying the PLC of the Display Screen (to Display
the Number of Currently Displayed Screen) on page 174, and Request
Screen Number on page 216.
4-3-1
Classification of Screens
The NT20 is provided with the following types of screens which are classified
by the display method.
• Normal screen
• Overlapping screen
• Continuous screen
The screen type is set with each screen in the “Screen List” screen of the
Support Tool. Select a screen type according to the purpose, and create characters and figures on the screen.
Normal Screen
A normal screen is the basic screen of the NT20. It is not necessary to select
a screen type (overlapping or consecutive) when to create the screen data on
a normal screen.
When a normal screen is selected, existing screens will be erased and a normal screen will be displayed.
Overlapping Screen
Several normal screens can be overlapped and displayed as one screen. A
group of overlapped screens is called an “overlapping screen”.
Several normal screens are displayed in the order of screen numbers which
have been designated to each screen and form an overlapping screen. Up to
eight screens can be overlapped to form one overlapping screen. The base
screen used for making an overlapping screen is called a “parent screen”, and
a bunch of screens which are laid over the parent screen are called “child
screens”.
All display elements can be used on a parent screen.
The screen attributes such as a buzzer attribute set in the parent screen
become effective in an overlapping screen.
Example Overlapping Screens
Screen #10
(1)
Screen #8
This is an
overlapping
screen.
This is an
Screen #7
(2)
overlapping
Screen #25
(3)
screen.
• Parent screen: #8
• Child screens: #10, #7, and #25
140
Section 4-3
Screen Display
When screen #8 is designated, screen #8 becomes the parent screen and
the child screens #10, #7, and #25 are displayed over the parent screen in
that order.
Only one numeral setting screen which allows numeric values to be set on the
NT20 screen can be registered as a child screen. For the numeral setting,
refer to 4-8 Numeral Setting (page 156).
Make sure that the touch switches and numbers set in the normal screens do
not overlap in an overlapping screen. If the set positions of the touch switches
and/or numbers in the normal screens overlap with each other, such settings
may sometimes not be effective as intended. Use the Support Tool and make
sure that the set positions do not overlap with each other.
Continuous Screens
A group of normal screens which are related in series and can be switched
consecutively is called the “continuous screens”. Up to eight screens can be
registered to one screen as a group of continuous screens.
The base screen used for registering the continuous screens is called a “parent screen”, and the registered continuous screens are called “child screens”.
The current screen number and the total number of continuous screens can
be displayed in the top right corner of the screen. This is called the “page
number display”.
The page number is set when creating the screen data by using the Support
Tool. Refer to the “NT-series Support Tool for Windows Operation Manual”
(Cat. No. [email protected]).
All display elements except “numeral setting” can be used in the continuous
screens.
The screen attributes set in the parent screen become effective in the continuous screens.
Example Continuous Screens
1/3
Continuous
screen (1)
Screen #20
touch switch
touch switch
2/3
Continuous
screen (2)
touch switch
Screen #15
touch switch
3/3
Continuous
screen (3)
Screen #5
• Parent screen: #10
• Child screens: #20, #15, and #5
When screen #10 (continuous screen) is designated, screen #20 which is
page 1 of the continuous screens will be displayed. Screen #15 or #5 can
be displayed by using the touch switches. Since screen #10 has been set
for the continuous screens, that screen cannot be displayed as an individual screen.
Switching Continuous Screens Using Touch Switches
Continuous screens can be switched by using the
which have the system key functions.
and
touch switches
When creating the screen, create touch switches and to which the system key functions are allocated. (Refer to 4-7-3 System Key Functions on
page 154.)
141
Section 4-3
Screen Display
1/3
Production Status
➡
4-3-2
➡
Line A: Normal
Line B: Normal
Screen Attributes
Each screen can be set with a specific function by designating a screen
attribute, so that the specific function can be executed by displaying the
screen. For example, by displaying a screen to which a “buzzer attribute” has
been set, the buzzer of the NT20 starts sounding.
Set the screen attributes for each screen on the “screen selection” screen of
the Support Tool.
Note that the Support Tool displays some items that are not used with the
NT20.
The following several attributes can be set with one screen.
Buzzer Attribute
This attribute will become effective to sound the buzzer in the NT20 when the
screen to which this attribute has been set is displayed. The buzzer sound can
be set as follows:
No:
Buzzer does not sound when the screen is displayed.
Continuous sound: Buzzer sounds continuously.
Intermittent sound: Buzzer sounds intermittently at constant intervals.
The buzzer sound is set with the NT20 memory switch. The buzzer can also
be set by using the Host. Refer to 3-8-2 Using the Buzzer on page 107 for the
buzzer setting using the memory switch.
To stop the buzzer by using the screen operation, create a system key as a
touch switch.
Numeral Setting Attribute
Select whether the numeric keys are automatically displayed or the numeric
keys are created at arbitrary positions on the numeral setting screen. The following two numeral setting attributes are used.
System: The numeric keys registered to the system are automatically
displayed.
User:
The numeric keys can be created at any arbitrary positions.
Note
If the numeral setting attribute on the NT20 has been set for “system”, the
touch switches [ENT], and which are allocated to the system besides the
numeric keys need to be created. (Refer to 4-7-3 System Key Functions on
page 154.)
Bit Input Attributes (NT20ST128 Only)
Select whether the host is notified of the touch switch number or bit information when the touch switch is pressed. There are two types of bit input
attribute in the screen attributes, as described below:
• Off:
142
Bit control when a touch switch is pressed is invalid. Notification of the status of the touch switch is provided using its number.
Section 4-3
Screen Display
• Touch SW:Bit control when a touch switch is pressed is valid. Notification
of the status of the touch switch is provided using bit information.
Backlight Attributes
Select whether the backlight is lit or flashes when the screen is displayed.
There are two types of backlight attribute in the screen attributes, as indicated
below:
• Lit: Backlight is lit when the screen is displayed.
• Flashing: Backlight flashes when the screen is displayed.
143
Section 4-4
Memory Tables
4-4
Memory Tables
The NT20 has the “character-string memory table” for the character data and
the “numeral memory table” for numeric data which can be written and
updated by the PLC/Host.
The contents of the memory table entries can be set by using the Support
Tool when displaying the memory table entries on the screen or by editing the
table.
4-4-1
Character-String Memory Table
The character-string memory table is an NT20 internal memory used to store
the character data. Up to 128 character-string memory table entries can be
used, and up to 16 full size characters (32 bytes) can be stored in one memory table entry. The character-string memory table entries at up to 32 positions can be registered in one screen.
Displaying a Character String
The character-string memory table entries are registered with table entry
numbers 0 to 127.
When creating the screen data by using the Support Tool, set the position on
the screen to display a character string and also set a character string number
to be displayed.
When the NT20 is operated, the screen displays the contents of the character-string memory table.
When using a direct connection, it is possible to display the contents of character-string memory table entries by specifying their numbers with numeral
memory table entries (indirect specification), rather than directly changing the
character-string memory table contents.
For details on how to change currently displayed character strings, refer to 52-2 Changing Displayed Numerals or Character Strings (Changing the Contents of Allocated Words ... Direct Specification) on page 182, and Write
Character-string Memory Table on page 218.
When using the NT20-ST128 (RS-232C), character strings can be also displayed according to commands from the host, independently of the currently
displayed screen (terminals Function). Refer to Specify Displayed Characters
on page 232.
Characters and Figures Which Can Be Displayed
The power of expression of the screen can be increased by giving various
attributes such as the enlarged or reverse display to the characters of the
character-string memory table.
The character attributes can be set in the edit screen when creating the
screen data by using the Support Tool.
The following types of characters can be displayed on the NT20:
Character
Type
Half size
characters
144
Dots
(vertical x
horizontal)
8x8
Character Set
Alphanumerics and
symbols
Maximum Number of
Characters Displayed in One
Screen (without overwriting)
32 characters x 16 lines
(512 characters)
Section 4-4
Memory Tables
Normal size
characters
8 x 16
16 x 16
Marks
16 x 16
Alphanumerics and
symbols
GB2312
32 characters x 8 lines
(256 characters)
16 characters x 8 lines
(128 characters)
Create by using the
Support Tool
• Enlarged Display of Characters and Marks
The characters and marks can be enlarged to the following scales.
Double width scale, Double height scale, x4 scale, x9 scale, x16 scale
• Smoothing
The characters and marks enlarged to the x4 scale or larger are displayed
with the outline automatically smoothed. This function is called “smoothing”.
• Reverse and Flashing Display
Reverse display:
The display brightness of the character and
the background is reversed comparing with
the normal display.
Flashing display:
Characters are displayed as they flash. The
normal display alternates with no-display.
Reverse and flashing display: The reverse display alternates with the normal display.
4-4-2
Numeral Memory Table
The numeral memory table is an NT20 internal memory used to store the
numeral data. Up to 128 numeral memory table entries can be used, and up
to eight digits (four bytes) of numeral data (including signs) can be stored in
one numeral memory table entry. The numeral memory table entries at up to
50 positions can be registered in one screen.
Displaying a Numeral
The numeral memory table entries are registered with table entry numbers 0
to 127.
When creating the screen data by using the Support Tool, set the position on
the screen to display a numeral and also set a numeral number to be displayed.
When the NT20 is operated, the screen displays the contents of the numeral
memory table.
➡ For details on how to change the currently displayed numeric data, refer to
5-2-2 Changing Displayed Numerals or Character Strings (Changing the
Contents of Allocated Words ... Direct Specification) on page 182, and
Four-digit Write Numeral Memory Table on page 219.
Numerals Which Can Be Displayed
The power of expression of the screen can be increased by giving various
attributes such as the enlarged or reverse display to the numerals of the
numeral memory table.
The numeral attributes can be set in the edit screen when creating the screen
data by using the Support Tool.
• Digits of the whole numbers: 1 to 8 digits
• Digits of the decimal fraction: 0 to 7 digits
• Character sizes:
Half, normal
• Enlarged display:
Double width, double height, x4, x9, x16
145
Section 4-4
Memory Tables
The characters enlarged to the x4 scale or
larger are displayed with the outline automatically smoothed. This function is called
“smoothing”.
• Display attribute:
Normal, reverse, flashing, reverse and
flashing
• Sign display setting
• Decimal/hexadecimal display setting
• Zero suppress setting
To display one numeral memory table entry on several different screens simultaneously, the display attributes on such screens must be the same. If there
are discrepancies among the display attributes, the numeral table entry may
not be displayed correctly.
Note
Zero Suppress Setting
The numeral data are displayed in designated display areas as right-aligned.
If the number of digits of a numeral data is smaller than that of the display
area, number “0”s will be displayed at the vacant digits. These “0”s will not be
displayed if the zero suppress setting is made for “Yes”.
146
Section 4-5
Bar Graphs
4-5
Bar Graphs
The contents of the numeral memory table entries of the NT20 can be displayed as bar graphs as well as numeral data.
This section describes the bar graphs which can be displayed.
In order to change the data displayed in a bar graph, the contents of its
numeral memory table entries have to be changed.
For details on how to update the data of a currently displayed bar graph, refer
to 5-2-5 Upgrading Bar Graphs (Changing the Contents of Allocated Words)
on page 189, and Four-digit Write Numeral Memory Table on page 219.
4-5-1
Bar Graph Functions
The bar graph function displays a value in a bar graph form as a percentage
to the specified value according to the contents of a numeral memory table
entry. Up to 50 bar graphs can be registered in one screen.
• Reference Table Entries
The numeral memory table entries used as the reference for the bar graph
display can be set.
The Support Tool has the “direct” and “indirect” options for the reference
method of the numeral memory table. However, the NT20 recognizes the
“direct” method only.
The bar graph display cannot use hexadecimal numbers. If hexadecimal
numbers are set in the reference numeral memory table entries, the bar
graph cannot be displayed. Use caution not to write hexadecimal numbers
except the minus sign “F” to the reference numeral memory table entries.
Bar Graph Attributes
The following attributes can be set with the NT20 for the bar graph display:
• Position and Size
The display position and size (length) of a bar graph can be set.
The width of the bar graph can be set in the range of 2 to 255 dots.
• Orientation and Incremental Direction
The orientation and incremental direction of the bar graph can be selected
from those described below.
↑ (up): The bar graph increments upward in the vertical orientation.
↓ (down): The bar graph increments downward in the vertical orientation.
← (left): The bar graph increments to the left in the horizontal orientation.
→ (right): The bar graph increments to the right in the horizontal orientation.
Direction: →
Direction: ↑
• Graph Frame
Select whether or not the graph frame (boundary line of a graph display
area) which indicates the effective display range is displayed.
← This frame is not displayed if
"Graph frame: No" has been set.
• Setting the 100 % Value and % Display
147
Section 4-5
Bar Graphs
Set a value which corresponds to 100 % for the “100 % value”. The available value range is “0 to 99999999” (eight digits max.). For the “% display”,
whether or not the proportion (percentage) of the reference numeral memory table value to the “100 % value” is displayed in a numeral can be selected. The display value is calculated as follows:
“% display” value = Numeral memory table value ÷ “100 % value” x 100
For the font and attributes used for the numeral display, refer to Numerals
Which Can Be Displayed on page 145.
• Sign Display and Display Method
Select whether or not the bar graph which indicates a value below 0 % is
displayed.
To Display Values Below 0 %: Sign Display “Yes”
The bar graph is displayed in the range of –100% to 100%. The middle of the
bar graph indicates 0%.
% display
−60 %
−100 %
0%
100 %
To Not Display Values Below 0 %: Sign Display “No”
The bar graph is displayed in the range of 0% to 100%. The end of the bar
graph indicates 0%. Values below 0% are indicated as 0%.
% display
60 %
0%
100 %
• Differences in the Bar Graph Display Method According to the % Values
The bar graph display method varies according to the % value range.
1. When the % value is in the minus range
The display varies as follows according to the sign display setting:
Sign display “No”: Displayed as 0%.
Sign display “Yes”: Displayed in the minus range.
2. When the absolute value of the % value is in the range of 100% to 999%
The % value is displayed as it is.
Sign display “No”: The display will be as shown below according to the
graph frame setting.
When the frame is displayed:
% display
999 %
↔
0%
148
100 %
Graph width: 8 dots
Section 4-5
Bar Graphs
When the frame is not displayed:
% display
1-dot-wide space
999 %
↔
0%
Graph width: 8 dots
100 %
Sign display “Yes”: A value below –100% will be displayed in the minus direction as shown above.
3. When the absolute value of the % value is above 1000%
The bar graph will be displayed the same as (2) above.
The % value is displayed as follows according to the sign display setting:
Sign display “No”:*** %
Sign display “Yes”:**** %
149
Section 4-6
Lamps
4-6
Lamps
The NT20 has the “lamp” function used to simply display the PLC bit status.
This section describes the lamps which can be displayed.
The lamp display status (lit (flashing) or unlit) can be changed by instructions
from the PLC/host.
For details on how to change the status of a currently displayed lamp, refer to
5-3-2 Turning ON (Lit) and OFF (Unlit) the Lamps (Changing the Contents of
Allocated Bits) on page 192, Lamp and Touch Switch Display (Bit Specification) on page 223, and Lamp and Touch Switch Display (Number Specification) on page 223.
4-6-1
Lamp Functions
The lamps are the graphic areas whose method of display can be changed by
using the PLC. Available display methods are “lit”, “unlit”, and “flash“. Up to
128 lamps can be registered in one screen.
The display status (lit, unlit, and flashing) which are registered when creating
the screen data can be switched according to the ON/OFF of the PLC bit status.
PLC
Unlit
Lamp Attributes
Lit
The following attributes can be set with the lamp. Use the Support Tool to set
the lamp attributes.
• Shape
Select from the square and circle shapes. The display size can be freely
selected.
Square
Circle
• Frame
Select whether or not the boundary line (frame) of the lamp display area is
displayed. If the frame is not set, only the guide display message for the
lamp is displayed when the lamp is not lit (or flashing). If the guide display
message is not set, nothing is displayed.
• Lit and Flashing
Select whether the lamp is lit (reverse display) or flashing (reverse flashing)
when the lamp is turned ON by the PLC.
• Guide Display Message
Lamps can be displayed with the guide display messages.
The guide display message attributes are the same as that for the “character display”. Refer to Characters and Figures Which Can Be Displayed on
page 144.
• Frame and Lit/Flashing
The display method of “lit/flashing” varies according to the frame setting.
150
Section 4-6
Lamps
Frame is set: Only the area in the frame will be lit/flashing.
Frame is not set: The area including the frame will be lit/flashing.
[Frame is set]
Unlit
[Frame is not set]
Unlit
Flash
Lit
Flash
Lit
Area including the frame
flashes.
Area inside the frame
flashes.
• Controlling the Lamps in Batch
More than one lamp can be lit or flashing in batch by registering those
lamps to the same bit.
Example of Batch Lighting
Set the lamps L1 to L5 to the same bit number.
L1
L2
L3
L1
L4
L5
L2
L4
L5
L3
When a Lamp Is Overlapped with a Memory Table Display
The guide display message for a lamp is a fixed character-string. If you want
to change the lamp guide display according to some condition, overlap the
display area of a numeral memory table entry or character-string memory
table entry with the lamp. However, note that different results will be achieved
depending on the timing of the lighting of the lamp and the updating of the
memory table entry. Bear this in mind when creating the control program.
Example 1 Lighting a Lamp after Changing a Memory Table Entry
Lamp not lit
Lamp not lit
OMRON
PT
Memory table
entry changed.
Lamp
Lamp lit
PT
Lamp lit.
String memory table
display area
Text is displayed
in reverse video.
Example 2 Changing a Memory Table Enter while the Lamp Is Lit
Lamp not lit
Lamp lit
Lamp lit
OMRON
OMRON
PT
Lamp lit.
Lamp
String memory table
display area
Memory table
entry changed.
Text is displayed
in reverse video.
The memory table display
area is overwritten while
the lamp is lit.
151
Section 4-7
Touch Switches
4-7
Touch Switches
The NT20 has a function whereby input operations can be performed by using
touch panels displayed on the screen. NT20 screens can be switched, or bit
information sent to the Host, by pressing (lightly touching) the “touch
switches” in a panel.
The touch switches can also be made to light up (or flash) and go off like
lamps.
Touch switches are set when creating the screen data with the Support Tool.
This section describes the touch switches that can be displayed, and explains
the screen switching function and the system key function.
For details on how the status of the currently displayed touch switch is sent to
the Host, refer to 5-3-4 Lit (Flashing) and Unlit Touch Switch Status (Changing
the Status of Allocated Bits) on page 195, Lamp and Touch Switch Display
(Bit Specification) on page 223, and Lamp and Touch Switch Display (Number
Specification) on page 223.
For details on how the status of touch switches is ascertained by the Host,
refer to 5-3-5 Notifying the Host That a Switch Has Been Pressed (Determining Touch Switch Status) on page 196, and Lamp and Touch Switch Display
Status Enquiry on page 224.
!Caution Do not use input functions such as PT touch switches for applications where
danger to human life or serious property damage is possible or for emergency
switch applications.
!Caution Press touch switches with a force of no greater than 30 N.
!Caution Do not press touch switches carelessly while the backlight is off or while nothing is displayed on the screen. Otherwise the system may operate unpredictably.
Only press touch switches after confirming system safety.
!Caution If touch switches are pressed in rapid succession, their inputs may not be successfully received.
Confirm that the input of a touch switch has been successfully received before
moving on to the next operation.
Note
Caution on pressing touch switches at 3 points
When multiple touch switches are created at the relative positions indicated in
the example below, malfunctions may occur due to the characteristics of this
switch configuration.
Example 1: When switches are created at positions A and B and at the points
where the vertical and horizontal lines extending from these two points intersect, i.e. points C and D:
A
C
B
D
Smallest touch switch frame
152
• When switches A, B, and C are switched on at
the same time, switch D is also assumed to
have been switched on due to the configuration
of the touch switches.
• When switches A, B, and D are switched on at the
same time, switch C is also assumed to have been
switched on due to the configuration of the touch
switches.
Section 4-7
Touch Switches
4-7-1
Functions of Touch Switches
Touch switches are created using rectangular elements measuring 19 dots
horizontally by 19 dots vertically. A touch switch can comprise more than one
touch switch element. Up to 72 touch switches (12 horizontally x 6 vertically)
can be registered on one screen.
19 dots
19 dots
A touch switch can comprise more
than one touch switch element.
PLC
When the touch switch is
pressed, bit information
is sent to the PLC.
(Host link/NT link)
Host
When the touch switch is
pressed, the touch switch
number or bit information is sent
to the Host (RS-232C).
• Functions of Touch Switches
Touch switches can have the following functions:
• PLC notification function:
Host link/NT link/C200H direct communications (page 196)
RS-232C (NT20-ST128) (page 224)
• Screen switch function (page 154)
• System key function (page 154)
• Numeral setting function:
Host link/NT link/C200H direct communications (page 199)
RS-232C (NT20-ST128) (page 224)
Touch Switch Attributes
The following attributes can be set for touch switches.
• Display Frame
The area that will respond as a touch switch is displayed in the form of a
frame, as shown in the table below. One of three types of frame - standard,
3-D, and none - can be selected.
Type of Display Frame
Switch OFF
Switch ON
Standard
3-D
None
If “none” is selected, only the touch switch’s guide display message (or
nothing, if there is none) are displayed until a “light” or “flash” designation
is sent from the PLC/Host or the touch switch is pressed.
• Inverse Display on Input
It is possible to set a touch switch so that its display will be inverted when
it is pressed.
• Lighting and Flashing
153
Section 4-7
Touch Switches
It is possible to specify whether the touch switch will be lit continuously or
flash when the bit allocated to it is turned ON by the PLC/Host.
• Presence/Absence of a Guide Display
A guide display message can be displayed at a touch switch location.
4-7-2
Screen Switching Function
The NT20 has a function that allows screens to be switched by pressing touch
switches on its screen, rather than by designation from the PLC/Host. This
function is called the “standalone function”.
The screen number of the screen that will be displayed when a touch switch is
pressed is set for that touch switch when the screen data is created using the
Support Tool.
If the touch switch is pressed during operation, the screen whose number was
designated will be displayed. Simultaneously, the PLC/Host will be notified of
the screen number of the screen selected for display.
To next screen
Touch switch
pressed once
Screen #5
"Screen #5" set for touch switch 1
To set a screen number for a touch switch, use “Touch SW”, “Bit specification”
and “Screen switch” of the Support Tool.
Note
4-7-3
Only one screen number can be set for one touch switch within one screen (or
within one overlapping screen).
System Key Functions
The NT20 allows the allocation of “system key” functions to touch switches.
The system key functions can then be used during operation by pressing the
touch switches to which they have been allocated.
For example, if, when a screen for which buzzer sounding has been set is displayed, a
touch switch is also displayed, the buzzer can be stopped by
pressing this touch switch.
To set a system key function for a touch switch, use “Touch SW”, “Bit specification” and “Numeric key” of the Support Tool.
Allocation of System Key
Functions
The system key functions are allocated to touch switch numbers 227 to 230
and 255, as shown below. When a touch switch with one of these numbers is
displayed on the screen, it has the same function as the corresponding system key.
System Key
System menu display
Key Symbol
MENU
Touch Switch No.
227
228
229
154
[Buzzer stop]
230
[ENT]
255
Section 4-7
Touch Switches
➡ When a touch switch to which a system key function has been allocated is
pressed, the PLC is not notified of the touch switch bit information.
The
,
, and
keys are not displayed among the system numeric keys.
Accordingly, when using the system numeric keys, create the
keys. Alternatively, create user numeric keys.
,
, and
155
Section 4-8
Numeral Setting
4-8
Numeral Setting
The NT20 has a “numeral setting” function to enable numerical values to be
input from the screen. This function inputs numerical values to numeral memory table entries in response to touch switch operations, displays these
numerical values on the screen, and sends them to the host.
This section outlines the numeral setting function and the method for creating
the ten keys required to set numerical values on the screen, and explains how
to use ten keys during operation.
Numeral setting screens cannot be registered as child screens of continuous
screens. In the case of overlapping screens, only one of the screens can be
set as a numeral setting screen.
For details on the actual methods used to ascertain input numerical values at
the PLC, refer to 5-3-6 Notification of Numbers to the PLC on page 199, and
Four-digit Number Input Notify and Eight-digit Number Input Notify on
page 225.
Numeral settings are set during screen creation with the Support Tool.
!Caution Confirm system safety carefully before changing monitor data.
4-8-1
The Numeral Setting Function
The numeral setting function is described below.
Basic Procedure
The procedure for numeral setting is as follows.
1,2,3...
1. Input the numerical value at the touch panel.
2. The input numerical value is displayed in the numeral setting area on the
screen.
3. Confirm the input numerical value; it will be written to the numeral memory
table, and the PLC will be simultaneously notified.
Numeral setting
area
NT20
Notification
Write
1234
1234
PLC
Input
Numeral
memory table
Touch switch
Restrictions on Numerical Value Input and Attribute Setting
Numerical values of up to 8 digits (7 if there is a minus sign) can be input in
either decimal or hexadecimal format.
• Decimal Input
When the display attribute is set for decimal display, values are input in the
decimal format.
• Numerical Value Range
The range for numerical values that can be input differs according to
whether or not there is a sign display.
156
When there is no sign display:
0 to 99999999 (8 digits)
When there is a sign display:
–9999999 to +99999999
(7 digits for negative numbers,
8 digits for positive numbers)
Section 4-8
Numeral Setting
If a sign is displayed when using the thumbwheel type of numeral setting, the maximum number of digits for both positive and negative numbers is 7.
• Decimal Point
A maximum of 7 digits can be input after the decimal point (or 6 for
negative numbers).
• Hexadecimal Input
When the display attribute is set for hexadecimal display, values are input
in the hexadecimal format.
• Numerical Value Range
Numerical values can be input in the range 0 to FFFFFFFF (8 digits).
• Attributes That Can Be Set
The attributes of the numerical values displayed in the input field are the
same as for numeral displays. Refer to Numerals Which Can Be Displayed
on page 145.
Upper/Lower Limit Check
When direct connection is used with an NT20, upper and lower limits can be
set for input numerical values to prevent erroneous values that are outside the
valid range being stored in the numeral memory table or sent to the PLC.
The upper/lower limit check is executed when the input numerical value has
been confirmed: if the value is outside the valid range, the screen returns to its
status before input.
Note
4-8-2
In order to use the numerical value input setting safely, always use the upper/
lower limit check function. (This function is not supported by the NT20-ST128.
Take appropriate measures using the user application software.)
Types of Numeral Setting
There are two types of numeral setting: the numeric key type, and the thumbwheel type. The basic function of these two types is the same, but the screen
displays and input methods are different.
A maximum of 50 input fields, including both numeric key and thumbwheel
types, can be registered on one screen.
Numeric Key Type
When a numerical value is input using touch switches to which numeric key functions have been allocated, the
input numerical value is displayed on the screen. On pressing the return key after completing input, the input
numerical value is written to the numeral memory table and sent to the host.
If there is more than one numeral setting input field, the field in which the input is to be made can also be selected with the numeric keys.
In order to perform numeric key input, it is necessary not only to create a numeral setting input field on the
screen, but also to create the numeric keys to be used for input. (Refer to 4-8-4 Using Numeric Keys).
Displayed in the numeral
setting input field
NT20
Notification
Write
1234
Input
1234
Host
Numeral
memory table
On pressing the
key, the input value is written to the
numeral memory table and the PLC will be notified simultaneously.
Input the numerical value using the
numeric keys on the screen.
157
Section 4-8
Numeral Setting
Thumbwheel Type (Direct Connection Only)
When using an NT20 with a direct connection, numerical values are input
directly at the numeral setting input field using touch switches that increment
or decrement each of the digits in the display when pressed. Each time the
displayed numerical value is changed, the new displayed value is written to
the numeral memory table and the host is simultaneously notified.
This means that, when using the Thumbwheel type of numeral setting, all that
is required to input numerical values is to create the numeral setting input field
on the screen.
Pressing the [−] key
decrements the digit by one.
NT20
Notification
Write
1234
1 2 3 4
Host
Numeral
memory table
Pressing the [+] key
increments the digit by one.
4-8-3
Each time a [+] or [−] key is pressed, the input
value is written to the numeral memory table
and the host is simultaneously notified.
Creating Numeric Keys
In order to input numerical values using the numeral setting function, apart
from the display area for the numeral setting, the numeric keys must also be
created.
Setting Screen Attributes
The type of numeric keys can be selected using the numeral setting attributes
of the screen attributes. There are two numeral setting attributes: “system”
and “user”.
• Screen When “System” Is Specified
When a numeral setting area is created, numeric keys are automatically
displayed. The display position and arrangement of the numeric keys are
fixed. On this screen, only the types of numeric key shown in the figure below (system keys) are used.
Tank A Tank B Tank C
1
7
2
8
3
9
4
0
5
CLR
6
±
When using the NT20 with the numeral setting attribute set to “system”,
apart from the numeric keys provided by the system, the touch switches
allocated to system keys ( , , ) also have to be created (system key
function). To enable input of hexadecimal values, it is also necessary to
create numeric keys A through F.
With the NT20, if the numeral setting attribute is set to “system”, apart from
the numeric keys prepared by the system, the touch switches allocated to
system keys ( , , ) have to be created. (Refer to 4-7-3 System Key
Functions on page 154.)
• When the Numeral Setting Attribute Is “User”
158
Section 4-8
Numeral Setting
The display position and arrangement of the numeric keys can be set as
required by allocating them to touch switches (see page 142).
Tank A Tank B Tank C
When the numeral setting attribute is set to “user”, numeric keys are created by using the control keys of the “input key” function. In addition, by using the character keys of the “input key” function, the one-byte characters
0 to 9 and A to F can be used as numeric keys.
Note
Even when the numeral setting attribute is set to “user”, the same
numeric keys as displayed with the “system” attribute can be displayed.
If “User” is selected for “Keypad” during data creation on the numeral setting screen, the numeric keys shown below are displayed.
Tank A Tank B Tank C
1
7
Numeric Key Allocations
2
8
3
9
4
0
5
CLR
6
±
The numeric keys are allocated to touch switches.
The numeric keys allocated to touch switches are specified when the touch
switches are created. The following numeric keys (system keys) can be used
for numeral setting.
For details on how to create touch switches, refer to 4-7 Touch Switches on
page 152.
Touch
Switch
Number
Touch
Switch
Number
237
6
Touch
Switch
Number
247
CLR
228
238
7
248
±
229
239
8
249
.
230
240
9
250
HOME
227 (*)
Numeric
Key
Menu
display
Numeric
Key
Numeric
Key
231
232
0
1
241
242
A
B
251
252
↑
↓
233
234
2
3
243
244
C
D
253
254
←
→
235
4
245
E
255
236
5
246
F
(*) Numeric key number 227 is the system menu display key.
159
Section 4-8
Numeral Setting
When the touch switches allocated as numeric keys and system keys on a
numeral setting screen are pressed, no notification is made to the PLC. This
means that when using the NT20-ST128 (RS-232C), the touch switches numbered 227 to 255 cannot be used as normal touch switches on a numeral setting screen.
4-8-4
Using Numeric Keys
To input numerical data by using numeric keys, first select the numeral setting
area into which the value is to be input, then input the numerical value by
pressing the appropriate numeric keys.
Selecting the Numeral Setting Area for Data Input
Select the numeral setting area into which the numerical value is to be input
by using either the numeric keys or the system keys.
• Selection with the Numeric Keys
Use the [HOME], [→], [←], [↑] and [↓] keys. By using these keys, the cursor
can be shifted between numeral setting areas in the way shown in the figure below.
6563
→
3200
HOME
4568
↑
0000
↑
5107
←
4624
Pressing the [HOME] key will shift the cursor to the area whose top left corner has the smallest XY coordinate sum (the top left numeral setting input
field in the example above).
• Selection with the System Keys
When the and system keys on the touch panel are pressed, the cursor
moves between the numeral setting areas by following the order in which
they were created using the Support Tool.
For example, if three numeral setting areas have been created, the cursor
can be moved between them following the order of creation as follows.
key: 1st area → 2nd area → 3rd area → 1st area
key: 1st area → 3rd area → 2nd area → 1st area
If the “numeral setting” screen attribute is set to “system”, the order of cursor motion when the and system keys are used can be changed. For
details, refer to the NT Support Tool for Windows operation manual (Cat.
No. [email protected]).
Inputting Numerical Values
Input numerical values using the following numeric keys (touch switches):
numerals (0 to 9, A to F), decimal point (.), sign (+,–), clear (CLR), and return
( ).
When inputting a numerical value that includes a decimal point, input the
integer and decimal fraction separately. First input the integer, then press
the decimal point key (.) and input the decimal fraction.
160
Section 4-8
Numeral Setting
If the integer or decimal fraction exceed their respective allowable numbers
of display digits, they are shifted to the left. In the system keys, however,
the decimal point key (.) is not included. Therefore, it is necessary to create
the decimal point key (.) apart from the ten keys of the system keys to input
a numerical value including decimal fraction.
• Changing the Sign
When there is a sign display, pressing the sign (±) key changes minus to
plus or plus to minus.
• Confirming Input Numerical Values
Always press the return key as the final step when inputting a numerical
value. When the return key is pressed, the displayed numerical value is
written to the numeral memory table and at the same time the host is notified.
• Initial Operation of Input Keys
The sign key (±), decimal point key (.), and alphabet key (A to F), operate
as follows on initial use (first use after displaying the screen).
• Sign Key (±)
The display is cleared to zero (assuming decimal input with sign display).
• Decimal Point Key (.)
The display is cleared to zero, after which input starts from the decimal
fraction digits (assuming decimal input with sign display).
• Alphabet Keys (A to F)
The display is cleared to zero (assuming decimal input).
• Upper/Lower Limit Check
When the return key is pressed after inputting a numerical value, an upper/
lower limit check is executed. If the input numerical value is outside the valid range, the data in the numeral memory table before input is redisplayed
and the host is not notified.
4-8-5
Using The Thumbwheel Type of Numeral Setting
When using the thumbwheel type of numeral setting, numerical values are
input by directly touching the incrementing/decrementing (+/–) keys.
Numerical Value Input
Input numerical values by using the incrementing/decrementing (+, –) keys
provided for each digit.
• Numerical Value Specification
161
Section 4-8
Numeral Setting
When an incrementing/decrementing (+, –) key is touched, the numeral at
the corresponding digit is incremented or decremented by one. Whenever
a plus or minus key is touched, the host is notified of the changed value.
There is no need to press the return key as is the case when using the numeric key type of numeral setting.
Thumbwheel numeral setting
Numeral
memory table
1
2
3
4
1234
2
2
3
4
2234
Press
Host
Numerical value
incremented by one
Numerical values cannot be set in thumbwheel type numeral setting fields
by using numeric keys.
• Changing the Sign
In settings with a sign display, touching the incrementing/decrementing (+,
–) keys at the digit where the sign is displayed will change plus to minus
and minus to plus.
• Upper/Lower Limit Check
When using Ver.2 and later versions of the direct connection function, an
upper/lower limit check is executed when the incrementing/decrementing
(+, –) keys are pressed. If the input numerical value is outside the valid
range, the data in the numeral memory table before the key was pressed
is redisplayed and the host is not notified.
However, with thumbwheel type numeral setting, if the situation is such that
with an upper limit of 1n..n, and a lower limit of 0m..m (where n and m are
the values of each digit), n..n < m..m, it is not possible to carry digits upward or downward.
Example:
When the upper limit value is 1200 and the lower limit value is 201, if the
initial value has three digits the value can be changed within the range 201
to 999, and if the initial value has four digits it can only be changed within
the range 1000 to 1200.
This is because if an attempt is made to change the leftmost digit from 0 to
1, or from 1 to 0, an upper/lower limit value check is always performed.
In order to avoid this, either set the values so that n..n ≤ m..m, or create
another touch switch and write values to the host when digits are carried
up or down.
4-8-6
Settings for Numeral Settings
The following settings are made for numeral settings during their creation with
the Support Tool. Note that restrictions apply to several of the settings made
for thumbwheel type numeral settings.
Settings
• Referenced Numeral Memory Table Entry
Set the number of the numeral memory table entry used to record the numerical value input using the numeral setting function.
• Number of Digits in the Input Numerical Value
162
Section 4-8
Numeral Setting
Set the number of digits in the numerical values that can be input. A maximum of 8 digits (total of integer and decimal fraction parts) can be set.
However, if there is a sign display, the maximum number of digits for negative values will be seven.
• Upper/Lower Limits
Set the upper limit and lower limit separately. The maximum number of digits in the set values is eight (or seven if there is a sign display).
When the upper limit value and lower limit value are set as negative values,
set “F” as the eighth digit.
Example: Upper limit value or lower limit value is “–123” → F0000123.
• Display Attributes
Set attributes in the same way as for numeral display. For details, see Numerals Which Can Be Displayed on page 145.
Restrictions and Additional Settings for Thumbwheel Type Numeral Settings
There are the following restrictions and additional items to set when creating
thumbwheel type numeral settings.
• Number of Input Digits for Positive Values When There Is a Sign Display
When a sign display is set for a thumbwheel type numeral setting, a maximum of 7 digits can be input for positive values.
• Display Size
One of two sizes can be selected: “small” in which each digit comprises
two touch switch units, and “medium”, in which each digit comprises three
touch switch units. Note that if “small” is selected the area in which the numerical value is displayed is also the touch switch input area.
• Shape (End Plates)
Set which of the two shapes shown below will be used. One has “end
plates” at right and left sides and the other does not.
With
0
0
0
0
Without
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
• Restrictions on Display Attributes
The following restrictions apply to display attributes.
Character type:
Character enlargement:
Zero suppress:
Wide size only
Standard only,
regardless of the display size specification
No zero suppression only
Refer to Numerals Which Can Be Displayed on page 145.
163
Numeral Setting
164
Section 4-8
SECTION 5
How to Use the Host Link/NT Link
This Section describes in concrete terms how to use the Host link/NT link communications with the NT20.
5-1
5-2
Overview of Direct Connection Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1-1
Equipment and Settings Used in This Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
166
5-1-2
Allocatable Bits and Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
166
5-1-3
NT20 Status Control and Notification to PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
167
5-1-4
Switching the Screen Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
172
5-1-5
Notifying the PLC of the Display Screen
(to Display the Number of Currently Displayed Screen) . . . . . . . . .
174
Memory Tables and Bar Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
177
5-2-1
Displaying the Contents of Allocated Words of Memory Table Entries
180
5-2-2
Changing Displayed Numerals or Character Strings
(Changing the Contents of Allocated Words ... Direct Specification)
182
Changing Displayed Numerical Values or Character Strings
(Changing the Contents of Allocated Words ... Indirect Specification)
184
5-2-4
Copying Memory Table Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
186
5-2-5
Upgrading Bar Graphs (Changing the Contents of Allocated Words)
189
5-2-3
5-3
5-4
5-5
166
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
191
5-3-1
Allocation Bits and Display of Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
191
5-3-2
Turning ON (Lit) and OFF (Unlit) the Lamps
(Changing the Contents of Allocated Bits). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
192
5-3-3
Allocated Bits and Display of Touch Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
193
5-3-4
Lit (Flashing) and Unlit Touch Switch Status
(Changing the Status of Allocated Bits) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
195
5-3-5
Notifying the Host That a Switch Has Been Pressed
(Determining Touch Switch Status) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
196
5-3-6
Notification of Numbers to the PLC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
199
NT20 Status Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
203
5-4-1
Controllable NT20 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
203
5-4-2
How to Control NT20 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
205
Notification of the Operating Status to the PLC
(Determining the NT20 Operating Status) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
208
5-5-1
Ascertainable NT20 Status (Notified Operating Status) . . . . . . . . .
208
5-5-2
Reading the NT20 Operating Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
209
165
Section 5-1
Overview of Direct Connection Operations
5-1
Overview of Direct Connection Operations
This section explains allocated bits and words, control of the NT20 and PLC
notification methods, and the actual procedures used for switching screens,
thereby providing the basic information required to use the NT20-ST121-E
host link, or NT link.
5-1-1
Equipment and Settings Used in This Section
The following equipment and settings are used in the examples in this section:
Equipment PT:
NT20-ST121-E
PLC:
CQM1H
Support Tool:
NT Support Tool for Windows Ver. 4.8
Support Tool Settings
5-1-2
PT Model:
NT20
PLC Vendor:
OMRON
Allocatable Bits and Words
When the host link/NT link is used, the following bits and words are allocated
to the PLC and used for the NT20 operation. The range of respective area
varies with the type of PLC.
The allocations must be made without exceeding respective area range.
OMRON PLCs
Symbol
CS/CJ Series PLCs
Area Name
Allocated
Allocated Word
Bit
Numeral Character
String
None
H
CIO Area
HR Area
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
A
LR
AR Area
LR Area (See note 1.)
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
T
TC Area
Timer PVs
×
TU
TC Area
Timer Completion Flags
×
×
×
C
×
×
×
×
W
TC area,
Counter PVs
TC area,
Counter Completion Flags
WR
❍
❍
❍
TK
D
Task Flags
DM Area
×
❍
×
❍
×
❍
E
EM Area
Current bank
❍
❍
❍
E0_ to EC_
EM Area
EM banks 0 to C
❍
❍
❍
CU
❍: OK
166
: 1 word only ×: NG
Section 5-1
Overview of Direct Connection Operations
Symbol
C Series PLCs
Area Name
CVM1/CV Series PLCs
Allocated
Allocated Word
Bit
Numeral Character
String
Area Name
Allocated
Bit
Allocated Word
Numeral Character
String
None
H
IR Area
HR Area
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
CIO Area
---
❍
---
❍
---
❍
---
A
LR
AR Area
LR Area
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
AR Area
---
❍
---
❍
---
❍
---
T
TC Area
Timer PVs
×
TC Area
Timer PVs
---
---
---
TU
---
---
---
---
×
C
×
---
---
---
---
---
TC Area
Counter PVs
---
---
CU
TC Area
Counter PVs
---
W
TK
WR
---
×
---
×
---
×
---
-----
-----
-----
-----
D
E
DM Area
EM Area (See
note 2.)
Current bank
---
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
DM Area
EM Area
Current bank
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
❍
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
E0_ to
EC_
---
×
❍: OK
: 1 word only ×: NG
When allocating words to a memory table entry, the allocation must not
exceed the word area.
Since the AR area bits of the CV series PLCs are allocated to the system,
they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use. However, reading from them is possible.
Note
(1) LR 00000 to LR 00199 are converted to CIO 01000 to CIO 01199.
(2) The EM Area is supported only by the C200HX/HG/HE-(Z)E PLCs.
(3) A continuous areas of up to 2 words for a numeral memory table entry or
16 words for a character string memory table entry can be allocated.
5-1-3
NT20 Status Control and Notification to PLC
The following describes the fundamentals of the display elements, NT20 status control, and notification, which are the basics of the NT20 functions when
using the host link/NT link.
For the detail method of use of the PT status control area and the PT status
notify area, refer to 5-4 NT20 Status Control on page 203 and 5-5 Notification
of the Operating Status to the PLC (Determining the NT20 Operating Status)
on page 208.
Controlling the Display Elements by Using Allocated Bits and Words
The NT20 will operate as follows in the display element control operation.
NT20 Operation
1. The NT20 checks the allocation bits and words of the display elements and
makes an inquiry to the PLC.
2. The PLC answers the NT20 about the bit and word data.
167
Section 5-1
Overview of Direct Connection Operations
3. The NT20 changes the display status according to the bits and words obtained from the PLC.
NT20 Operation Example
Lamp #0 Bit 010012
PLC
NT20
Bit 010012?
TIM003?
DM0100 to DM0102?
("a", "b")
("c", "d")
("e", "f")
Character-string memory table entry 2 Numeral memory table entry 0
First word: TIM003
First word: DM0100
Number of saved words: 1
Number of saved words: 3
Controlling the NT20 Status by Using Allocated Bits and Words ..... PT Status Control Area (PLC to PT)
The PT status control area (PLC to PT) is provided to control the NT20 status
from the PLC. When data is written to this area in the PLC, the NT20 will read
the data and operates according to the data. The PT status control area is
configured as four consecutive words as shown below.
Word 15 14 13 12 11
10
9
n
n+1
n+2
n+3
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Screen # (4-digit BCD)
0
Copy type
0 Bit
Screen switch
setting
Copy source memory table entry # (3-digit BCD)
Copy destination memory table entry # (3-digit BCD)
PT status control bit
0
0
Copy memory
table setting
PT status control
The first word (word n) of the PT status control area must be set with the Support Tool.
• Screen Switch Settings (Refer to page 172.)
Specify the screen number to switch the screen displayed on the NT20.
• Copy Memory Table Settings (Refer to page 187.)
Specify the memory table entry number to copy the contents of a memory
table internally in the NT20.
Set the copy type to match the type of memory table entry to be copied:
0: Character-string memory table
1: Numeral memory table
• PT Status Control Bits (Refer to page 203.)
These bits are switched ON and OFF to control the NT20 buzzer and backlight.
168
Section 5-1
Overview of Direct Connection Operations
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Bit
0
n+3
0
0
Item Controlled
1 (ON)
0 (OFF)
Screen display (Note 1)
ON
OFF
Processing priority
registration (Note 2)
ON
OFF
Continuous buzzer
ON
OFF
Intermittent buzzer
ON
OFF
Backlight mode
ON
Flash
Note 1: When "ON" is set for screen display, the
backlight is on; when "OFF" is set for
screen display, the backlight is off.
Note 2: Priority registration is only valid when NT
link (1:N) is set.
The PT status control area (PLC to PT) can be allocated to the following PLC
areas.
Symbol
C-series
Allocation
CVM1/CV -series
None
H
IR Area
HR Area
❍
❍
CIO Area
---
A
AR Area
❍
L
LR Area
❍
T
TC Area
Timer PVs
---
×
TU
---
Allocation
CS/CJ-series
❍
---
CIO Area
HR Area
AR Area
×
AR Area
---
---
LR Area (See note 1.)
TC Area
Timer PVs
---
×
TC Area
Timer PVs
TC area,
Timer Completion Flags
TC Area
Counter PVs
---
Allocation
❍
Not for
Host Link
❍
Not for
Host Link
×
×
C
TC Area
Counter PVs
×
TC Area
Counter PVs
×
CU
---
---
---
---
TC area,
Counter Completion Flags
W
---
---
---
---
WR
TK
D
--DM Area
--❍
--DM Area
--❍
Task Flags
DM Area
E
EM Area
(See note 2.)
❍
EM Area
Current bank
E0_to EC_
---
---
---
Not for EM Area
Host Link Current bank
---
EM Area
EM bank 0 to C
×
×
Not for
Host Link
×
❍
Not for
Host Link
Not for
Host Link
❍: OK ×: NG
Since the AR area bits of the CV series PLCs are allocated to the system,
they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use.
Note
(1) LR 00000 to LR 00199 are converted to CIO 01000 to CIO 01199.
(2) The EM Area is supported only by the C200HX/HG/HE-(Z)E PLCs.
Note
Make sure there is no duplication in the PT status control area allocations and
PT status notify area allocations.
Note
When NT link (1:N) is set, the PT status control area must be set for each connected PT.
169
Section 5-1
Overview of Direct Connection Operations
Notification of the Display Elements by Using Allocated Bits and Words
The NT20 will operate as follows in the display element notification operation.
NT20 Operation
The NT20 will write any changes in the contents of the numeral or characterstring memory table entry being displayed or pressing of a touch switch to the
bits and words area in the PLC.
NT20 Operation Example
Touch switch #12
Bit 009012
PLC
NT20
Bit 009012: ON
DM0110: 0432
Numeral memory table entry 100 Numeral memory table entry 0
Number of saved words: 1
0432
First word: DM0110
Copy
Notification of the NT20 Status by Using Allocated Bits and Words ..... PT Status Notify Area (PT to
PLC)
The PT status notify area (PT to PLC) is provided to notify the PLC of NT20
status changes. When any NT20 status has changed, such change is written
to this area in the PLC, and the PLC will read the data from this area to check
the NT20 status.
The PT status notify area is configured as three consecutive words as shown
below.
Word 15 14 13 12 11
10
m
m+1
m+2
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0 Bit
Screen being displayed
Screen # (4-digit BCD)
0
Numeral memory table entry # (3-digit BCD)
PT status
0
0
Upgraded memory
table entry
PT status
The first word (word m) of the PT status notify area must be set with the Support Tool.
• Currently Displayed Screen (refer to page 175)
The screen number displayed on the NT20 is written to this word.
Simultaneously, the PT status screen switch strobe flag is set to ON (1).
After the PLC is notified, this flag reverts to OFF (0). Checking the status
of this flag will provide a simple method of checking if the NT20 display has
switched.
• Upgraded Memory Table Entry (Refer to page 200.)
The number of the numeral memory table entry is written to the word when
the numeral memory table contents change due to the touch switch operation on the NT20.
As the number of the numeral table entry is written, the PT status numeral
setting strobe flag is simultaneously set ON (1). After the PLC is notified,
this flag reverts to OFF (0). Checking the status of this flag will provide a
simple method of checking if a number has been input from the NT20.
Note that this function is not available with the character-string memory table.
• PT Status (Refer to page 208.)
The NT20 operation status and other information are written with the ON
or OFF of the bits as shown below.
170
Section 5-1
Overview of Direct Connection Operations
PT status notify bits
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Bit
0
Word m+2
0
0
0
0
PT operation status (1 (ON): RUN / 0 (OFF): STOP)
Screen switching strobe
Numeral setting strobe flag
The PT status control area (PLC to PT) can be allocated to the following PLC
areas.
Symbol
C-series
AllocaCVM1/CV -series
tion
❍
CIO Area
Allocation
❍
CS/CJ-series
CIO Area
Allocation
❍
None
IR Area
H
HR Area
❍
---
---
HR Area
Not for
Host Link
A
L
AR Area
LR Area
❍
❍
AR Area
---
×
---
AR Area
LR Area (See note 1.)
T
TC Area
Timer PVs
×
TC Area
Timer PVs
×
TC Area
Timer PVs
❍
Not for
Host Link
×
TU
---
---
---
---
TC area,
Timer Completion Flags
×
C
TC Area
Counter PVs
×
TC Area
Counter PVs
×
TC Area
Counter PVs
×
CU
---
---
---
---
×
W
---
---
---
---
TC area,
Counter Completion Flags
WR
TK
---
---
---
---
Task Flags
Not for
Host Link
×
D
E
DM Area
EM Area
(See note 2.)
---
❍
❍
DM Area
EM Area
Current bank
---
DM Area
EM Area
Current bank
EM Area
EM bank 0 to C
❍
Not for
Host Link
Not for
Host Link
E0_to EC_
---
❍
Not for
Host Link
---
❍: OK ×: NG
Since the AR area bits of the CVM1/CV series PLCs are allocated to the system, they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use.
The screen switching strobe or numeral setting strobe will turn ON in the following cases.
Screen switching strobe:Turns ON when a screen is changed due to an
instruction from the PLC or an operation at the PT.
Numeral setting strobe: Turns ON when the contents of a numeral memory
table entry is changed due to an operation at the PT.
These strobes turn OFF automatically after the PLC is notified, allowing the
operating status of the PT to be easily investigated. If a CVM1/CV-series CPU
Unit is connected and set for asynchronous operation, the status of the
strobes cannot be read dependably.
Note
(1) LR 00000 to LR 00199 are converted to CIO 01000 to CIO 01199.
(2) The EM Area is supported only by the C200HX/HG/HE-(Z)E PLCs.
(3) Make sure there is no duplication in the PT status control area allocations
and PT status notify area allocations.
171
Section 5-1
Overview of Direct Connection Operations
(4) When NT link (1:N) is set, the PT status control area must be set for each
connected PT.
5-1-4
Switching the Screen Display
The following describes the procedure used to switch the NT20 screen display
by controlling from the PLC.
Note
The display screen can be switched also by pressing a touch switch during
the operation after registering a screen number to the touch switch. For this
function, refer to the 4-7-2 Screen Switching Function on page 154.
To switch the NT20 screen display by controlling from the PLC, write a screen
number at the “screen switch setting” in the PT status control area.
NT20
PLC
PT status control area
Screen switch setting
Screen number
Copy memory
table setting
Designated screen
PT status control setting
Screen Switch Setting in the PT Status Control Area
PT status notify bits
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit
Word n
Screen number (4-digit BCD)
Screen switch setting
Screen number: 0000 (screen clear, no-display)
: 0001 to 0500
• Available Allocation Words
The PT status control area (PLC to PT) can be allocated to the following
PLC areas.
Symbol
C-series
Allocation
CVM1/CV -series
Allocation
CS/CJ-series
Allocation
None
H
IR Area
HR Area
❍
❍
CIO Area
---
❍
---
CIO Area
HR Area
❍
Not for
Host Link
A
L
AR Area
LR Area
❍
❍
AR Area
---
×
---
AR Area
LR Area (See note 1.)
T
TC Area
Timer PVs
---
×
TC Area
Timer PVs
---
×
TC Area
Timer PVs
TC area,
Timer Completion Flags
❍
Not for
Host Link
×
TU
---
---
×
C
TC Area
Counter PVs
×
TC Area
Counter PVs
×
TC Area
Counter PVs
×
CU
---
---
---
---
TC area,
Counter Completion Flags
×
W
---
---
---
---
WR
TK
---
---
---
---
Task Flags
D
DM Area
❍
DM Area
❍
DM Area
172
Not for
Host Link
×
❍
Section 5-1
Overview of Direct Connection Operations
E
E0_to EC_
EM Area
(See note 2.)
---
❍
---
EM Area
Current bank
---
Not for EM Area
Host Link Current bank
--EM Area
EM bank 0 to C
Not for
Host Link
Not for
Host Link
❍: OK ×: NG
Since the AR area bits of the CVM1/CV series PLCs are allocated to the system, they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use. The range
of respective area varies with the type of PLC.
Note
(1) LR 00000 to LR 00199 are converted to CIO 01000 to CIO 01199.
(2) The EM Area is supported only by the C200HX/HG/HE-(Z)E.
1,2,3...
1. Use the Support Tool to allocate the PT status control area (PLC to PT) to
the PLC memory.
2. Create a PLC program to write the number of the displayed screen to the
“screen switch setting word” in the PT status control area.
Use a 4-digit BCD (binary-coded decimal) value to set a screen number.
If a screen has been switched by operating the PT status control area (PLC to
PT), the contents of the “currently displayed screen word” in the PT status
notify area (PT to PLC) also change.
• Screen Switching Timing
The NT20 screen switches when the contents of the “screen switch setting”
have changed. To re-specify the number of the currently specified screen,
first write the value 0000 to clear the screen before writing the appropriate
screen number.
• Use of the Screen Switching Strobe
Create a program to read the number of the currently displayed screen and
to write the number to the “screen switch setting word” at the leading edge
of the “screen switching strobe” of the PT status notify area. This program
enables screen switching by using the touch switches on the NT20 and
eliminates repeated setting of the same screen number. If the screen
switching is not executed on the NT20, the screen switching strobe does
not need to be checked.
For the screen switching strobe, refer to the “Notifying the PLC of the Display Screen,” below.
• Continuous Screens and Overlapping Screens
Continuous or overlapping screens can be displayed by designating the
parent screen. If a child screen is designated, only the child screen is displayed.
For the continuous and overlapping screens, refer to 4-3-1 Classification of
Screens on page 140.
Example of Display Screen Switching
This example operates the PLC switch (bit) to switch the NT20 display screen.
• Support Tool Settings
Make the following settings with the Support Tool:
PT status control area: Word 0100
PT status notify area: Word 0110
Screen number to be created: Screen #2 and #3
• PLC Ladder Program
173
Section 5-1
Overview of Direct Connection Operations
Create a PLC ladder program as follows:
00002
@MOV(21)
#0002
100
(1)
Screen number
Screen switch setting word
@MOV(21)
#0003
100
(2)
Screen number
Screen switch setting word
@MOV(21)
110
100
(3)
Screen number
Screen switch setting word
00003
11212
Screen switch strobe flag
• Program Operation
1,2,3...
1. Screen #2 is displayed on the NT20 when bit 00002 turns ON.
2. Screen #3 is displayed on the NT20 when bit 00003 turns ON.
3. When the screen switch strobe flag turns ON, the number of the currently
displayed screen is read and written to the currently displayed screen word
in the PT status notify area. In this case, the NT20 will not write the same
screen twice.
5-1-5
Notifying the PLC of the Display Screen
(to Display the Number of Currently Displayed Screen)
The following describes the processing to display the number of currently displayed screen of the NT20.
This processing reads the data from the PLC status notify area.
To indicate that the screen has switched, use the screen switch strobe flag.
To display the number of the currently displayed screen, use the currently displayed screen word.
When the screen has switched, the NT20 notifies the PLC of the following in
PT status notify area (PT to PLC) allocated in the PLC.
Screen switch notification: Screen switch strobe flag of the PT status word
New screen number:
Currently displayed screen word
By reading the currently displayed screen word when the screen switch strobe
flag has turned ON, the number of the currently displayed screen on the NT20
is displayed.
NT20
PLC
PT status notify area
Currently displayed screen
Currently
displayed
screen
174
Screen number
Upgraded memory table entry
PT status
Screen switch
strobe flag
Section 5-1
Overview of Direct Connection Operations
Currently Displayed Screen and PT Status Words in the PT Status Notify
Area
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit
Word
m
Screen number (4-digit BCD)
PT status
m+2
0
Screen switch setting
PT status
0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Bit
-
0
0
-
0
0
0
Screen switch strobe
Screen number: 0001 to 0500
Use a 4-digit BCD (binary-coded decimal) value to set a screen number.
The screen switch strobe bit reverts to OFF (0) after the PLC is notified.
• Available Allocation Words
The PT status notify area (PT to PLC) can be allocated to the following
PLC areas.
Symbol
C-series
Allocation
CVM1/CV -series
None
H
IR Area
HR Area
❍
❍
CIO Area
---
A
AR Area
❍
L
LR Area
❍
T
TC Area
Timer PVs
---
×
TU
C
---
CU
TC Area
Counter PVs
---
W
×
Allocation
CS/CJ-series
Allocation
❍
---
CIO Area
HR Area
AR Area
×
AR Area
---
---
LR Area (See note 1.)
TC Area
Timer PVs
---
×
TC Area
Timer PVs
TC area,
Timer Completion Flags
TC Area
Counter PVs
TC area,
Counter Completion Flags
--×
---
TC Area
Counter PVs
---
---
---
---
---
---
WR
TK
D
--DM Area
--❍
--DM Area
--❍
Task Flags
DM Area
E
EM Area
(See note 2.)
❍
EM Area
Current bank
E0_to EC_
---
---
---
❍
Not for
Host Link
❍
Not for
Host Link
×
×
×
Not for
Host Link
×
❍
Not for EM Area
Host Link Current bank
---
×
Not for
Host Link
EM Area
EM bank 0 to C
Not for
Host Link
❍: OK ×: NG
Since the AR area bits of the CV-series PLCs are allocated to the system,
they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use.
The range of respective area varies with the type of PLC.
Note
(1) LR 00000 to LR 00199 are converted to CIO 01000 to CIO 01199.
(2) The EM Area is supported only by the C200HX/HG/HE-(Z)E.
1,2,3...
1. Use the Support Tool to allocate the PT status notify area (PT to PLC) to
the PLC memory.
175
Section 5-1
Overview of Direct Connection Operations
2. Create a PLC program to read the “currently displayed screen word” in the
in the PT status notify area when the “screen switch strobe flag” in the PT
status notify area has turned ON.
Note
The contents of the “currently displayed screen word” are updated also by
switching the screen by pressing a touch switch on the NT20.
For this function (standalone function or screen switch function), refer to the
Standalone Function on page 154.
• Continuous Screens and Overlapping Screens
When a continuous or overlapping screen is displayed, the number of the
parent screen is written to the “currently displayed screen word”.
For the continuous and overlapping screens, refer to the 4-3-1 Classification
of Screens on page 140.
Example of Reading the Number of Currently Display Screen
This example gives a PLC program that reads the screen number each time
the screen is switched. In this example, the number of the previous screen is
also stored.
• Support Tool Settings
Make the following settings with the Support Tool:
PT status notify area: Word 0110
• PLC Ladder Program
11212
@MOV(21)
DM0100
DM0101
Screen switch
strobe flag
@MOV(21)
110
DM0100
(1)
Word for storing the number of the
previous screen
(2)
Word for notification of the number of
the currently displayed screen
Word for storing a new screen number
• Program Operation
1,2,3...
1. When the NT20 screen display switches and the screen switch strobe flag
(bit 11212) turns ON, the contents of DM0100 are transferred to DM0101.
The number of the previously displayed screen is stored in word 0101.
2. The new screen number indicated by the NT20 is read and transferred to
DM0100. The number of the currently displayed screen is stored in
DM0100.
176
Section 5-2
Memory Tables and Bar Graphs
5-2
Memory Tables and Bar Graphs
Displaying and Referencing Character String Memory Table Contents
Since the character-string memory table entries can be allocated to the words
in the PLC, the PLC can write data to the character-string memory table
entries or the initial values can be set when creating the screen data.
Automatic updating is performed to ensure that the currently displayed NT20
character string memory table contents and PLC word contents always match
each other.
There are two methods for referencing character string memory table entries
used for character string display, as follows:
• Direct specification
• Indirect specification
• Direct Specification
Direct specification is a method of specification in which the contents of
displayed memory table entries are directly correlated with the contents of
the allocated words.
NT20
a b c d
PLC
Allocated words
Character string
Direct
(character string memory table entry 51)
specification memory table entry 51
DM0100
a b c d
6 1 6 2
6 3 6 4
• Indirect Specification (Direct Connection Only)
In indirect specification, even if the displayed data is a character string, the
display is correlated with a numeral memory table entry. The contents (numerical value) of this numeral memory table entry are regarded as a character string memory table entry number and the contents of the table entry
with this number is displayed.
Up to 50 numeral displays and 50 character string displays can be specified on one screen by using indirect specification.
NT20
PLC
Indirect
Numeral memory Allocated word (numeral memory table entry 20)
specification table entry 20
DM0000
a b c d
0 0 5 1
0 0 5 1
Allocated words (character string table entry 51)
Character string
memory table entry 51
DM0100
a b c d
6 1 6 2
6 3 6 4
This specification method is a little complex, but it allows the display to be
changed more easily according to the circumstances. In the example above, if
1 were added to the contents of memory table entry 20 to give 52, the contents of memory table entry 52 would be displayed instead.
The memory table entries used for display can also be allocated to areas in
the PLC, so that the display can also be changed in response to changes in
the data to be displayed (i.e., the contents of character string memory table
entry 51 in the example above).
However, in comparison with direct specification, indirect specification
requires more time for processing.
177
Section 5-2
Memory Tables and Bar Graphs
Setting the Words of the Character-String Memory Table
When creating the screen data by using the Support Tool, make the following
settings for each numbered character string:
• Initialization Setting
Set whether or not the PLC words are initialized with the character-string
memory table initial value registered to the screen data memory when the
main power supply is turned ON or reset.
• Number of Registration Words
Set the number of words within 16 words required for registering the character-string data. One word can store two normal-size characters.
• Setting the Words for the Character-string Memory Table Entries
The character-string memory table entries can be allocated to the following
PLC words. Set the word type and the first word.
Symbol
C-series
AllocaCVM1/CV -series
tion
❍
CIO Area
Allocation
❍
CS/CJ-series
CIO Area
Allocation
❍
None
IR Area
H
HR Area
❍
---
---
HR Area
Not for
Host Link
A
L
AR Area
LR Area
❍
❍
AR Area
---
×
---
AR Area
LR Area (See note 1.)
T
TC Area
Timer PVs
×
TC Area
Timer PVs
×
TC Area
Timer PVs
❍
Not for
Host Link
×
TU
---
---
---
---
TC area,
Timer Completion Flags
×
C
TC Area
Counter PVs
×
TC Area
Counter PVs
×
TC Area
Counter PVs
×
CU
---
---
---
---
×
W
---
---
---
---
TC area,
Counter Completion Flags
WR
TK
---
---
---
---
D
E
DM Area
EM Area
(See note 2.)
---
❍
❍
DM Area
EM Area
Current bank
---
E0_to EC_
---
❍
Not for
Host Link
---
Task Flags
Not for
Host Link
×
DM Area
EM Area
Current bank
EM Area
EM bank 0 to C
❍
Not for
Host Link
Not for
Host Link
❍: OK ×: NG
Since the AR area bits of the CVM1/CV-series PLCs are allocated to the system, they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use.
If the “number of registration words x 2” (“word setting window”) set with the
Support Tool is larger than the “number of character digits” (“character-string
display setting” window), the character string may be broken halfway.
Note
(1) LR 00000 to LR 00199 are converted to CIO 01000 to CIO 01199.
(2) The EM Area is supported only by the C200HX/HG/HE-(Z)E PLCs.
Displaying and Referencing Numeral Memory Table Contents
Since the numeral memory table entries can be allocated to the words in the
PLC, the PLC can write data to the numeral memory table entries or the initial
values can be set when creating the screen data.
178
Section 5-2
Memory Tables and Bar Graphs
Also, by relating the numeral memory table entries with the bar graphs, the
bar graphs corresponding to the data of the numeral memory table entries
can be displayed.
During the operation, the display contents are automatically updated so that
the contents of the numeral memory table entry being displayed are the same
as that of the PLC word.
There are two methods for referencing numeral memory table entries used for
numeral displays, as follows:
• Direct specification
• Indirect specification
Note
The only method available for numeral memory table entries used for graphs
and numeral settings is direct specification.
• Direct Specification
Direct specification is a method of specification in which the contents of
displayed memory table entries are directly correlated with the contents of
the allocated words.
PLC
NT20
Direct
specification
0 0 6 2
Allocated word
(character string memory
Character string
table entry 18)
memory table entry 18
DM0100
0 0 6 2
0 0 6 2
• Indirect Specification
NT20
PLC
Indirect
specification
7 7 7 7
Numeral memory
table entry 18
0 0 6 2
Allocated word
(numeral memory table entry 18)
DM0100
0 0 6 2
Allocated word (character string
Character string
table entry 62)
memory table entry 62
DM0200
7 7 7 7
7 7 7 7
With indirect specification, the contents (numerical value) of the specified
numeral memory table entry are regarded as a memory table entry number
and the contents of the table entry with this number is displayed.
Up to 50 numeral displays and 50 character string displays can be specified on one screen by using indirect specification.
This specification method is a little complex, but it allows the display to be
changed more easily according to the circumstances. In the example
above, if one were added to the contents of memory table entry 18 to give
63, the contents of memory table entry 63 would be displayed instead.
The memory table entries used for display can also be allocated to areas
in the PLC, so that the display can also be changed in response to changes
in the data to be displayed (i.e., the contents of character string memory
table entry 62 in the example above). However, in comparison with direct
specification, indirect specification requires more time for processing.
Setting the Words of the Numeral Memory Table
When creating the screen data by using the Support Tool, make the following
settings for each numbered numeral:
179
Section 5-2
Memory Tables and Bar Graphs
• Initialization Setting
Set whether or not the PLC words are initialized with the numeral memory
table initial value registered to the screen data memory when the main
power supply is turned ON or reset.
• Number of Registration Words
Set the number of words within 2 words required for registering the numeral data. One word can store up to 4 digits. Two words can store up to 8 digits.
• Setting the Words for the Numeral Memory Table
The numeral memory table entries can be allocated to the following PLC
words. Set the word type and the first word.
Symbol
C-series
Allocation
CVM1/CV -series
Allocation
CS/CJ-series
Allocation
None
H
IR Area
HR Area
❍
❍
CIO Area
---
❍
---
CIO Area
HR Area
❍
Not for
Host Link
A
L
AR Area
LR Area
❍
❍
AR Area
---
×
---
AR Area
LR Area (See note 1.)
❍
Not for
Host Link
T
TC Area
Timer PVs
---
---
TC Area
Timer PVs
---
TU
C
TC Area
Counter PVs
CU
---
---
---
---
TC area,
Counter Completion Flags
W
---
---
---
---
WR
TK
D
--DM Area
--❍
--DM Area
--❍
Task Flags
DM Area
E
EM Area
(See note 2.)
---
❍
EM Area
Current bank
---
E0_to EC_
TC Area
Counter PVs
TC Area
Timer PVs
--TC area,
Timer Completion Flags
Not for TC Area
Host Link Counter PVs
---
×
×
Not for
Host Link
×
❍
Not for EM Area
Host Link Current bank
--EM Area
EM bank 0 to C
❍: OK
Not for
Host Link
Not for
Host Link
: 1 word only ×: NG
Since the AR area bits of the CVM1/CV series PLCs are allocated to the system, they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use.
Note
(1) LR 00000 to LR 00199 are converted to CIO 01000 to CIO 01199.
(2) The EM Area is supported only by C200HX/HG/HE-(Z)E PLCs.
5-2-1
Displaying the Contents of Allocated Words of Memory Table
Entries
The relationship between the contents of the allocated words of numeral and
character string memory table entries and the display is described below.
• Contents of the Numeral Memory Table
Numerals are stored in the allocated words as shown below.
180
Section 5-2
Memory Tables and Bar Graphs
Stored as a Single Word
15
to 12
Digit 4
11
to
8
Digit 3
7
to
4
Digit 2
3
to
0
Digit 1
Bit
11
to
7
to
3
to
Bit
Example: 1234
15
to
12
1
8
2
4
3
0
4
Stored as a Double Word
Word
Start
15
Start+ 1
to 12
Digit 4
11
Digit 8
to 8
Digit 3
7
Digit 7
to 4
Digit 2
3
Digit 6
to 0
Digit 1
Bit
Digit 5
Example: 12345678
Word
Start
Start+ 1
15
to
12
11
to
8
7
to
4
3
to
0
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
Bit
• Displaying a Numeral Memory Table Entry
Numerals can be displayed in three different ways according to the contents of the numeral memory table, as described below.
The most significant digit (digit 4 of a single word or digit 8 of a double
word) is processed in different ways.
Hexadecimal display:
All digits are handled as stored in the allocated words.
Decimal display without signs:
If the most significant digit is “F”, it is handled as “0”, and the most significant digit
other than “F” and other digits are handled as stored in the allocated words.
Decimal display with signs:
If the most significant digit is “F”, it is handled as “–” (minus sign), and the most
significant digit other than “F” and other
digits are handled as stored in the allocated words.
181
Section 5-2
Memory Tables and Bar Graphs
Numeral Memory Table Display Examples
• When the Data Is Numeral Data (0 to 9)
Start
3
4
5
6
Start + 1
F
0
1
2
Decimal without sign 123456
Decimal with sign
−123456
Hexadecimal
F0123456
• When the Data Contains Characters (A to F)
Start
3
B
5
6
Start + 1
F
0
1
2
Decimal without sign 123B56
Decimal with sign
−123B56
Hexadecimal
F0123B56
If the hexadecimal data (A to F) are stored when the decimal display has been
set, the alphabets are displayed.
If the number of display digits has been set to be smaller than the maximum
number of digits of the registration words (4 digits for 1 word; 8 digits for 2
words), the contents of the allocated words are not displayed and “*” symbols
will be displayed at all digits.
If the most significant digit is “F” when “decimal with signs” has been set, the
numeral is handled as a negative number. The maximum number of digits of
the negative number becomes smaller than that of the positive number by 1
digit.
The actual display will vary according to the “zero suppress” setting and decimal fraction setting as well as the contents described above. Refer to the “NT
Support Tool for Windows Operation Manual” (Cat. No. [email protected]).
• Contents of the Character-string Memory Table
A character string is stored in the allocated words beginning with the first
word in normal-size characters.
Two normal-size characters are stored in one word. One memory table entry can store up to 16 words (32 characters).
Start
Code 1
Code 2
Start + 1
Code 3
Start + 15
Code 4
Code31 Code32
Character-string Memory Table Display Example
To display the characters in order, allocate the characters as follows:
5-2-2
"A"=41H, "B"=42H Start
4
1
4
2
"C"=43H, "D"=44H Start + 1
4
3
4
4
"E"=45H, "F"=46H Start + 2
4
5
4
6
"G"=47H, "G"=48H Start + 3
4
7
4
8
"ABCDEFGH"
Changing Displayed Numerals or Character Strings
(Changing the Contents of Allocated Words ... Direct
Specification)
The following explains the actual procedure for changing the contents of allocated words referenced by direct specification in order to change numerical
values and character strings displayed by the NT20.
For the situation when using indirect specification, refer to 5-2-3 Changing
Displayed Numerical Values or Character Strings (Changing the Contents of
Allocated Words ... Indirect Specification) on page 184.
Numerals and character strings can be changed also by making a copy of the
memory table entries. Refer to “Copying Memory Table Entries,” below.
182
Section 5-2
Memory Tables and Bar Graphs
To change the numerals or character strings displayed on the NT20, make
changes with the numeral or character-string memory table. To make changes
with the numeral or character-string memory table of the NT20, change the
contents of words by the PLC.
PLC
NT20
Numeral table
entry 1
12345678
12345678
abcdef
abcdef
Character-string
memory table
entry 4
Allocated words
(numeral table entry)
Start
Start+1
12345678
Allocated words (character-string memory table entry)
Start
61 62 63 64 65 66
Start+1
("a b c d e f")
Start+2
Note
This method is convenient when changing data has to be displayed: for example when monitoring the contents of PLC words.
1,2,3...
1. Use the Support Tool to allocate the numeral and character-string memory
table entries to the PLC memory.
2. Register the memory table entries for the numerals and character strings
to be displayed when creating the screen data by using the Support Tool.
Specify “direct” as the reference method.
To display a character string, use “character display” and specify the character-string memory table entry by using the Support Tool.
To display numerals, use “numeral display” and specify the numeral memory table entry by using the Support Tool.
3. Create a PLC program to write the contents of numerals and character
strings to be displayed on the NT20 to the PLC words.
• Important Points When Writing a Character String
If a character string to be written is smaller than “allocated word x 2”, fill up
the vacant space with normal-size spaces (20H). If unnecessary characters are left in the area, the character string will not be displayed correctly.
Application Example of the Numeral Memory Table Entries Allocated to the PLC Words
This example gives the procedure to directly display the contents of the words
allocated as the numeral memory table entries in the PLC memory. The NT20
screen display will change as the contents of the PLC word change.
• Support Tool Settings
Allocate the memory as shown below by using the Support Tool.
Numeral memory table entry #1: DM0000 (allocated words: 2 words)
Numeral memory table entry #2: DM0002 (allocated words: 1 word)
Screen numbers to be created:#1 and #2
Numeral memory
table entry #1
(8-digit input)
Line 1
Qty.
Defects
15289
units
23
units
Numeral memory
table entry #2
(4-digit input)
• PLC Ladder Program
183
Section 5-2
Memory Tables and Bar Graphs
Create a PLC ladder program as follows:
25502 (1 second clock)
DIFU(13)
00100
00100
INC(38)
DM0000
(1)
Word for least significant 4 digits of #1
INC(38)
DM0001
(2)
Word for most significant 4 digits of #1
25506 (=)
00001
@INC(38)
DM0002
(3)
Word for #2
• Program Operation
1,2,3...
1. The contents of word DM0000 are incremented by 1 each second. The value displayed on the NT20 in numeral memory table entry #1 increases by
1 each second.
2. When the counter in (1) above causes an increase in the most significant
digits, the contents of word DM0001 are incremented by 1 each second.
The value displayed on the NT20 in numeral memory table entry #1 most
significant digits increases by 1.
3. When bit 00001 turns ON, the contents of DM0002 are incremented by 1.
The value displayed on the NT20 in numeral memory table entry #2 increases by 1.
5-2-3
Changing Displayed Numerical Values or Character Strings
(Changing the Contents of Allocated Words ... Indirect
Specification)
The following explains how to change numerical values or character strings
displayed by the NT20 by changing the contents of the referenced allocated
words using indirect specification.
If using direct specification, refer to 5-2-2 Changing Displayed Numerals or
Character Strings (Changing the Contents of Allocated Words ... Direct Specification) on page 182.
Numerical values and character strings can also be changed by making a
copy of the memory table entries. Refer to 5-2-4 Copying Memory Table
Entries on page 186.
In indirect specification, a numeral memory table entry is specified to display a
numerical value or character string. The numerical value stored in this
numeral memory table entry (“39” in the figure below) is taken as the number
of the memory table entry whose contents are to be displayed.
Either of the following two methods can be used to change the display when
indirect specification is used:
1,2,3...
1. Changing the number for the memory table entry whose contents are to be
displayed. (In the example in the figure below, this would mean changing
the contents of numeral memory table entry 41.)
2. Changing the contents of the memory table entry used for display
(In the example in the figure below, this would mean changing the contents
of character string memory table entry 39.)
184
Section 5-2
Memory Tables and Bar Graphs
Here, the method for changing the display using method 1) is explained. For
details on method 2), refer to the explanations on direct specification on
page 182 and 5-2-4 Copying Memory Table Entries on page 186.
NT20
PLC
Indirect numeral memory
table entry 41
AaBb
0039
Allocated word (numeral
memory table entry 41)
0 0 3 9
0039
Character string
memory table entry 39
AaBb
Character string memory
table entry 40
Moji
Note
This method is convenient when switching the display at the same location, for
example when monitoring a series of words, or when using unique codes to
specify individual character strings, etc.
1,2,3...
1. Set the PLC area for allocation of the numeral memory table entry to be
referenced in indirect specification using the Support Tool.
2. When using the Support Tool to create screen data, register on the screen
the numeral memory table entry referenced in indirect specification. Specify the “indirect” option for the reference method.
In the case of a character string, use the “character display” function of the
Support Tool to specify the numeral memory table entry.
In the case of a numerical value, use the “numeral display” function of the
Support Tool to specify the numeral memory table entry.
3. Use the “table edit” function of the Support Tool to write the actually displayed data to the memory table entry for display. If displaying a numerical
value, use a numeral memory table entry and if displaying a character
string use a character string memory table entry.
4. Create a PLC program to change the contents of the word allocated to the
numeral memory table referenced in the indirect specification.
• Precautions on Writing Memory Table Entry Numbers
When writing the number of the memory table for display to the numeral
memory table entry referenced in indirect specification, always specify it in
BCD. Also, be sure to specify a number within the range of memory table
entry numbers that actually exist (0 to 127).
If the contents of the numeral memory table entry for indirect specification
are specified in hexadecimal format, or the number specified is outside the
valid range for memory table entry numbers, the display is not updated.
• Precautions on Writing Character Strings
The points to note when displaying character strings are the same as those
described for direct specification. Refer to Important points when writing a
character string to page 149.
Example Use of Indirect Specification
This example shows a case where the displayed character string is changed
by incrementing the contents of the allocated word of the numeral memory
table entry referenced in indirect specification.
• Settings with the Support Tool
Make the following settings with the Support Tool.
185
Section 5-2
Memory Tables and Bar Graphs
Numeral memory table entry number 51: DM 0000 (number of registered words: 1)
Character string memory table entry number 100: “NT610G” (6 digits)
Character string memory table entry number 101: “NT610C” (6 digits)
Character string memory table entry number 102: “NT20 ” (6 digits)
Character string memory table entry number 103: “NT600S” (6 digits)
Data registered for the screen: numeral memory table entry number 51.
Line 1
Product
NT20
Numeral memory table number 51 specified in indirect specification of character string display
• PLC Program
Create the PLC ladder program as follows:
00100
@INC(38)
DM0000
(1)
Numeral memory table number used in indirect specification
@DEC(39)
DM0000
(2)
Numeral memory table number used in indirect specification
00101
• Program Operation
1,2,3...
1. Each time bit 00100 comes ON, the display on the NT20 screen changes
according to one of the steps in the following sequence: “NT610G” →
“NT610C” → “NT20” → “NT600S”.
2. Each time bit 00101 comes ON, the display on the NT20 screen makes
changes according to one of the steps in the following sequence:
“NT600S” → “NT20” → “NT610C” → “NT610G”.
In this example, the contents of numeral memory table entry number 51 referenced in indirect specification are not checked. Make sure that the contents of
numeral memory table entry number 51 stay within the range of 0100 to 0103
when the program is actually used.
5-2-4
Copying Memory Table Entries
The following describes the procedure to change displayed numerals or character strings by copying the contents of a memory table entry.
Numerals and character strings can be changed also by changing the contents of the allocated words. Refer to 5-2-2 Changing Displayed Numerals or
Character Strings (Changing the Contents of Allocated Words ... Direct Specification) on page 182 explained before.
To change the numerals or character strings displayed on the NT20, copy the
data between the numeral or character-string memory table entries by using
the “copy memory table setting” of the PT status control area.
186
Section 5-2
Memory Tables and Bar Graphs
NT20
PLC
PT status control area
Screen switch setting
Memory table
copy source
A
A
A
Copy source number
Copy memory
table setting
Copy destination
(for display)
Copy destination number
PT status control setting
Write a memory table entry number to the copy memory table setting area in
the PT status control area in the PLC memory. Data will be copied between
the memory table entries in the NT20 and the displayed value will change
accordingly.
Note
This procedure is convenient to switch predetermined values or character
strings according to the situation. By preparing several units of contents, various contents can be displayed by switching them to suit the situation.
Copy Memory Table Settings of the PT Status Control Area
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit
Word
n+1
n+2
0
Copy source memory table entry # (3-digit BCD)
Copy type
Copy destination memory table entry # (3-digit BCD)
Copy memory
table settings
Copy type:
0: Copy between the character-string memory table entries
1: Copy between the numeral memory table entries
Copy source and destination memory table entry numbers: 000 to 127
• Available Allocation Words
The PT status control area can be allocated to the following PLC areas:
Symbol
C-series
AllocaCVM1/CV -series
tion
❍
CIO Area
Allocation
❍
CS/CJ-series
CIO Area
---
HR Area
Allocation
❍
None
IR Area
H
HR Area
❍
---
A
AR Area
❍
AR Area
×
AR Area
L
LR Area
❍
---
---
LR Area (See note 1.)
T
TC Area
Timer PVs
×
TC Area
Timer PVs
×
TC Area
Timer PVs
×
TU
---
---
---
---
×
C
×
---
TC Area
Counter PVs
---
×
CU
TC Area
Counter PVs
---
---
W
---
---
---
---
TC area,
Timer Completion Flags
TC Area
Counter PVs
TC area,
Counter Completion Flags
WR
TK
D
--DM Area
--❍
--DM Area
--❍
Task Flags
DM Area
E
EM Area
(See note 2.)
❍
EM Area
Current bank
E0_to EC_
---
---
---
Not for EM Area
Host Link Current bank
---
EM Area
EM bank 0 to C
Not for
Host Link
❍
Not for
Host Link
×
×
Not for
Host Link
×
❍
Not for
Host Link
Not for
Host Link
❍: OK ×: NG
187
Section 5-2
Memory Tables and Bar Graphs
Since the AR area bits of the CVM1/CV series PLCs are allocated to the system, they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use.
Note
(1) LR 00000 to LR 00199 are converted to CIO 01000 to CIO 01199.
(2) The EM Area is supported only by the C200HX/HG/HE-(Z)E PLCs.
1,2,3...
1. Use the Support Tool to allocate the PT status control area (PLC to PT) to
the PLC memory.
2. Register the memory table entries for the numerals and character strings
to be displayed when creating the screen data by using the Support Tool.
To display a character string, use “character display” and specify the character-string memory table entry by using the Support Tool.
To display numerals, use “numeral display” and specify the numeral memory table entry by using the Support Tool.
3. Set the copy source data to the memory table entry when creating the
screen data by using the Support Tool.
Use “table edit”.
4. Create a PLC program to write the copy type, copy destination memory table entry number, and copy source memory table entry number to the
“copy memory table entry” setting word in the PT status control area.
• Order for Writing to the PT Status Control Area (PLC to PT)
First write the “copy destination memory table entry number”, and then,
write the “copy source memory table entry number” to the PT status control
area (PLC to PT).
The NT20 reads the area sometimes when the PLC is writing the settings.
If the “copy source memory table entry number” has been written first and
is changed, unexpected memory table entries may possibly be changed.
• Allocated Words That the NT20 Reads
The NT20 reads the allocated words in the PLC for the memory table entries which need to be displayed. Even when a copy source memory table
entry is allocated to a PLC word, if its contents are never displayed it will
be used only at initialization.
• Use of the Copy Type
Copy will not be executed when the “copy type” is other than “0” or “1”. The
memory table entry copy is executed only when the contents of the area
are changed. To repeat copying of the same copy source and same copy
destination, write a value other than “0” or “1” for the copy type, and then,
write a correct value again.
• Copying a Numeral Memory Table Entry
If the display method or the number of registered words include discrepancies, a numeral memory table entry may not be copied and displayed correctly.
Application Example of Copying of a Character-String Memory Table Entry
This example gives a PLC program to switch the character string display on
the screen by using the memory table entry copy operation as the allocated
bit is turned ON and OFF.
• Support Tool Settings
Allocate the memory as shown below by using the Support Tool.
PT status control area allocation: Word 0100
188
Section 5-2
Memory Tables and Bar Graphs
Contents registered to the screen: Character-string memory table entry #4
Line 1
Normal
Character-string memory table entry #4
Character-string memory table settings
#
Contents
Number of
Character Digits
4
10
Normal
Error
6 digits
6 digits
11
Normal
6 digits
• PLC Ladder Program
Create a PLC ladder program as follows:
09000
Error flag
09000
Error flag
@MOV(21)
#0004
102
(1)
Copy type, copy destination memory table entry #
Copy destination word
@MOV(21)
#0010
101
Copy source memory table entry #
Copy source word
@MOV(21)
#0004
102
(2)
Copy type, copy destination memory table entry #
Copy destination word
@MOV(21)
#0011
101
Copy source memory table entry #
Copy source word
• Program Operation
1,2,3...
1. When an error occurs (bit 09000 turns ON), the NT20 displays the message “Error”.
2. When the error is cleared (bit 09000 turns OFF), the NT20 display message reverts to “Normal”.
5-2-5
Upgrading Bar Graphs
(Changing the Contents of Allocated Words)
The following describes the procedure to upgrade the bar graph display on the
NT20 by changing the contents of the allocated words.
To change the bar graph display on the NT20, change the contents of the PLC
words to which the numeral memory table entries have been allocated.
The bar graph display cannot use hexadecimal numbers. If hexadecimal numbers are set, the bar graph will not be displayed.
189
Section 5-2
Memory Tables and Bar Graphs
By writing a negative number (whose most significant digit is “F”) to the allocated word of a graph set as “Sign display “No””, the graph display will
become 0 % and the % display will show “*** %”.
For the procedure to write numeral values to the allocated words of the
numeral memory table entries, refer to 5-2-1 Displaying the Contents of Allocated Words of Memory Table Entries (page 180).
For the procedure to change the contents of the numeral memory table entry
(PLC words), refer to 5-2-2 Changing Displayed Numerals or Character
Strings (Changing the Contents of Allocated Words ... Direct Specification) on
page 182.
• Available Allocation Words
The numeral memory table entries can be allocated to the following PLC
areas:
Symbol
C-series
AllocaCVM1/CV -series
tion
❍
CIO Area
Allocation
❍
CS/CJ-series
CIO Area
Allocation
❍
None
IR Area
H
HR Area
❍
---
---
HR Area
Not for
Host Link
A
L
AR Area
LR Area
❍
❍
AR Area
---
×
---
AR Area
LR Area (See note 1.)
❍
Not for
Host Link
T
TC Area
Timer PVs
TU
---
C
TC Area
Counter PVs
CU
---
---
---
---
W
---
---
---
---
TK
---
---
---
---
D
E
DM Area
EM Area
(See note 2.)
---
❍
❍
DM Area
EM Area
Current bank
---
E0_to EC_
TC Area
Timer PVs
---
--TC Area
Counter PVs
---
TC Area
Timer PVs
---
×
TC area,
Timer Completion Flags
Not for TC Area
Host Link Counter PVs
❍
Not for
Host Link
---
TC area,
Counter Completion Flags
WR
×
Task Flags
Not for
Host Link
×
DM Area
EM Area
Current bank
EM Area
EM bank 0 to C
❍
Not for
Host Link
Not for
Host Link
❍: OK
: 1 word only ×: NG
Since the AR area bits of the CVM1/CV series PLCs are allocated to the system, they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use.
The range of respective area varies with the type of PLC.
Note
(1) LR 0000 to LR 00199 are converted to CIO 01000 to CIO 01199.
(2) The EM Area is supported only by the C200HX/HG/HE-(Z)E PLCs.
190
Section 5-3
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
5-3
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
5-3-1
Allocation Bits and Display of Lamps
Lamps are controlled by allocating them to the PLC bits. Set the area and bit
number.
• Available Allocation Bits
The lamps can be allocated to the following PLC areas:
Symbol
C-series
Allocation
CVM1/CV -series
None
H
IR Area
HR Area
❍
❍
CIO Area
---
A
AR Area
❍
L
LR Area
❍
T
TC Area
Timer PVs
---
×
TU
C
---
CU
TC Area
Counter PVs
---
W
×
Allocation
CS/CJ-series
Allocation
❍
---
CIO Area
HR Area
AR Area
×
AR Area
---
---
LR Area (See note 1.)
TC Area
Timer PVs
---
×
TC Area
Timer PVs
TC area,
Timer Completion Flags
TC Area
Counter PVs
TC area,
Counter Completion Flags
--×
---
TC Area
Counter PVs
---
---
---
---
---
---
WR
TK
D
--DM Area
--❍
--DM Area
--❍
Task Flags
DM Area
E
EM Area
(See note 2.)
❍
EM Area
Current bank
E0_to EC_
---
---
---
Not for EM Area
Host Link Current bank
---
EM Area
EM bank 0 to C
❍
Not for
Host Link
❍
Not for
Host Link
×
×
×
×
Not for
Host Link
×
❍
Not for
Host Link
Not for
Host Link
❍: OK ×: NG
Since the AR area bits of the CVM1/CV series PLCs are allocated to the system, they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use.
The range of respective area varies with the type of PLC.
Note
(1) LR 00000 to LR 00199 are converted to CIO 01000 to CIO 01199.
(2) The EM Area is supported only by the C200HX/HG/HE-(Z)E PLCs.
To set the data memory (DM), specify the word number and then the bit number (00 to 15).
191
Section 5-3
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
5-3-2
Turning ON (Lit) and OFF (Unlit) the Lamps
(Changing the Contents of Allocated Bits)
The following describes the procedure to change the lamp display status on
the NT20 by changing the contents of the allocated bits.
To change the lamp display status on the NT20, turn ON and OFF the lamp
control bit allocated in the PLC.
PLC
NT20
Lamp #1 Lamp #2
Allocated bit (Lamp #1)
1
Lit
Unlit
1 (ON)
Allocated bit (Lamp #2)
2
0 (OFF)
The lamp bit indicates the lamp status as follows:
0 (OFF): Unlit
1 (ON): Lit (reverse display) or flashing
1,2,3...
1. Use the Support Tool to set the PLC memory area where the lamp bit is to
be allocated to.
2. Register the lamps to the screen when creating the screen data by using
the Support Tool.
3. Create a PLC program to turn ON/OFF the lamp bit.
Use the Support Tool to set the lamp display attributes whether the lamp is lit
or flashing when the lamp control bit is turned ON.
Application Example to Make the Lamp Light or Flash
This example gives a procedure to control the bits to move a robot arm and
turning the lamps ON and OFF.
• Support Tool Settings
Allocate the memory as shown below by using the Support Tool.
Lamp #0: Word 000200 (output bit to raise robot arm), guide display message “UP”
Lamp #1: Word 000201 (output bit to lower robot arm), guide display message “DOWN”
Lamp #2: Word 000202 (output bit to rotate robot arm counterclockwise),
guide display message “C/CLOCK”
Lamp #3: Word 000203 (output bit to rotate robot arm clockwise), guide
display message “CLOCK”
Lamp #4: Word 000204 (output bit to clamp rotate robot arm), guide display message “CLAMP”
Lamp #5: Word 000205 (output bit to unclamp rotate robot arm), guide display message “UNCLAMP”
Contents registered to the screen: Lamp #0 to #5
192
Section 5-3
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
Line 1
Process 3
Conveyor Loading Robot Arm
UP
C/
CLOCK
Raise:
Lower:
Counterclockwise:
Clockwise:
Clamp:
Unclamp:
Lamp#0
Lamp#1
Lamp#2
Lamp#3
Lamp#4
Lamp#5
CLAMP
CLOCK
UNCLAMP
DOWN
• PLC Ladder Program
No PLC ladder program is required to control the NT20. Only a program to
control the robot arm movements is required.
• NT20 Operation
When the ladder program to control the robot arm is executed, the lamps
on the NT20 screen turn ON and OFF in synchronization with the robot
arm movement.
For example, lamp #0 lights when the robot arm moves up and goes out
when it stops moving up.
5-3-3
Allocated Bits and Display of Touch Switches
Method for PLC Notification and NT20 Control
Two types of bit can be allocated to touch switches: notify bits - which serve to
notify status to the PLC - and control bits, lamp bit, which control the lighting
(flashing) of the touch switches. (For other types of function, only lamp bits
can be allocated.) When a touch switch is pressed the notify bit status
changes and, when the lamp bit is ON, the touch switch lights (or flashes).
Press
NT20
START
abcde
PLC
Notification bit
1
Control
1
←1
Lights
In order to notify the PLC of the status of a touch switch, the touch switch
must be allocated to a specified PLC bit so that it can be managed. Designate
the area and bit number.
To use touch switches for notification to the PLC, the following settings must
be made using the Support Tool: “touch switch” – “bit setting” – “notify bit”.
• Types of Notification Operation
When using Ver. 5 of the direct connection function, the notification operation when the touch switch is pressed can be selected from the following
four types (with Ver. 4 direct connection, the type is fixed as “momentary”):
• Momentary
When the touch switch is pressed the bit comes ON; when it is released the bit goes OFF.
• Alternate
193
Section 5-3
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
Each time the touch switch is pressed, the bit status changes from ON
to OFF or OFF to ON.
• Set
When the touch switch is pressed, the bit comes ON and remains ON
even if the switch is pressed again.
• Reset
When the touch switch is pressed, the bit goes OFF and remains OFF
even if the switch is pressed again.
• Notification Operations
The touch switch notification operations are as follows:
Type of
Notification
Operation
Momentary
Alternate
Set
Reset
When Using Host Link or
NT Link with DM Area
When Using C200H Direct
Communications or NT Link
with other than DM Area
(3) Notification in bit units
(1) Notification in word units
(other bits go OFF)
(2) Notification in word units
(4) Notification in bit units
(however, the word contents are read on display
and notification is based on
this reading)
When using touch switch input notification, note the following points:
• In the case of (1), the other bits in the same word as the notification bit
are turned OFF by the notification operation.
• In the case of (2), notification is executed on the basis of the contents
of the word before display, which means that the other bits are not rewritten. However, if the word contents are changed at the PLC, they will
be rewritten based on the contents before display.
• If the screen is switched while a momentary key is being pressed, the
touch switch itself disappears, so the status “OFF” is indicated. In the
case of (1) this means that the other bits in the word will also be turned
OFF.
• When using the host link, or NT link with the DM area, do not allocate
momentary touch switches and other types of touch switch to the same
word, since the notification operations are different.
In the case of (3) and (4), the notification operation has no influence on the
other bits in the word.
• Possible Bit Allocations
Notify bits and lamp bits for touch switches can be allocated to the areas
of the PLC memory listed in the following table.
Symbol
C-series
Allocation
CVM1/CV -series
Allocation
CS/CJ-series
None
H
IR Area
HR Area
❍
❍
CIO Area
---
❍
---
CIO Area
HR Area
A
AR Area
❍
AR Area
×
AR Area
L
LR Area
❍
---
---
LR Area (See note 1.)
T
TC Area
Timer PVs
---
×
TC Area
Timer PVs
---
×
TC Area
Timer PVs
TC area,
Timer Completion Flags
TU
194
---
---
Allocation
❍
Not for
Host Link
❍
Not for
Host Link
×
×
Section 5-3
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
C
CU
TC Area
Counter PVs
---
W
×
×
---
TC Area
Counter PVs
---
---
---
---
---
---
TC Area
Counter PVs
TC area,
Counter Completion Flags
WR
TK
---
---
---
---
Task Flags
D
E
DM Area
EM Area
(See note 2.)
❍
❍
DM Area
EM Area
Current bank
E0_to EC_
---
---
---
❍
DM Area
Not for EM Area
Host Link Current bank
---
×
×
Not for
Host Link
×
❍
Not for
Host Link
EM Area
EM bank 0 to C
Not for
Host Link
❍: OK ×: NG
Since all the CVM1/CV-series AR area bits are allocated to the system, they
cannot be used for applications not related to the system.
The range of each memory area differs according to the PLC type.
Note
(1) LR 00000 to LR 00199 are converted to CIO 01000 to CIO 01199.
(2) The EM Area is supported only by the C200HX/HG/HE-(Z)E PLCs.
When making a data memory (DM) specification, specify the bit number (00 to
15) following the word number.
5-3-4
Lit (Flashing) and Unlit Touch Switch Status
(Changing the Status of Allocated Bits)
This section describes how to change the status of allocated bits and thereby
the status of the touch switches displayed by the NT20.
The status of touch switches displayed by the NT20 is changed by switching
the control bits allocated in the PLC memory ON and OFF.
PLC
NT20
Allocated bit (touch switch #1)
1
1 (ON)
Lit
Touch switch #1
The status of the lamp bit reflects the touch switch status, as follows:
0 (OFF): Unlit
1 (ON): Lit (inverse display) or flashing
1,2,3...
1. Use the Support Tool to allocate the touch switch lamp bits to the PLC
memory.
2. When creating the screen data using the Support Tool, register the touch
switch for a screen.
3. Create the PLC program to switch the lamp bit of the touch switch ON and
OFF.
Set whether the lamp lights continuously or flashes when the bit comes ON
by setting the touch switch display attribute with the Support Tool.
195
Section 5-3
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
5-3-5
Notifying the Host That a Switch Has Been Pressed
(Determining Touch Switch Status)
This section describes how the status of a touch switch (whether it has been
pressed or not) is ascertained.
With the NT20, when a touch switch is pressed, the notify bit allocated to that
touch switch in the PLC memory is automatically updated.
Touch switch #1
NT20
PLC
Allocated notify bit (touch switch #1)
1
Depending on the set operation type, the status of the allocated bit for touch
switch status notification will be controlled in one of the following ways:
Momentary:
Alternate:
Set:
Reset:
0 (OFF) ... Not pressed
1 (ON) ... Pressed
The allocated bit is switched to 1 (ON) if currently 0, and
to 0 (OFF) if currently 1.
The allocated notify bit is forcibly switched to 1 (ON).
The allocated notify bit is forcibly switched to 0 (OFF).
In order to determine the status of a touch switch, the status of the touch
switch notification bit allocated to it is determined.
The touch switch notify bits can be allocated to the following areas of the PLC
memory.
Symbol
C-series
AllocaCVM1/CV -series
tion
❍
CIO Area
Allocation
❍
CS/CJ-series
CIO Area
Allocation
❍
None
IR Area
H
HR Area
❍
---
---
HR Area
Not for
Host Link
A
L
AR Area
LR Area
❍
❍
AR Area
---
×
---
AR Area
LR Area (See note 1.)
T
TC Area
Timer PVs
×
TC Area
Timer PVs
×
TC Area
Timer PVs
❍
Not for
Host Link
×
TU
---
---
---
---
TC area,
Timer Completion Flags
×
C
TC Area
Counter PVs
×
TC Area
Counter PVs
×
TC Area
Counter PVs
×
CU
---
---
---
---
×
W
---
---
---
---
TC area,
Counter Completion Flags
WR
TK
---
---
---
---
Task Flags
Not for
Host Link
×
D
E
DM Area
EM Area
(See note 2.)
---
❍
❍
DM Area
EM Area
Current bank
---
DM Area
EM Area
Current bank
EM Area
EM bank 0 to C
❍
Not for
Host Link
Not for
Host Link
E0_to EC_
---
❍
Not for
Host Link
---
❍: OK ×: NG
Since all the CVM1/CV-series AR area bits are allocated to the system, they
cannot be used for applications not related to the system.
196
Section 5-3
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
The range of each memory area differs according to the PLC type.
Note
(1) LR 00000 to LR 00199 are converted to CIO 01000 to CIO 01199.
(2) The EM Area is supported only by the C200HX/HG/HE-(Z)E PLCs.
When making a data memory (DM) specification, specify the bit number (00 to
15) following the word number.
1,2,3...
1. Use the Support Tool to allocate the touch switch notify bits to the PLC
memory.
2. When creating the screen data using the Support Tool, register the touch
switch for a screen.
3. Create a PLC program to determine whether the touch switch notify bit is
ON or OFF.
The touch switch notification operations are as follows:
Type of
Notification
Operation
When Using Host Link or
NT Link with DM Area
Momentary
(1) Notification in word units
(other bits go OFF)
Alternate
Set
Reset
(2)Notification in word units
(however, the word contents are read on display
and notification is based
on this reading)
When Using C200H Direct
Communications or NT
Link with other than DM
Area
(3) Notification in bit units
(4) Notification in bit units
When using touch switch input notification, note the following points:
• In the case of (1), the other bits in the same word as the notification bit
are turned OFF by the notification operation.
Press the
touch switch
Bit 15 14
0 1
1
0
0
1
Touch switch
notify bit
Bit 15 14
0 0
1
0
1
0
Bits other than notify
bits are set to 0 (OFF).
• In the case of (2), notification is executed on the basis of the contents
of the word before display, which means that the other bits are not rewritten. However, if the word contents are changed at the PLC, they will
be rewritten based on the contents before display.
• If the screen is switched while a momentary key is being pressed, the
touch switch itself disappears, so the status “OFF” is indicated. In the
case of (1) this means that the other bits in the word will also be turned
OFF.
• When using the host link, or NT link with the DM area, do not allocate
momentary touch switches and other types of touch switch to the same
word, since the notification operations are different.
In the case of (3) and (4), the notification operation has no influence on the
other bits in the word.
197
Section 5-3
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
Example of Determination of Touch Switch Status
This example uses the touch switches as normal switches (bits) in order to
use the NT20 as an operating panel.
• Support Tool Settings
Make the following settings using the Support Tool.
Touch switch #10:
Function “Notify Bit”
Display attribute “Light”
Control bit 05000 (Run flag) ... Guide message: “RUN”
Notify bit 06000
Touch switch #11:
Function “Notify Bit”
Display attribute “Light”
Control bit 05000 (Stop flag) ... Guide message: “STOP”
Notify bit 06001
Data registered for the screen: touch switch #10, touch switch #11
Touch switch #10
Line 1
RUN
STOP
Touch switch #11
• PLC Program
Create the following ladder program.
1 scan ON
Touch switch #10 notify bit
↓
↓
11212
06000
Stop flag
05001
(touch switch #11 control bit)
06001
← Touch switch #11 notify bit
05001
Touch switch #10 notify bit
↓
06000
06001
05000
05000
198
Run flag
(touch switch #10 control bit)
↑
Touch switch #11 notify bit
Section 5-3
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
• Program Operation
The operation when the program is executed is presented below.
Execute program
Stop flag
:
Stop touch switch :
1 (ON)
Lit
Press Run touch switch.
Run flag
:
Run touch switch :
Stop flag
:
Stop touch switch :
5-3-6
Press Stop touch switch.
1 (ON)
Lit
0 (OFF)
Unlit
Run flag
Run touch switch
Stop flag
Stop touch switch
:
:
:
:
0 (OFF)
Unlit
1 (ON)
Lit
Notification of Numbers to the PLC
The following describes how the numerical data input at the NT20 by using
the numeral setting function is ascertained by the PLC.
In order to determine when numerical data has been input at the NT20, the
numeral setting strobe flag in the PT status notify area is used. In order to
determine the upgraded numeral memory table entry number, the “upgraded
memory table entry” in the PT status notify area is used.
When numerical data is input at the NT20, this is automatically indicated in
the PT status notify area (PT → PLC) allocated in the PLC memory as follows.
Notification of upgrade:
PT status numeral setting strobe
flag turned ON (1)
Upgraded numeral table entry number:Stored in the “upgraded memory table entry”
When the PLC reads the “upgraded memory table entry” at the leading edge
of the numeral setting strobe flag, it determines the numeral memory table
entry number in which the numerical data that was changed at the NT20 is
stored.
NT20
12345678
PLC
Numeral memory table entry 1
12345678 PT status notify area
Currently displayed screen
Content upgrade
memory table
Table entry No.
Numeral setting
strobe flag
Allocated words (numeral table entry 1)
12345678
Start
Start + 1
PT status
199
Section 5-3
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
Upgraded Memory Table Entry in the PT Status Notify Area and PT Status
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit
Word
m+1
0
Numeral memory table entry # (BCD, 3 digits) Upgraded memory table entry
PT status
m+2
0
PT status
0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Bit
-
0
0
-
0
0
0
PT status
Numeral setting strobe flag
Numeral memory table entry #: 000 to 127
Data is written to the upgraded memory table entry as three digits of BCD
(binary coded decimal) data.
When the numeral setting strobe flag bit has been updated in the PLC it
returns to the OFF (0) status.
For details on the method for storing a number in the word allocated for the
numeral memory table entry, refer to 5-2-1 Displaying the Contents of Allocated Words of Memory Table Entries on page 180.
• Restrictions on Allocating Words
The PT status notify area can be allocated to the PLC memory areas listed
in the following table.
Symbol
C-series
AllocaCVM1/CV -series
tion
❍
CIO Area
Allocation
❍
CS/CJ-series
CIO Area
Allocation
❍
None
IR Area
H
HR Area
❍
---
---
HR Area
Not for
Host Link
A
L
AR Area
LR Area
❍
❍
AR Area
---
×
---
AR Area
LR Area (See note 1.)
❍
Not for
Host Link
T
TC Area
Timer PVs
×
TC Area
Timer PVs
×
TC Area
Timer PVs
×
TU
---
---
---
---
TC area,
Timer Completion Flags
×
C
×
---
W
---
---
---
---
TC Area
Counter PVs
TC area,
Counter Completion Flags
WR
×
---
TC Area
Counter PVs
---
×
CU
TC Area
Counter PVs
---
TK
---
---
---
---
Task Flags
D
E
DM Area
EM Area
(See note 2.)
❍
❍
DM Area
EM Area
Current bank
E0_to EC_
---
---
---
❍
DM Area
Not for EM Area
Host Link Current bank
---
×
Not for
Host Link
×
❍
Not for
Host Link
EM Area
EM bank 0 to C
Not for
Host Link
❍: OK ×: NG
Since all the CVM1/CV-series AR area bits are allocated to the system, they
cannot be used for applications not related to the system.
The range of each memory area differs according to the PLC type.
Note
(1) LR 00000 to LR 00199 are converted to CIO 01000 to CIO 01199.
(2) The EM Area is supported only by the C200HX/HG/HE-(Z)E PLCs.
200
Section 5-3
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
1,2,3...
1. Use the Support Tool to allocate the PT status notify area (PT → PLC) to
the PLC memory.
2. Using the Support Tool, create a numeral setting screen and allocate the
numeral memory table entry to the PLC memory.
3. Create a PLC program for reading the “upgraded memory table entry” in
the PT status notify area when the numeral setting strobe flag in the PT
status notify area comes ON (1).
4. Read the allocated word for the numeral memory table entry number read
in step 3.
Example of Reading a Numeral Memory Table Entry into Which a Numerical Value Has Been Input
This example shows the reading of the numeral memory table entry number
after a value has been changed by inputting numerical data at the NT20.
• Setting at the Support Tool
Make the following settings using the Support Tool.
Allocated word for the PT status notify area: 0110
Numeral memory table entry No.3: DM 0005 (saved word: One)
Numeral memory table entry No.4: DM 0006 (saved word: One)
Data registered for the screens:
Numeral setting 1 ... Reference table “numeral memory table entry #3”
Numeral setting 2 ... Reference table “numeral memory table entry #4”
Numeral memory table entry number 3 (4-digit input)
Line 1
Qty.
800
unit
30
unit
Defect limit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0 CLR +/−
Numeral memory table entry number 4 (4-digit input)
• PLC Program
Create the following PLC ladder program.
11211
@MOV(21)
111
DM0105
(1)
Notification word for upgraded memory table entry
Word that stores the numeral memory table entry number
Numeral setting
strobe flag
• Program Operation
1,2,3...
1. When the numeral setting strobe flag (bit 11211) comes ON (1), the contents of word 0111 (the word where the upgraded memory table entry is
located) are transferred to DM 0105. The number of the numeral memory
table entry that contains the upgraded data is stored in DM 0105 (in this
case it is 0003 or 0004).
If the numeral memory table entry is allocated to a PLC word, the value input to it can be read easily by referring to the allocated word.
201
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
Section 5-3
In this case, the contents of numeral memory table entry #3 is stored in DM
0005 and the contents of numeral table entry #4 is stored in DM 0006.
202
Section 5-4
NT20 Status Control
5-4
NT20 Status Control
The status of the NT20 can be controlled from the PLC by writing control data
to the “PT status control bits” of the PT status control area allocated in the
PLC memory.
PLC
NT20
Screen off
PT status control area
Screen switch setting
Copy memory table
entry setting
Buzzer sounds
PT status control bits
5-4-1
Control data
Controllable NT20 Functions
PT Status Control Bits of the PT Status Control Area
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit
Word
n+3
0
PT status control bits
0
PT status control designation
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Bit
0
0
0
Item Controlled
Screen display
(Note 1)
1 (ON)
ON
0 (OFF)
OFF
Processing priority
registration
(Note 2)
Continuous buzzer
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Intermittent buzzer
Backlight mode
ON
ON
OFF
Flash
Note 1: The backlighting is on when the
screen display bit is set to ON
and off when the screen display
bit is set to OFF.
Note 2: Priority registration is only valid
when NT link (1:N) is set.
The PLC status control bits remain unchanged if the NT20 status is changed
with the screen attributes or memory switches, which means that the status of
the PT status control bits does not match the actual status of the NT20. For
example, the buzzer may sound even though the setting for continuous buzzer
bit 13 is “OFF”.
In this kind of case, control the NT20 by using the PT status control bits.
• Screen Display (Bit 15)
The screen display bit is used to display and clear the screen to prevent
“burn-in” on the CRT. Set bit 15 to 0 (OFF) to clear the screen. The backlight will also go OFF at the same time.
When the screen has been cleared, the last displayed screen can be redisplayed either by turning Bit 15 ON, or by pressing a touch switch. The
backlight will also light at the same time.
203
Section 5-4
NT20 Status Control
Note that if the screen is OFF by the backlight OFF or EL screen OFF function with Bit 15 ON (1), turn Bit 15 OFF (0) once and then turn it back ON
(1) to redisplay the screen.
Note
Instead of turning Bit 15 ON, a screen can be displayed by specifying its
screen number. For details on screen switching, refer to 5-1-4 Switching the
Screen Display on page 172.
• Priority Registration for Processing (1:N NT Link Only) (Bit 14)
It is possible to register one of the multiple PTs connected by the 1:N NT
link method to have processing priority. The PT for which bit 14 is set ON
(1) is given priority over the other PTs and has a higher response speed
for display, touch switches, etc.
When bit 14 is turned OFF (0), this registration is canceled and the normal
response speed is reinstated. If priority registration is set for more than one
PT, the one for which the registration was made last will have priority.
By monitoring C200HX/HG/HE words, the unit number of the PT for which
priority registration has been set can be confirmed. For details on the monitoring operation at the PLC, refer to the manual for the PLC used.
Connection to RS-232C Port of C200HX/HG/HE
Word
CI0 265
(standard
port)
CI0 284
(port A)
(See note.)
CI0 285
(port B)
(See note.)
Note
204
Bit
Function
0
1
Unit No.0 Communications in progress flag, ON when connected
Unit No.1 Communications in progress flag, ON when connected
2
3
Unit No.2 Communications in progress flag, ON when connected
Unit No.3 Communications in progress flag, ON when connected
4
5
Unit No.4 Communications in progress flag, ON when connected
Unit No.5 Communications in progress flag, ON when connected
6
7
Unit No.6 Communications in progress flag, ON when connected
Unit No.7 Communications in progress flag, ON when connected
8
9
Unit No.0 Priority registration lamp, ON when registered
Unit No.1 Priority registration lamp, ON when registered
10
11
Unit No.2 Priority registration lamp, ON when registered
Unit No.3 Priority registration lamp, ON when registered
12
13
Unit No.4 Priority registration lamp, ON when registered
Unit No.5 Priority registration lamp, ON when registered
14
15
Unit No.6 Priority registration lamp, ON when registered
Unit No.7 Priority registration lamp, ON when registered
This is the port of the communications port.
Section 5-4
NT20 Status Control
• Continuous Buzzer (Bit 13) and Intermittent Buzzer (Bit 12)
In the case of both buzzers, when the respective bit is ON the buzzer
sounds and when it is OFF the buzzer does not sound.
The “continuous buzzer” sounds continuously without interruption.
The “intermittent buzzer” sounds for 0.5 seconds at 0.5 second intervals.
If both Bit 13 and Bit 12 are turned ON simultaneously, Bit 13 takes priority
and the continuous buzzer is selected.
Another way to stop a buzzer sounding is to use a touch switch to which the
buzzer stop attribute function is allocated.
Whether or not the buzzer actually sounds also depends on the setting of the
“buzzer” memory switch of the NT20. For details on this setting, refer to 3-8-2
Using the Buzzer on page 107.
Besides using PT status control bit operations, the buzzer status can also be
controlled by the screen attributes. The screen attributes are set by using the
Support Tool. The functions that can be set using the screen attributes are the
following:
Buzzer attribute: Set whether or not the buzzer will sound when the
screen is displayed and, if it sounds, the type of buzzer.
• Backlight Mode (Bit 8)
If bit 8 is turned ON when the screen is displayed (bit 15 = ON), the screen
is made to flash using the backlight. When bit 8 is turned OFF, normal display is resumed.
When the screen is not displayed (bit 15 = OFF), the backlight mode is invalid.
It is possible to use NT20 switch settings to make the backlight go off automatically after a set time during which there have been no operations.
Besides using PT status control bit operations, the backlight status can also
be controlled by the screen attributes. The screen attributes are set by using
the Support Tool. The functions that can be set using the screen attributes are
the following:
Backlight:
5-4-2
Set whether the backlight will be continuously or intermittently lit when the screen is displayed.
How to Control NT20 Functions
This section describes how to control the functions of the NT20.
• Restrictions on Allocating Words
The PT status control area (PLC → PT) can be allocated to the PLC memory areas listed in the following table.
Symbol
C-series
Allocation
CVM1/CV -series
Allocation
CS/CJ-series
None
H
IR Area
HR Area
❍
❍
CIO Area
---
❍
---
CIO Area
HR Area
A
AR Area
❍
AR Area
×
AR Area
L
LR Area
❍
---
---
LR Area (See note 1.)
T
TC Area
Timer PVs
×
TC Area
Timer PVs
×
TC Area
Timer PVs
Allocation
❍
Not for
Host Link
❍
Not for
Host Link
×
205
Section 5-4
NT20 Status Control
TU
---
---
---
---
C
×
---
TC Area
Counter PVs
---
×
CU
TC Area
Counter PVs
---
---
W
---
---
---
---
TC area,
Timer Completion Flags
TC Area
Counter PVs
TC area,
Counter Completion Flags
WR
TK
D
--DM Area
--❍
--DM Area
--❍
Task Flags
DM Area
E
EM Area
(See note 2.)
❍
EM Area
Current bank
E0_to EC_
---
---
---
×
×
Not for
Host Link
×
❍
Not for EM Area
Host Link Current bank
---
×
Not for
Host Link
EM Area
EM bank 0 to C
Not for
Host Link
❍: OK ×: NG
Since all the CVM1/CV-series AR area bits are allocated to the system, they
cannot be used for applications not related to the system.
The range of each memory area differs according to the PLC type.
Note
(1) LR 0000 to LR 00199 are converted to CIO 01000 to CIO 01199.
(2) The EM Area is supported only by the C200HX/HG/HE-(Z)E PLCs.
1,2,3...
1. Use the Support Tool to set the area at the PLC used for allocation of the
PT status control area (PLC → PT).
2. Write a PLC program for writing the control data into the “PT status control
bit” of the PT status control area.
• Timing for Control of the PT Status Control Bit
The PT status control bit is not read when the NT20 is started up. It is read,
and control executed, only when the contents of the PT status control bit
are read for the first time after the NT20 is started up.
Since NT20 status control is executed when the bit corresponding to the
PT status control bit changes, in order to perform the same control again
the corresponding bit must be specified again.
Example of Use of PT Status Control Bit
The example below explains how operation with the PT status control bit can
be used to use the NT20 like a warning lamp.
• Setting with the Support Tool
Make the following setting with the Support Tool.
Allocated word for PT status control area: Word 0100
• PLC Program
Create the PLC ladder program as follows.
206
Section 5-4
NT20 Status Control
09002
09003
@MOV(21)
#A000
103
09003
09002
09003
@MOV(21)
#9000
103
@ANDW(34)
103
#CFFF
103
(1)
Display screen, sound buzzer continuously
PT status control word
(2)
Display screen, sound buzzer intermittently
PT status control word
(3)
PT status control word
"0" set for continuous and intermittent buzzer
sounds only
PT status control word
• Program Operation
1,2,3...
1. The PT status control bits are set as shown below when bit 09002 turns
OFF. This command block is not executed until bit 09003 is ON.
Screen display (bit 15)
1 (ON)
Continuous buzzer (bit 13)
1 (ON)
The NT20 continuous buzzer sounds.
2. The PT status control bits are set as shown below when bit 09003 turns
OFF.
Screen display (bit 15)
1 (ON)
Intermittent buzzer (bit 12)
1 (ON)
The NT20 intermittent buzzer sounds
3. The PT status control bits are set as shown below when both bits 09002
and 09003 turn ON.
Continuous buzzer (bit 13)
0 (OFF)
Intermittent buzzer (bit 12)
0 (OFF)
The NT20 buzzer stops.
207
Notification of the Operating Status to the PLC (Determining the NT20 Operating Status)
5-5
Section 5-5
Notification of the Operating Status to the PLC
(Determining the NT20 Operating Status)
The status (operating status, etc.) of the NT20 can be determined from the
PLC by reading the “PT status” word in the PT status notify area allocated in
the PLC memory.
PLC
NT20
PT status notify area
Currently displayed screen
Upgraded memory table entry
PT stopped
5-5-1
Screen
number
PT status
Ascertainable NT20 Status (Notified Operating Status)
PT Status Notification Bits of the PT Status Notify Area
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit
Word
m+2
PT status notification bits
15
14
13
0
0
12 11
0
PT status
0
10
9
8
0
0
0
Bit
PT operating status
(1(ON) = operating / 0 (OFF) = stopped)
Screen switch strobe flag
Numeral setting strobe flag
!Caution Make the settings so that the PT control area and PT status notify area do not
overlap.
• PT Operating Status (Bit 15)
When the NT20 is in the RUN mode this bit is set to ON (1). In other modes
and while the system menu is displayed it is OFF (0). When this bit is OFF
allocated bits and words cannot be read or written to.
During the run mode, ON (1) is periodically written into this bit. In order to
check whether the NT20 is operating normally or not, write OFF (0) to this
bit: if it is ON (1) 30 seconds later the NT20 is running, and if it is OFF (0),
the NT20 is stopped.
!Caution To ensure system safety, be sure to periodically read the PT operating status
bit from the host in order to ensure that the PT is always operating normally.
208
Notification of the Operating Status to the PLC (Determining the NT20 Operating Status)
Section 5-5
• Screen Switch Strobe Flag (Bit 12)
When the screen displayed on the NT20 is switched by a designation from
the PLC or by the standalone function, the screen switch strobe flag comes
ON (1). On notification to the PLC, it returns to the OFF (0) status.
For details on how the screen switch strobe flag is used, refer to 5-1-5 Notifying the PLC of the Display Screen (to Display the Number of Currently
Displayed Screen) on page 174.
• Numeral Setting Strobe Flag (Bit 11)
When numerical data is input to a numeral memory table entry using the
NT20 numeral setting function, the numeral setting strobe flag comes ON
(1). On notification to the PLC, it returns to the OFF (0) status.
For details on how the numeral setting strobe flag is used, refer to 5-3-6
Notification of Numbers to the PLC page 199.
5-5-2
Reading the NT20 Operating Status
This section explains how to determine the status of the NT20, and ascertain
its operating status.
To ascertain the operating status of the NT20, “PT status” is used.
The NT20 automatically notifies the PLC of information such as the operating
status in the PT status word of the PT status notify area (PT → PLC) allocated
in PLC memory as shown below.
Notification of operation mode:
PT operating status
Notification of screen switching:
Screen switch strobe flag
Notification of numerical data upgrade: Numeral setting strobe flag
• Restrictions on Allocating Words
The PT status notify area (PT → PLC) can be allocated to the PLC memory
areas listed in the following table.
Symbol
C-series
AllocaCVM1/CV -series
tion
❍
CIO Area
Allocation
❍
CS/CJ-series
CIO Area
Allocation
❍
None
IR Area
H
HR Area
❍
---
---
HR Area
A
AR Area
❍
AR Area
×
AR Area
L
LR Area
❍
---
---
LR Area (See note 1.)
T
TC Area
Timer PVs
×
TC Area
Timer PVs
×
TC Area
Timer PVs
×
TU
---
---
---
---
×
C
×
---
TC Area
Counter PVs
---
×
CU
TC Area
Counter PVs
---
---
W
---
---
---
---
TC area,
Timer Completion Flags
TC Area
Counter PVs
TC area,
Counter Completion Flags
WR
TK
D
--DM Area
--❍
--DM Area
--❍
Task Flags
DM Area
E
EM Area
(See note 2.)
❍
EM Area
Current bank
E0_to EC_
---
---
---
Not for EM Area
Host Link Current bank
---
EM Area
EM bank 0 to C
Not for
Host Link
❍
Not for
Host Link
×
×
Not for
Host Link
×
❍
Not for
Host Link
Not for
Host Link
❍: OK ×: NG
209
Notification of the Operating Status to the PLC (Determining the NT20 Operating Status)
Section 5-5
Since all the CVM1/CV-series AR area bits are allocated to the system, they
cannot be used for applications not related to the system.
The range of each memory area differs according to the PLC type.
Note
(1) LR 00000 to LR 00199 are converted to CIO 01000 to CIO 01199.
(2) The EM Area is supported only by the C200HX/HG/HE-(Z)E PLCs.
1,2,3...
1. Use the Support Tool to allocate the PT status notify area (PT → PLC) to
the PLC memory.
2. Write a PLC program to read the “PT status” word of the PT status notify
area and check each bit status.
• Timing of PT Status Notify Bit Notification
The contents of the PT status notify area (PT → PLC) are written to the
PLC whenever the status of the NT20 changes during operation.
Example of PT Status Notify Bit Application
In the example below, the status of the NT20 is checked by PT status notify bit
notification.
• Settings with the Support Tool
Make the following setting with the Support Tool.
Allocated word for PT status notify area: Word 0110
• PLC Program
Create the following PLC ladder program.
11215
@MOV(21)
#0001
DM0001
(1)
PT stopped
Word that stores the PT status
@MOV(21)
#0002
DM0001
(2)
PT running
Word that stores the PT status
11215
• Program Operation
1,2,3...
1. When the PT operating status (bit 11215) is OFF (0), “1” (PT stopped) is
stored in DM0001.
2. When the PT operating status (bit 11215) is ON (1), “2” (PT running) is
stored in DM0001.
210
SECTION 6
Using RS-232C Communications
This section describes how to carry out communications via the RS-232C interface used with the NT20-ST128, focusing
on the commands.
6-1
6-2
Table of Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
212
RS-232C Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
213
6-2-1
Communications Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
213
6-2-2
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
214
6-3
Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
216
6-4
Memory Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
218
6-5
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
221
6-5-1
Notification and Control of Touch Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
221
6-5-2
Notification of Numeral Setting Input and Touch Switch Status . . .
224
6-6
Controlling the NT20 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
227
6-7
Terminal Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
229
6-8
Key to Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
234
6-8-1
234
Use of Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
211
Section 6-1
Table of Commands
6-1
Table of Commands
Operating Commands
Type
Screen control
Memory table operation
Lamp and Touch Switch
Display
Touch Switch and Function
Key Input
System Control
Notification
Command
[ESC] 0
Name
Display Specified Screen.
Page
216
[ESC] X
[ESC] B
Request Screen Number.
Write Character-string Memory Table.
216
218
[ESC] C
[ESC] D
4-digit Write Numeral Memory Table
8-digit Write Numeral Memory Table
219
219
[ESC] /
[ESC] K
Copy Memory Table.
Lamp and Touch Switch Display (Bit Specification)
220
223
[ESC] Q
Lamp and Touch Switch Display (Number Specification)
223
[ESC] R
[ESC] U
Lamp and Touch Switch Display Status Enquiry
Touch Switch Disable.
224
227
[ESC] V
[ESC] P
Touch Switch Enable.
Screen Display Control
227
227
[ESC] T
[ESC] W
Buzzer Control
System Menu Display Permission
228
228
[ESC] Y
[ESC] E
Screen Number Response
4-digit Number Input Notify
217
225
[ESC] F
[ESC] S
8-digit Number Input Notify
Lamp and Touch Switch Display Status Response
225
224
[ESC] J
[ESC] H
Touch Switch Bit Output (from NT20 to Host)
Touch Switch Number Output (from NT20 to Host)
226
226
Terminal Commands
Type
Character size
Command
[ESC] &
Name
Clear Screen.
Page
229
[ESC] )
[ESC] *
Character Specify Size
Specify Character Enlargement.
229
230
[ESC] !
[ESC] “
Normal Display
Set Inverse Display.
230
230
[ESC] #
[ESC] $
End Inverse Display.
Set Flashing Display.
231
231
Character String Display
[ESC] %
[ESC] +
End Flashing Display.
Set Cursor Position.
231
232
Graphic Display
[ESC] 4
[ESC] 7
Specify Displayed Characters.
Draw Polyline.
232
233
[ESC] 8
Draw Circle.
233
Character Display
Attributes
212
Section 6-2
RS-232C Communications
6-2
RS-232C Communications
This section describes the communications procedure when using the NT20ST128 (RS-232C), and program flow using examples in BASIC.
6-2-1
Communications Procedure
The Host and NT20 communicate according to the following procedure.
1,2,3...
1. The RS-232C circuit must be opened (i.e., communications enabled) before communications can start.
2. Commands are used to control the PT and to receive notification from the
NT20.
3. Close the RS-232C circuit again after communications have been completed.
Host program
NT20 operation
RS-232C circuit
Open circuit
OPEN command
Send instruction
Receive instruction
PRINT # command
Open
status
Send instruction
Send instruction
LINE INPUT # command
CLOSE command
Close circuit
After a circuit has been opened, it can be used until it is closed again.
OPEN:
Opens the RS-232C circuit. The Host communications conditions are also set.
Refer to 3-5-7 Setting RS–232C Communications Conditions
(NT20-ST128) on page 99.
PRINT#:
Sends an instruction via the RS-232C circuit to the NT20.
LINE INPUT#: Receives a command from the NT20. [LINE INPUT] is used
when receiving input delimited by commas (,) or double quotation marks (").
CLOSE:
Closes the RS-232C circuit.
Refer to the Host's BASIC Manual for more details about the
commands.
Operation by Operating
Commands
The operating commands display monitored data from the production line and
messages to the factory workers. They are also used for NT20 control and
management.
The communications flow between the Host and NT20 differs according to the
following three cases:
Message from Host to
NT20
Host program
Message to PT
NT20 operation
Message operating command
Process message
Enquiry from Host to NT20
Host program
NT20 operation
Enquiry operating command
Enquiry
Receive command
Send response command
Receive command
Response operating command
213
Section 6-2
RS-232C Communications
Notification of Operation
at NT20 to the Host
Host program
NT20 operation
Notification operating command
Receive notification
Operation by Terminal
Commands
Send notification command
The terminal commands allow the NT20 to be used as a terminal of the Host
to display text and graphics independently of the screens stored in the NT20.
The Host sends a command and the NT20 processes the message. The
NT20 does not send back a response to the Host.
Host program
NT20 operation
Terminal command
Message to PT
6-2-2
Process message
Precautions
Some important points to consider when using commands are listed below.
Commands
If a personal computer is used as the host and a high-level language, such as
BASIC or C, is used for programming, commands are specified with ASCII
text strings.
In the descriptions in this section, parameters are given in lowercase letters.
When specifying commands, specify any text given in uppercase letters as is
and replace lowercase letters with ASCII text strings to specify the numeric
values of the parameters (BCD or hexadecimal) or the text strings for parameters. Any text given in square brackets [ ], however, represents one control
code, such as ESC or CR.
In the descriptions of commands, “4-digit BCD” indicates an ASCII text string
of a 4-digit BCD value and “4-digit hexadecimal” indicates an ASCII text string
of a 4-digit hexadecimal value. Do not specify BCD or hexadecimal values
directly. Always use ASCII text strings to represent them.
Example
The command format for the Four-digit Numeral Memory Table Write command is as follows:
[ESC]
C
d1
d2
d3
n1
n2
n3
n4
1B
43
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
Assuming that the following parameters were to be specified, the text string
given below would actually be sent.
d1 d2 d3: 014 (3-digit hexadecimal)
n1 n2 n3 n4: 1234 (4-digit BCD)
Note
Command Length
[ESC]
C
0
1
4
1
2
3
4
1B
43
30
31
34
31
32
33
34
In the descriptions of commands and responses, “**” indicates the specified
characters in ASCII (2-digit hexadecimal).
If a mistake during command specification results in a command being too
long, the correct length of the command is executed and the remainder is
ignored.
A timeout error results if a mistake during command specification results in a
command being too short.
214
Section 6-2
RS-232C Communications
Interval between
Transmitted Commands
As a small number of bytes is transmitted by the Host, the interval between
transmissions should not exceed 5 seconds if a command is divided up for
transmission. A timeout error occurs if the interval between transmissions
exceeds 5 seconds.
When commands are sent too frequently, a buffer overflow error may occur if
the NT20 cannot keep up with the command processing.
In order to prevent buffer overflow, use flow control.
Controlling PT Status with
Operating Commands
Control of the NT20 status by the operating commands is restricted by the
NT20 memory switch settings as listed below.
Operating command
Buzzer control command [ESC] T
Restriction from memory switch setting
Effective when “buzzer turned on”
Coordinate Specification
with the Terminal
Commands
The entire command is ignored if any point specified at coordinates X, Y with
the Terminal commands lies outside the screen.
Error Display
If the “automatic reset after communications” memory switch of the NT20 is
set to ON, no message is displayed when a communications error occurs.
However, time-out errors are displayed.
215
Section 6-3
Screen Display
6-3
Screen Display
This section describes the commands for switching the screen display of the
NT20S and the commands for ascertaining the screen number of the screen
currently displayed by the NT20.
The displayed screen can be also switched by pressing a touch switch for
which the screen number of the screen to be displayed has been registered.
For details on this method, refer to 4-7-2 Screen Switching Function on page
154.
To change the NT20 screen, use the Display Specified Screen Command. To
ascertain the screen number of the currently displayed screen, use the
Request Screen Number Command. When this command is executed, the
NT20 returns the Screen Number Response Command.
When the currently displayed NT20 screen is changed by pressing a touch
switch to which a screen number has been allocated, the Screen Number
Response Command is automatically sent from the NT20.
Display Specified Screen
Format
[ESC]
0
m1
m2
m3
m4
1B
30
* *
* *
* *
* *
m 1m 2m 3m 4: Number of displayed screen (4-digit hexadecimal)
0000: No display
0001 to 01F4: Screen #1 to #500
Description
The specified screen is displayed on the NT20 when a screen number is sent
from the Host with this command.
Request Screen Number
Format
[ESC]
x
1B
58
Description
Enquires what number screen is displayed on the NT20. The NT20 returns
the number of the displayed screen using the Screen Number Response
Command (refer to Screen Number Response on page 217).
216
Section 6-3
Screen Display
Screen Number Response
Format
[ESC]
Y
m1
m2
m3
[CR]
1B
59
* *
* *
* *
OD
m 1m 2 m 3: Number of displayed screen (4-digit hexadecimal)
000 to 1F4 (0 to 500)
Description
• The NT20 returns this command to report the currently displayed screen
number to the Host in response to the Request Screen Number Command (refer to Screen Number Response) sent from the Host.
• The new screen number is report to the Host with this command after the
displayed screen is switch with the Stand-alone functions (screen switch
function).
217
Section 6-4
Memory Tables
6-4
Memory Tables
This section explains the commands used for memory table operations.
To change the contents of a character string memory table entry, use the
Write Character-string Memory Table Command.
To change the contents of a numeral memory table entry, use a Write
Numeral Memory Table Command.
Note that different commands are used to write 4-digit and 8-digit numerical
values.
Values can be copied from one memory table entry to another of the same
type by using the Copy Memory Table Command.
Reference
• When the contents of an NT20 numeral memory table entry are changed
by numeral setting input, a Number Input Notify Command is automatically sent from the NT20 (refer to 6-5-2 Notification of Numeral Setting
Input and Touch Switch Status).
• By creating a bar graph screen and arranging for it to refer to a particular
numeral memory table entry, the display contents of the bar graph can be
updated by changing the contents of the numeral table entry.
Write Character-string Memory Table
Format
[ESC]
B
n1
n2
d1
d2
c1
c2
c3
cn
1B
42
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
n 1n 2: Character string length as a number of normal characters (2-digit hexadecimal) 01 to 20H (1 to 32)
d 1d 2: Character-string memory table entry number of write destination (2-digit hexadecimal) 00 to 7FH (0 to 127)
c 1c 2c 3 to c n : Character-string data
Description
Writes the character-string data to the character-string memory table entry.
The character-string data can contain a mixture of normal alphanumeric characters and marks. When determining the character string length, count each
mark as two normal characters.
!Caution If the actual character string is longer than the specified character string
length, the specified number of characters is written and the remainder are
discarded.
A timeout error message is displayed if the actual character string is shorter
than the specified character string length.
218
Section 6-4
Memory Tables
Four-digit Write Numeral Memory Table
Format
[ESC]
C
d1
d2
d3
n1
n2
n3
n4
1B
43
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
d 1d 2d 3: Numeral memory table entry number of write destination (3-digit hexadecimal)
000 to 07FH (0 to 127)
n 1n 2n 3n 4: Number data (4-digit BCD or 4-digit hexadecimal)
Description
• Writes the 4-digit number data (decimal or hexadecimal) to the specified
numeral memory table.
• If a 4-digit number data is written while an 8-digit numeral is displayed, the
lower 4 digits are updated.
!Caution This command cannot be used to write negative numbers. Use the 8-digit
Write Command (refer to Eight-digit Write Numeral Memory Table on
page 219).
Eight-digit Write Numeral Memory Table
Format
[ESC]
D
d1
d2
d3
n1
n2
n3
n4
n5
1B
44
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
n6
n7
n8
* *
* *
* *
d 1d 2d 3: Numeral memory table entry number of write destination
(3-digit hexadecimal) 000 to 07FH (0 to 127)
n 1n 2n 3n 4n 5n 6n 7n 8: Number data (8-digit BCD or 8-digit hexadecimal)
Description
• Writes the 8-digit number data (decimal or hexadecimal) to the specified
numeral memory table entry.
• To write a negative numeral (decimal), specify “F(46H)” for “n1” (in this
case, a 7-digit numeral is written.).
219
Section 6-4
Memory Tables
Copy Memory Table
Format
[ESC]
/
m1
s1
s2
s3
d1
d2
d3
1B
2F
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
m 1: Type of memory table
0 (30H): Character-string memory table
1 (31H): Numeral memory table
s 1s 2s 3: Copy source memory table entry number
000 to 127 (3-digit BCD)
d 1d 2d 3: Copy destination memory table entry number
000 to 127 (3-digit BCD)
Description
Copies the contents of the copy source memory table entry to the copy destination memory table entry. The memory table entry contents are copied to a
memory table entry of the same type: character-string memory table entry to
character-string memory table entry or numeral memory table entry to
numeral memory table entry .
220
Section 6-5
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
6-5
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
This section describes the commands for operating the lamps, touch
switches.
In order to change the display status (lit (flashing) or unlit) of a lamp or touch
switch, use the Lamp and Touch Switch Display Commands. There are two
such commands, one for bit specification and the other for number specification.
The Lamp and Touch Switch Display Status Enquiry Command is used to
ascertain the status of a lamp or touch switch. When this command is executed the NT20 returns the Lamp/Touch Switch Display Status Response
Command.
Reference
When the status of an NT20 touch switch is changed - for example by pressing it - the Touch Switch Number Output Command is sent to the host. When
a numerical value is input by pressing a touch switch to which a numeral setting function has been allocated, a Number Input Notify Command is sent to
the host.
6-5-1
Notification and Control of Touch Switches
If a touch switch is pressed, the corresponding touch switch number or bit
information is sent to the Host. Conversely, to turn ON a touch switch or cause
it to flash, the touch switch # or bit information is sent from the Host.
The type of data relating to the touch switch notification is specified with the
“bit input attribute” in the screen attributes when creating the screen data with
the Support Tool. It is not permissible to use both notification and control by a
touch switch number and notification and control by bit information on the
same screen.
Press
START
abcde
NT20
HOST
Touch switch # or
bit information
Lighting command
Lit
• Bit Touch Switch Method (Bit Input Permitted Setting)
If a touch switch is pressed, bit information is sent according to the position
of the touch switch. It can be used as a normal bit input switch at the PLC.
When this method is used, if more than one touch switch is pressed at the
same time, the information of all the pressed touch switches (0 to 63) is reported to the Host.
• Touch Switch # Method (Bit Input Not-permitted Setting
If the touch switch status is changed, the touch switch number set when
the touch switch is created is sent as a 8-digit hexadecimal number.
Cautions When Bit Input
Is Permitted
If the touch switches are set in the following positions using the Support Tool
while the setting is “bit input permitted”, the following operations will occur due
to the configuration of the touch switches.
Take this into consideration when setting touch switch areas.
221
Section 6-5
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
Example 1:
Touch switches are set at positions A, B, C, and D using the minimum switch
setting unit.
A
• If switches A, B, and C are turned ON at the same
time, switch D is also set ON.
C
• Similarly, if switches A, B, and D are turned ON at the
same time, switch C is also set ON.
B
D
Example 2:
Touch switch areas E, F, and G are set.
E
F
• If switches E and F are turned ON at the same time,
switch G is also set ON.
G
Touch Switch Notification/
control and Attributes
Inverse and normal display states can be set as attributes of touch switches
by using the Support Tool. There are slight differences in the operation when
a touch switch is pressed depending on whether bit input is permitted or not
permitted.
Bit input not permitted: Touch switch notification by number
The touch switch is lit for 0.2 seconds when pressed and then returns to
the unlit status.
Bit input permitted: Touch switch notification by bit information
The touch switch is lit while pressed and returns to the unlit status when
released.
When a touch switch which is currently lit or flashing is pressed, it is continuously lit while pressed and returns to its original state when released.
Simultaneous Pressing of
Multiple Touch Switches
222
Two or more touch switches can be simultaneously pressed if their status is
sent by bit information or if they use different host notification methods. However, two or more switches cannot be simultaneously pressed if host is notified of their status by their numbers.
Section 6-5
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
Lamp and Touch Switch Display (Bit Specification)
Format
[ESC]
K
m01
m02
m11
m12
m21
m22
m31
m32
[CR]
1B
4B
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
0D
m0 to m3: Specification of lamps and touch switches (2-digit hexadecimal)
The relationship between the lamp and touch switch number and an
expression of m0 to m3 in bits is given in the following table.
Bit
mx1
mx2
Parameter
m0
7
07
6
06
5
05
4
04
3
03
2
02
1
01
0
00
m1
m2
15
23
14
22
13
21
12
20
11
19
10
18
09
17
08
16
m3
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
mx1:
Higher 4 bits of mx (x: 0 to 3)
mx2:
Lower 4 bits of mx
Bit ON:
The lamp or touch switch is turned on (or caused to flash).
Bit OFF:
The lamp or touch switch is turned off.
Example
To turn on lamps and touch switches with the numbers 1, 5, 6, 7, and 26
m01m02m11m12m21m22m31m32=E2000004
Description
• Changes the display status of the lamps or touch switches.
• Whether the lamp or touch switch which corresponds to the specified bit
is turned on or flashes is determined by the setting made using the Support Tool.
• This command can be used only when the setting for the “LMP Bit Control” memory switch is “Enable”.
Lamp and Touch Switch Display (Number Specification)
Format
[ESC]
Q
m1
n1
n2
1B
51
* *
* *
* *
m 1: Display status
0 (30H): Not lit (normal display)
1 (31H): Lit
2 (32H): Flashing inverse
3 (33H): All not lit
n 1n 2: Lamp or touch switch # (2-digit hexadecimal)
000 to FFH (0 to 255)
Description
Changes the lamp or touch switch lighting status.
223
Section 6-5
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
Specify the display status as 3 (all not lit) to turn off all the lamps and touch
switches. In this case, specify the lamp or touch switch number to any number
in the permitted range.
!Caution The display attributes set with the Support Tool determine if lamps #0 to #31
light continuously or flash. The display status set with this command is
ignored.
Lamp and Touch Switch Display Status Enquiry
Format
[ESC]
R
n1
n2
1B
52
* *
* *
n 1n 2: Lamp or touch switch # (2-digit hexadecimal)
000 to FFH (0 to 255)
Description
Enquires the status of a lamp or touch switch specified by its address.
The NT20 returns the Lamp and Touch Switch Display Status Response
Command (refer to Lamp and Touch Switch Display Status Response below)
to report the display status.
Lamp and Touch Switch Display Status Response
Format
m 1:
[ESC]
S
m1
n1
n2
1B
53
* *
* *
* *
Display status
0 (30H): Not lit (normal display)
1 (31H): Lit
2 (32H): Flashing inverse
n 1n 2: Lamp or touch switch # (2-digit hexadecimal)
0 to FFH (0 to 255)
Description
The NT20 returns this command to report the lamp or touch switch number
display status to the Host in response to the Lamp and Touch Switch Display
Status Enquiry Command (refer to Lamp and Touch Switch Display Status
Enquiry) sent from the Host.
Note
6-5-2
Lamps 0 to 31 are reported as being lit when in the “flashing inverse” status.
Notification of Numeral Setting Input and Touch Switch Status
The following describes the commands for notifying the host when numeral
setting is performed (i.e., when the contents of a numeral memory table entry
are changed by pressing a touch switch) or when a touch switch is pressed,
when operating the NT20.
When a numerical value is input by numeral setting, the NT20 sends a Number Input Notify Command to the host. The command sent differs depending
on whether a 4-digit or 8-digit number is input.
224
Section 6-5
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
When a touch switch is pressed, the NT20 sends a Touch Switch Number
Output Command or Touch Switch Bit Output Command to the host. The
command sent depends on the set screen attributes.
Four-digit Number Input Notify
Format
[ESC]
E
d1
d2
d3
n1
n2
n3
n4
[CR]
1B
45
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
0D
d 1d 2d 3:
Numeral memory table entry number to which number was input
(3-digit hexadecimal) 000 to 07FH (0 to 127)
n 1n 2n 3n 4: Input number data (4-digit BCD)
Description
A number with 4 transferred digits set with the NT20 number setting function
is reported to the Host with this command.
!Caution This command cannot be used for negative numbers. Always set “8” as the
number of transferred digits when negative numbers may be input.
Eight-digit Number Input Notify
Format
[ESC]
F
d1
d2
d3
n1
n2
n3
n4
n5
1B
46
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
n6
n7
n8
[CR]
* *
* *
* *
0D
d 1d 2d 3: Numeral memory table entry number to which number was input
(3-digit hexadecimal) 000 to 07FH (0 to 127)
n 1n 2n 3n 4n 5n 6n 7n 8: Input number data (8-digit BCD)
Description
A number with 8 transferred digits set with the PT number setting function is
reported to the Host with this command.
When a negative number is written, n1 becomes “F” (46H) and the number
comprises 7 digits.
225
Section 6-5
Lamps, Touch Switches, Numeral Setting
Touch Switch Number Output (from NT20 to Host)
Format
[ESC]
H
m1
m2
[CR]
1B
48
* *
* *
0D
m 1m 2: Address of the pressed touch # (2-digit hexadecimal)
00 to E2H (0 to 226)
Description
If a touch switch is pressed while the screen for which the “Bit In = Off”
attribute is set is displayed, the address of the pressed touch switch is
reported to the Host.
Reference:
If more than one touch switch is pressed at the same time, only the address of
the touch switch which was pressed first is reported to the Host.
Notification of numeral setting is not executed in the case of touch switches
which have been allocated as ten keys.
Touch Switch Bit Output (from NT20 to Host)
Format
[ESC]
J
s01
s02
s11
s12
s21
s22
s31
s32
[CR]
1B
4A
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
0D
s0,... s3: Status of the touch switch (2-digit hexadecimal value for each switch)
The relationship between the touch switch number and an expression
of s0 to s3 in bits is given in the following table.
Bit
sx1
sx2
Parameter
s0
7
07
6
06
5
05
4
04
3
03
2
02
1
01
0
00
s1
s2
15
23
14
22
13
21
12
20
11
19
10
18
09
17
08
16
s3
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
sx1:
Higher 4 bits of sx (x: 0 to 3)
sx2:
Lower 4 bits of sx
Bit ON:
The touch switch is on.
Bit OFF:
The touch switch is off.
Example
Touch switches at addresses 0, 3, 21, and 27 are ON
s01s02s11s12s21s22s31s32=09002008
Description
• If the touch switch status is changed while the screen for which the “Bit
Input, Touch Switch” attribute is set is displayed, the status of the corresponding bit is reported to the Host.
• This report is made each time a touch switch is turned ON or OFF.
226
Section 6-6
Controlling the NT20 Status
6-6
Controlling the NT20 Status
This section describes the actual methods used for controlling the NT20 status.
The Screen Display Control Command is used to operate the back light of the
NT20 (i.e., switch it on and off).
The Buzzer Control Command is used to control the buzzer status of the
NT20. To inhibit the display of the system menu or cancel this inhibition, use
the Mode Switch Enable Command.
Touch switch data input or host notification can be inhibited, or this inhibition
canceled, by using the Touch Switch and Function Key Disable Command or
Touch Switch and Function Key Enable Command respectively.
Touch Switch Disable
Format
[ESC]
U
2
1B
55
32
Description
Disables touch switch and function key input and notification to the Host.
Reference:
Use the Touch Switch Enable Command (refer to Touch Switch Enable) to use
a disabled touch switch again. Disabled touch switches are also enabled
when the NT20 power is turned off.
Touch Switch Enable
Format
[ESC]
V
2
1B
56
32
Description
Enables input and notification to the Host of a disabled touch switch or function key.
Reference:
Disabled touch switches are also enabled when the NT20 power is turned off.
Screen Display Control
Format
[ESC]
P
m1
1B
50
* *
m 1: Display on or off
0 (30H): on
1 (31H): off
Description
Turns off the backlighting.
Reference:
The screen is redisplayed if a touch switch is pressed.
When a Display Specified Screen Command on page 216 is sent, the specified screen is displayed.
227
Section 6-6
Controlling the NT20 Status
Buzzer Control
Format
[ESC]
T
m1
1B
54
* *
m 1: Buzzer status
0 (30H): Buzzer off
1 (31H): Continuous buzzer
2 (32H): Short intermittent buzzer
Description
Controls the NT20 buzzer.
Reference:
The buzzer turned on with this command can be stopped with a Buzzer control command, press the “buzzer stop” touch switch on the screen, or by displaying a screen with no buzzer attributes.
System Menu Display Permission
Format
[ESC]
W
m1
1B
57
* *
m 1: System menu display permission/inhibition
0 (30H): Display permitted
1 (31H): Display inhibited
Description
System menu is displayed when “display permitted” is set, and from the system menu, selection of transmit mode or maintenance mode is possible. If
“display inhibited” is set, the system menu is not displayed.
Turning off the power or resetting operation validates the settings made with
the DIP switch (SW2-3) on the NT20.
228
Section 6-7
Terminal Commands
6-7
Terminal Commands
This section describes the terminal commands used to display character
strings or graphics according to instructions from the host, independently of
the screens registered in the NT20.
Terminal commands designate screen attributes such as inversion, flashing,
cursor position and size of characters before the characters are displayed.
Once screen attributes are set, they remain effective for screen displays until
they are cancelled or other attributes are set.
In addition, continuous lines and circles can be drawn.
Clear Screen
Format
[ESC]
&
1B
26
Description
Clears all text and graphics on the NT20 screen.
Reference:
Even if this command is used to clear a screen, the NT20 still displays the preceding screens.
After the display of number, text, lamps or touch switches is upgraded, only
the upgraded parts are re-displayed.
Character Specify Size
Format
m 1:
[ESC]
)
m1
1B
29
* *
Character size
0 (30H): Normal size, 16 x 8 dots (H x W)
1 (31H): 1/2 size, 8 x 8 dots (H x W)
Description
Specifies if 1-byte alphanumeric characters sent subsequently are displayed
as normal characters or 1/2-size characters.
Reference:
The character string is specified with the Specify Displayed Characters Command (refer to Specify Displayed Characters). Both normal characters and 1/
2-size characters are enlarged as specified by the Specify Character Enlargement Command (refer to Specify Character Enlargement below).
The character size specified with this command remains valid until the screen
display is switched or another character size is specified with the command.
The default character size is normal characters.
229
Section 6-7
Terminal Commands
Specify Character Enlargement
Format
[ESC]
*
m1
1B
2A
* *
m 1: Character enlargement
0 (30H): No enlargement
1 (31H): Enlarge height x 2
2 (32H): Enlarge width x 2
3 (33H): 2 x 2 enlargement
4 (34H): 3 x 3 times enlargement
5 (35H): 4 x 4 times enlargement
Description
All text and marks sent after this command are displayed in the specified size.
Reference:
The character string is specified with the Specify Displayed Characters Command (refer to Specify Displayed Characters).
The enlargement specified with this command remains valid until the screen
display is switched or another enlargement is specified with the command.
The default enlargement is no enlargement.
Normal Display
Format
[ESC]
!
1B
21
Description
Cancels all display attribute settings (inverse, flashing, flashing inverse) for
characters and marks so that all characters are displayed as “normal” characters (not inverse or flashing).
Set Inverse Display
Format
[ESC]
”
1B
22
Description
Sets the display attribute to inverse so that all characters and marks sent subsequently are highlighted. Other attributes remain unchanged.
Reference:
The Set Inverse Display Command is cancelled by the End Inverse Display
Command or the Normal Display Command.
The setting with this command remains valid until the screen display is
switched or another display attribute setting is made. The default display
attributes are set to a normal display when a screen is initially displayed.
Use this command with the Set Flashing Display Command (refer to Set
Flashing Display) to produce a flashing inverse display.
230
Section 6-7
Terminal Commands
End Inverse Display
Format
[ESC]
#
1B
23
Description
Clears the inverse display attribute so that all characters and marks sent subsequently are not highlighted. Other attributes remain unchanged.
Reference:
The inverse display attribute is set with the Set Inverse Display Command.
The setting with this command remains valid until the screen display is
switched or another display attribute setting is made. The default display
attributes are set to a normal display when a screen is initially displayed.
Set Flashing Display
Format
[ESC]
$
1B
24
Description
Sets the display attribute to flashing so that all characters and marks sent
subsequently are displayed flashing. Other attributes remain unchanged.
Reference:
The Set Flashing Display Command is cancelled by the End Flashing Display
Command or the Normal Display Command (refer to Normal Display and End
Inverse Display).
The setting with this command remains valid until the screen display is
switched or another display attribute setting is made. The default display
attributes are set to a normal display when a screen is initially displayed.
Use this command with the Set Inverse Display Command (refer to
Inverse Display) to produce a flashing inverse display.
End Flashing Display
Set
Format
[ESC]
%
1B
25
Description
Clears the flashing display attribute so that all characters and marks sent subsequently are not flashing. Other attributes remain unchanged.
Reference:
The flashing display attribute is set with the Set Flashing Display Command.
The setting with this command remains valid until the screen display is
switched or another display attribute setting is made. The default display
attributes are set to a normal display when a screen is initially displayed.
231
Section 6-7
Terminal Commands
Set Cursor Position
Format
[ESC]
+
x1
x2
x3
y1
y2
y3
1B
2B
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
x 1x 2x 3:
X coordinate (3-digit BCD)
000 to 255
y 1y 2y 3:
Y coordinate (3-digit BCD)
000 to 127
Description
Before displaying a character string with the Terminal commands, use this
command to set the bottom-left point of the first character to be displayed.
Reference:
The cursor position set with this command is also the bottom-left point of the
first character displayed if the displayed characters are enlarged.
Specify Displayed Characters
Format
[ESC]
4
n1
n2
c1
c2
c3
cn
1B
34
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
n 1n 2: Character string length as a number of normal characters
(2-digit hexadecimal)
01 to 20H (1 to 32)
c 1c 2c 3 to c n : Character-string to display
Description
• The character string is displayed from the cursor position.
• The character-string data can contain a mixture of normal (alphanumeric)
characters and marks. Refer to Appendix H Special Characters for details.
• The character string is displayed according to the enlargement and display attributes set with commands.
Reference:
The character string continues on the next line if it cannot fit into a single line.
Set the position where the character string is displayed with the Set Cursor
Position Command (refer to Set Cursor Position).
232
Section 6-7
Terminal Commands
Draw Polyline
Format
[ESC]
7
m1
m2
x01
x02
x03
y01
y02
y03
1B
37
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
xn1
xn2
xn3
yn1
yn2
yn3
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
m 1, m 2: Number of lines to draw (2-digit hexadecimal)
01 to 28H (1 to 40)
x0 1x0 2x0 3 to xn 1xn 2xn 3: X coordinates of line end points (3-digit BCD)
000 to 255
y0 1y0 2y0 3 to yn 1yn 2yn 3: Y coordinates of line end points (3-digit BCD)
000 to 127
Description
Draws the specified number of lines between the specified points.
Draw Circle
Format
[ESC]
8
x1
x2
x3
y1
y2
y3
r1
r2
r3
1B
38
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
* *
x 1x 2x 3: X coordinate of circle center (3-digit BCD)
000 to 255
y 1y 2y 3: Y coordinate of circle center (3-digit BCD)
000 to 127
r 1r 2r 3: circle radius in dots (3-digit BCD)
001 to 063
Description
Draws a circle of the specified radius around the circle center point.
233
Section 6-8
Key to Programs
6-8
Key to Programs
The following programs include all the commands that can be used with the
NT20.
6-8-1
Use of Programs
The sample program appears as follows on the screen.
Menu bar
Sub-menu
Parameter input column
Run confirm column
Send command column
Receive command
display column
Use the program as shown below.
Execute program
[ESC]
Interrupt display when
command received
[ESC]
[ESC]
Select type of send
command
Select send command
Main Menu
Sub-menu
Input parameter
Input parameter column
Confirm send command
Send command column,
confirm execution
Execute transfer
command
Up, Down, Left, Right keys: select item
[ENT]: confirm
[Esc]: stop
End program
1. This sample program is written in N88BASIC (86) (NEC) for a PC-9801
computer. Modify this program for use with any other computer language
or computer such as an IBM PC/AT or compatible.
2. The interval between parameter input and command transmission is a hold
interval for interrupt processing of the received command. If an interrupt is
permitted between the interval of parameter input and a command is received, all subsequent receive interrupts are displaced. If this occurs, send
an enquiry command to read all the accumulated receive data.
3. When a parameter is input, no check is made that the parameter is in the
permitted range. Make sure that parameters are input within the permitted
range.
234
Key to Programs
Section 6-8
Example Program
1000
1010
1020
1030
1040
1050
1060
1070
1080
1090
1100
1110
1120
1130
1140
1150
1160
1170
1180
1190
1200
1210
1220
1230
1240
1250
1260
1270
1280
1290
1300
1310
1320
1330
1340
1350
1360
1370
1380
1390
1400
1410
1420
1430
’ ********************************************************
’ * OPERATION COMMAND EXAMPLE PROGRAM (NT20-ST128)*
’ ********************************************************
’ . ........................................... Draw screen frame
SECT=9
DIM CMND$(SECT,10,1),CMND(SECT),TS.B(31)
SCREEN 3:CLS 3:CONSOLE 15,10,0,0
LINE (0,176)–(639,176),7,,&HF0F0
LINE (159,0)–(159,176),7,,&HF0F0
LINE (300,0)–(300,176),7,,&HF0F0
LINE (0, 16)–(159, 16),7,,&HF0F0
LINE (0, 96)–(159, 96),7,,&HF0F0
LINE (0,112)–(159,112),7,,&HF0F0
LINE (520,176)–(520,224),7,,&HF0F0
LINE (0,223)–(639,224),7,B
COLOR 0:LOCATE 2,0:PRINT ”OPERATING COMMANDS”
COLOR 0:LOCATE 2,6:PRINT ”TERMINAL COMMANDS”
CMND(0)=SECT ’ . ........................... Set display character strings
FOR I=1 TO SECT
READ CMND$(0,I,0)
NEXT I
FOR I=1 TO SECT
READ CMND(I)
FOR J=1 TO CMND(I)
READ CMND$(I,J,0),CMND$(I,J,1)
IF CMND$(I,J,1) = ”@@@@@@” THEN CMND$(I,J,1) = ”[ESC]”+CHR$(&H22)
NEXT J
NEXT I
’
RY=15
ON COM(1) GOSUB *RECV ’ . ................. Set receive interrupt routine
OPEN ”COM1:E81NN” AS #1 ’ . .............. Open communications port
’ NT20_SETTING OF RS-232C
’ DATA BIT LENGTH
8 BITS
’ STOP BIT LENGTH
1 BIT
’ PARITY
ODD
’ FLOW CONTROL
RS/CS
’ BAUD RATE
(VALUE SET BY SWITCH COMMAND)
COM(1) ON
’
*LV0 ’ . ..................................... Main Menu
LV=0:SECT.NO=0:SEL.NO=1
GOSUB *SELECT
IF SEL.NO=0 THEN GOTO *PRO.END
235
Key to Programs
1440
1450
1460
1470
1480
1490
1500
1510
1520
1530
1540
1550
1560
1570
1580
1590
1600
1610
1620
1630
1640
1650
1660
1670
1680
1690
1700
1710
1720
1730
1740
1750
1760
1770
1780
1790
1800
1810
1820
1830
1840
1850
1860
1870
1880
1890
236
Section 6-8
SECT.NO = SEL.NO
’
*LV1 ’ . ..................................... Sub-menu
LV=1:SEL.NO=1
GOSUB *SELECT
IF SEL.NO=0 THEN GOTO *LV0
*LV2 ’ . ........................... Branch according to command (parameter input)
COM(1) STOP
LV=2:SEND$=CMND$(SECT.NO,SEL.NO,1)
*SECT1
IF SECT.NO<>1 THEN GOTO *SECT2
ON SEL.NO GOSUB *ESC.0,*ESC.X
*SECT2
IF SECT.NO<>2 THEN GOTO *SECT3
ON SEL.NO GOSUB *ESC.B,*ESC.C,*ESC.D,*ESC.2F
*SECT3
IF SECT.NO<>3 THEN GOTO *SECT4
ON SEL.NO GOSUB *ESC.K,*ESC.Q,*ESC.R
*SECT4
IF SECT.NO<>4 THEN GOTO *SECT5
ON SEL.NO GOSUB *ESC.U,*ESC.V
*SECT5
IF SECT.NO<>5 THEN GOTO *SECT6
ON SEL.NO GOSUB *ESC.P,*ESC.T,*ESC.W
*SECT6
IF SECT.NO<>6 THEN GOTO *SECT7
ON SEL.NO GOSUB *ESC.26,*ESC.29,*ESC.2A
*SECT7
IF SECT.NO<>7 THEN GOTO *SECT8
ON SEL.NO GOSUB *ESC.21,*ESC.22,*ESC.23,*ESC.24,*ESC.25
*SECT8
IF SECT.NO<>8 THEN GOTO *SECT9
ON SEL.NO GOSUB *ESC.2B,*ESC.4
*SECT9
IF SECT.NO<>9 THEN GOTO *LV2.END
ON SEL.NO GOSUB *ESC.7,*ESC.8
*LV2.END ’ . ................................ Confirm transmission
LOCATE 0,12:PRINT LEFT$(SEND$,56);
IF LEN(SEND$)>56 THEN PRINT ”...”
LOCATE 66,12:PRINT ”OK?”;
YN=1
*YN.KY.IN
LOCATE 74,12:COLOR 2+2*YN:PRINT ”Y”;:COLOR 2–2*YN:PRINT ”N”;
A$=INKEY$:IF A$=”” THEN GOTO *YN.KY.IN
IF A$=CHR$(&H1C) OR A$=CHR$(&H1D) THEN YN=YN*(–1):GOTO *YN.KY.IN
IF A$<>CHR$(&HD) THEN GOTO *YN.KY.IN
Key to Programs
1900
1910
1920
1930
1940
1950
1960
1970
1980
1990
2000
2010
2020
2030
2040
2050
2060
2070
2080
2090
2100
2110
2120
2130
2140
2150
2160
2170
2180
2190
2200
2210
2220
2230
2240
2250
2260
2270
2280
2290
2300
2310
2320
2330
2340
2350
Section 6-8
LOCATE 66,12:COLOR 0:PRINT SPACE$(14);
IF YN=–1 THEN GOTO *LV3.END
GOSUB *SEND ’ . ............................. Send command
COM(1) ON
LOCATE 43,9:COLOR 4:PRINT ”Press ESC Key”;:COLOR 0
*SND.KY.IN
A$=INKEY$:IF A$<>CHR$(&H1B) THEN *SND.KY.IN
*LV3.END
LOCATE 0,12:PRINT SPACE$(79);
FOR I=0 TO 10
LOCATE 39,I:PRINT SPACE$(40);
NEXT I
GOTO *LV1 ’ . ............................... Return to Sub-menu
’
*PRO.END ’ . ................................ End routine
COM(1) OFF:CLOSE ’ . ....................... Close communications port
CONSOLE 0,25,0,1:CLS 3
END
’
*SEND ’ . .................................... Send command routine
SND$=CHR$(&H1B)+MID$(SEND$,6)
PRINT #1,SND$
RETURN
’
*RECV ’ . .................................... Receive interrupt routine
IF LOC(1)=0 THEN GOTO *NORCV
SX=POS(0):SY=CSRLIN
LINE INPUT #1,RCV$
LOCATE 0,RY:COLOR 0
PRINT ”[ESC]”;MID$(RCV$,2)
R.CODE$=MID$(RCV$,2,1)
*ESC.Y ’ . ................................... Notify screen number
IF R.CODE$<>”Y” THEN GOTO *ESC.E
PRINT ”Screen Number : ”;VAL(”&H”+MID$(RCV$,3,4))
PRINT:GOTO *RCV.END
*ESC.E ’ . ................................... Notify 4-digit number
IF R.CODE$<>”E” THEN GOTO *ESC.F
PRINT ”Numeral table entry # : ”;VAL(”&H”+MID$(RCV$,3,3))
PRINT ”Input decimal value”;VAL(MID$(RCV$,6,4))
PRINT:GOTO *RCV.END
*ESC.F ’ . ................................... Notify 8-digit number
IF R.CODE$<>”F” THEN GOTO *ESC.H
PRINT ”Numeral table entry # : ”;VAL(”&H”+MID$(RCV$,3,3))
IF MID$(RCV$,6,1)=”F” THEN NN=0–VAL(MID$(RCV$,7,7)) ELSE NN=VAL(MID$(RCV$,6,8))
PRINT ”Input decimal value : ”;NN
PRINT:GOTO *RCV.END
237
Key to Programs
2360
2370
2380
2390
2400
2410
2420
2430
2440
2450
2460
2470
2480
2490
2500
2510
2520
2530
2540
2550
2560
2570
2580
2590
2600
2610
2620
2630
2640
2650
2660
2670
2680
2690
2700
2710
2720
2730
2740
2750
2760
2770
2780
2790
2800
2810
238
Section 6-8
*ESC.H ’ . ................................... Notify touch switch (number)
IF R.CODE$<>”H” THEN GOTO *ESC.J
PRINT ”Pressed touch switch number : ”;VAL(”&H”+MID$(RCV$,3,3))
PRINT:GOTO *RCV.END
*ESC.J ’ . ................................... Notify touch switch (bit)
IF R.CODE$<>”J” THEN GOTO *ESC.S
PRINT ”Pressed touch switch number : ”;
TS=0
FOR I=0 TO 13
S=VAL(”&H”+MID$(RCV$,3+I*2,2))
FOR J=0 TO 7
IF (S MOD 2)=1 THEN PRINT TS;” ”;
S=S¥2:TS=TS+1
NEXT J,I
PRINT:PRINT:GOTO *RCV.END
*ESC.S ’ . ................................... Notify lamp and touch switch status
IF R.CODE$<>”S” THEN GOTO *RCV.ERR
PRINT ”Lamp/touch switch number : ”;VAL(”&H”+MID$(RCV$,4,2))
M=VAL(MID$(RCV$,3,1))
IF M=0 THEN M$=”OFF” ELSE IF M=1 THEN M$=”ON” ELSE M$=”INVERSE”
PRINT ”Display status
: ”;M$
PRINT:GOTO *RCV.END
’
*RCV.ERR
PRINT ”Receive data error”
PRINT
’
*RCV.END
RY=CSRLIN
LOCATE SX,SY
*NORCV
RETURN
’
*ESC.0 ’ . ................................... Display specified screen
LOCATE 43,0:INPUT ”Screen number : ”,M
M$=RIGHT$(”000”+HEX$(M),4)
SEND$=SEND$+M$
RETURN
*ESC.X ’ . ................................... Screen # enquiry
RETURN
*ESC.B ’ . ................................... Write character screen
LOCATE 43,0:INPUT ”Character-screen memory table entry number : ”,M
LOCATE 43,1:PRINT ”Write character string (32 CHARACTERS MAX.) ––>”
LOCATE 43,2:INPUT C$
M$=RIGHT$(”0”+HEX$(M),2)
C$=LEFT$(C$,32):L$=RIGHT$(”0”+HEX$(LEN(C$)),2)
Key to Programs
2820
2830
2840
2850
2860
2870
2880
2890
2900
2910
2920
2930
2940
2950
2960
2970
2980
2990
3000
3010
3020
3030
3040
3050
3060
3070
3080
3090
3100
3110
3120
3130
3140
3150
3160
3170
3180
3190
3200
3210
3220
3230
3240
3250
3260
3270
Section 6-8
SEND$=SEND$+L$+M$+C$
RETURN
*ESC.C ’ . ................................... Write 4-digit number
LOCATE 43,0:INPUT ”Numeral table entry #: ”,M
*NAGAIN
LOCATE 43,1:INPUT ”Write 1 to 4-digit number : ”,N%
IF N%<–999 OR N%>9999 THEN GOTO *NAGAIN
IF N%<0 THEN S$=”F” ELSE S$=””
M$=RIGHT$(”00”+HEX$(M),3)
N%=ABS(N%)
N$=STR$(N%):N$=RIGHT$(N$,LEN(N$)–1)
IF S$<>”F” THEN N$=RIGHT$(”000”+N$=RIGHT$(”00”+N$,3)
SEND$=SEND$+M$+S$+N$
RETURN
*ESC.D ’ . ................................... Write 8-digit number
LOCATE 43,0:INPUT ”Numeral table entry #: ”,M
*N8AGAIN
LOCATE 43,1:PRINT SPACE$(36)
LOCATE 43,1:INPUT ”Write 1 to 8-digit number : ”,N#
N#=INT(N#)
IF N#<–9999999# OR N#>99999999# THEN GOTO *N8AGAIN
IF N#<0 THEN S$=”F” ELSE S$=””
M$=RIGHT$(”00”+HEX$(M),3)
N#=ABS(N#)
N$=STR$(N#):N$=RIGHT$(N$,LEN(N$)–1)
IF S$<>”F” THEN N$=RIGHT$(”0000000”+N$,8) ELSE N$=RIGHT$(”000000”+N$,7)
SEND$=SEND$+M$+S$+N$
RETURN
*ESC.2F ’ . ................................. Copy memory table entry
LOCATE 43,0:INPUT ”0: character string/1 : number ”,M$
IF M$<>”0”AND M$<>”1” THEN *ESC.2F
LOCATE 43,1:INPUT ”Copy source memory table entry number : ”,S%
LOCATE 43,2:INPUT ”Copy destination memory table entry number : ”,D%
S$=STR$(S%):S$=RIGHT$(S$,LEN(S$)–1):S$=RIGHT$(”00”+S$,3)
D$=STR$(D%):D$=RIGHT$(D$,LEN(D$)–1):D$=RIGHT$(”00”+D$,3)
SEND$=SEND$+M$+S$+D$
RETURN
*ESC.K ’ . ................................ Display lamps and touch switches (bits)
FOR I=0 TO 31:TS.B(I)=–1:NEXT I
FOR I=0 TO 31
LOCATE 65–(I MOD 8)*3,I¥8:PRINT RIGHT$(STR$(I),2)
NEXT I
LOCATE 43,5:PRINT ”Input # : Inverse Input : Run input 99 : Execute”
*ESC.K.2
COLOR 0:LOCATE 43,6:PRINT SPACE$(36)
LOCATE 43,6:INPUT ”Lamp/touch switch number : ”;N
239
Key to Programs
3280
3290
3300
3310
3320
3330
3340
3350
3360
3370
3380
3390
3400
3410
3420
3430
3440
3450
3460
3470
3480
3490
3500
3510
3520
3530
3540
3550
3560
3570
3580
3590
3600
3610
3620
3630
3640
3650
3660
3670
3680
3690
3700
3710
3720
3730
240
Section 6-8
IF N=99 THEN GOTO *ESC.K.3
IF N<0 OR N>31 THEN GOTO *ESC.K.2
TS.B(N)=TS.B(N)*(–1)
COLOR 2+TS.B(N)*2
LOCATE 65–(N MOD 8)*3,N¥8:PRINT RIGHT$(STR$(N),2)
GOTO *ESC.K.2
*ESC.K.3
FOR I=0 TO 3
M=0
FOR J=0 TO 7
IF TS.B(I*8+J)=1 THEN M=M+2^J
NEXT J
SEND$=SEND$+RIGHT$(”0”+HEX$(M),2)
NEXT I
COLOR 0
RETURN
*ESC.Q ’ . .............................. Display lamps and touch switches (number)
LOCATE 43,0:PRINT ”Display specification”
LOCATE 43,1:PRINT ” 0 : OFF”
LOCATE 43,2:PRINT ” 1 : ON”
LOCATE 43,3:PRINT ” 2 : Inverse flashing (lamps only)”
LOCATE 43,4:PRINT ” 3 : All ON”
*QAGAIN
LOCATE 43,5:INPUT ” : ”,M$
IF M$<>”0” AND M$<>”1” AND M$<>”2” AND M$<>”3” THEN GOTO *QAGAIN
LOCATE 43,6:INPUT ”Lamp/touch switch number : ”,N
N$=RIGHT$(”00”+HEX$(N),2)
SEND$=SEND$+M$+N$
RETURN
*ESC.R ’ . ................................... Enquire lamp and touch switch status
LOCATE 43,0:INPUT ”Lamp/touch switch number : ”,N
N$=RIGHT$(”00”+HEX$(N),2)
SEND$=SEND$+N$
RETURN
*ESC.U ’ . ................................... Disable inputs
SEND$=SEND$+”0”
RETURN
*ESC.V ’ . ................................... Enables inputs
SEND$=SEND$+”0”
RETURN
*ESC.P ’ . ................................... Display screen
LOCATE 43,0:PRINT ”Controlled item”
LOCATE 43,1:PRINT ” 0 : Display”
LOCATE 43,2:PRINT ” 1 : No display
*PAGAIN
LOCATE 43,3:INPUT ” : ”,M$
Key to Programs
3740
3750
3760
3770
3780
3790
3800
3810
3820
3830
3840
3850
3860
3870
3880
3890
3900
3910
3920
3930
3940
3950
3960
3970
3980
3990
4000
4010
4020
4030
4040
4050
4060
4070
4080
4090
4100
4110
4120
4130
4140
4150
4160
4170
4180
4190
Section 6-8
IF M$<>”0” AND M$<>”1” THEN GOTO *PAGAIN
SEND$=SEND$+M$
RETURN
*ESC.T ’ . ................................... Buzzer control
LOCATE 43,0:PRINT ”Controlled item”
LOCATE 43,1:PRINT ” 0 : Stop buzzer”
LOCATE 43,2:PRINT ” 1 : Continuous buzzer”
LOCATE 43,3:PRINT ” 2 : Intermittent buzzer”
*TAGAIN
LOCATE 43,4:INPUT ” : ”,M$
IF M$<>”0” AND M$<>”1” AND M$<>”2” THEN GOTO *TAGAIN
SEND$=SEND$+M$
RETURN
*ESC.W ’ . ................................... System menu display
LOCATE 43,0:PRINT ”Controlled item”
LOCATE 43,1:PRINT ” 0:MENU TRANSFER ENABLE”
LOCATE 43,2:PRINT ” 1:MENU TRANSFER DISABLE”
*WAGAIN
LOCATE 43,3:INPUT ” : ”,M$
IF M$<>”0” AND M$<>”1” THEN GOTO *WAGAIN
SEND$=SEND$+M$
RETURN
’
*ESC.26 ’ . ................................. Clear screen
RETURN
*ESC.29 ’ . ................................. Specify 1-byte character
LOCATE 43,0:PRINT ”Character specify size”
LOCATE 43,1:PRINT ” 0 : NORMAL SIZE (16x8)”
LOCATE 43,2:PRINT ” 1 : HALF SIZE (8x8)”
*E26AGAIN
LOCATE 43,3:INPUT ” : ”,M$
IF M$<>”0” AND M$<>”1” THEN GOTO *E26AGAIN
SEND$=SEND$+M$
RETURN
*ESC.2A ’ . ................................. Specify character enlargement
LOCATE 43,0:PRINT ”Specify character enlargement”
LOCATE 43,1:PRINT ” 0:NO ENLARGEMENT”
LOCATE 43,2:PRINT ” 1:ENLARGE HEIGHT”
LOCATE 43,3:PRINT ” 2:ENLARGE WIDTH”
LOCATE 43,4:PRINT ” 3:2X2 ENLARGEMENT”
LOCATE 43,5:PRINT ” 4:3X3 TIMES ENLARGEMENT”
LOCATE 43,6:PRINT ” 5:4X4 TIMES ENLARGEMENT”
*E2AAGAIN
LOCATE 43,7:INPUT ” : ”,M$
IF M$=”0” OR M$=”1” OR M$=”2” THEN GOTO *E2ASEND
IF M$=”3” OR M$=”4” OR M$=”5” THEN GOTO *E2ASEND
241
Key to Programs
4200
4210
4220
4230
4240
4250
4260
4270
4280
4290
4300
4310
4320
4330
4340
4350
4360
4370
4380
4390
4400
4410
4420
4430
4440
4450
4460
4470
4480
4490
4500
4510
4520
4530
4540
4550
4560
4570
4580
4590
4600
4610
4620
4630
4640
4650
242
Section 6-8
GOTO *E2AAGAIN
*E2ASEND
SEND$=SEND$+M$
RETURN
*ESC.21 ’ . ................................. Normal display
RETURN
*ESC.22 ’ . ................................. Set inverse display
RETURN
*ESC.23 ’ . ................................. End inverse display
RETURN
*ESC.24 ’ . ................................. Set flashing display
RETURN
*ESC.25 ’ . ................................. End flashing display
RETURN
*ESC.2B ’ . ................................. Set cursor position
*E2B.X
LOCATE 43,0:PRINT SPACE$(36)
LOCATE 43,0:INPUT ”X COORDINATE(000-255)”,BX
IF BX>639 OR BX<0 THEN *E2B.X
*E2B.Y
LOCATE 43,1:PRINT SPACE$(36)
LOCATE 43,1:INPUT ”Y COORDINATE(000–127)”,BY
IF BY>255 OR BY<0 THEN *E2B.Y
BX$=STR$(BX):BX$=RIGHT$(BX$,LEN(BX$)–1):BX$=RIGHT$(”00”+BX$,3)
BY$=STR$(BY):BY$=RIGHT$(BY$,LEN(BY$)–1):BY$=RIGHT$(”00”+BY$,3)
SEND$=SEND$+BX$+BY$
RETURN
*ESC.4 ’ . ................................... Specify Displayed Characters
LOCATE 43,0:PRINT ”Write character string (32 CHARACTERS MAX.) ––>|”
LOCATE 43,1:INPUT C$
C$=LEFT$(C$,32):L$=RIGHT$(”0”+HEX$(LEN(C$)),2)
SEND$=SEND$+L$+C$
RETURN
*ESC.7 ’ . ................................... Draw Polyline
LN=0:SL$=””
*E7.X
LOCATE 41,8:PRINT SPACE$(38)
LOCATE 41,9:PRINT SPACE$(38)
LOCATE 41,8:INPUT ”X COORDINATE(END AT 999) : ”,LX
IF LX=999 THEN *E7.E
IF LX<0 OR LX>255 THEN GOTO *E7.X
*E7.Y
LOCATE 41,9:PRINT SPACE$(38)
LOCATE 41,9:INPUT ”Y COORDINATE : ”,LY
IF LY<0 OR LY>127 THEN GOTO *E7.Y
LX$=STR$(LX):LX$=RIGHT$(LX$,LEN(LX$)–1):LX$=RIGHT$(”00”+LX$,3)
Key to Programs
4660
4670
4680
4690
4700
4710
4720
4730
4740
4750
4760
4770
4780
4790
4800
4810
4820
4830
4840
4850
4860
4870
4880
4890
4900
4910
4920
4930
4940
4950
4960
5970
5980
5990
5000
5010
5020
5030
5040
5050
5060
5070
5080
5090
5100
5110
Section 6-8
LY$=STR$(LY):LY$=RIGHT$(LY$,LEN(LY$)–1):LY$=RIGHT$(”00”+LY$,3)
LOCATE 39+(LN MOD 5)*8,LN¥5:PRINT LX$;”,”;LY$;
SL$=SL$+LX$+LY$
LN=LN+1
IF LN<40 THEN GOTO *E7.X
*E7.E
LN$=HEX$(LN–1):LN$=RIGHT$(”0”+LN$,2)
SEND$=SEND$+LN$+SL$
RETURN
*ESC.8 ’ . ................................... Draw circle
*E8.X
LOCATE 43,0:PRINT SPACE$(36)
LOCATE 43,0:INPUT ”X COORDINATE OF CENTER OF CIRCLE : ”,CX
IF CX>255 OR CX<0 THEN *E8.X
*E8.Y
LOCATE 43,1:PRINT SPACE$(36)
LOCATE 43,1:INPUT ”Y COORDINATE OF CENTER OF CIRCLE : ”,CY
IF CY>127 OR CY<0 THEN *E8.Y
*E8.R
LOCATE 43,2:PRINT SPACE$(36)
LOCATE 43,2:INPUT ”?????#####”,CR
IF CR>63 OR CR<0 THEN *E8.R
CX$=STR$(CX):CX$=RIGHT$(CX$,LEN(CX$)–1):CX$=RIGHT$(”00”+CX$,3)
CY$=STR$(CY):CY$=RIGHT$(CY$,LEN(CY$)–1):CY$=RIGHT$(”00”+CY$,3)
CR$=STR$(CR):CR$=RIGHT$(CR$,LEN(CR$)–1):CR$=RIGHT$(”00”+CR$,3)
SEND$=SEND$+CX$+CY$+CR$
RETURN
’
*SELECT ’ . ................................. Item selection routine
IF LV=0 THEN LX=3 ELSE LX=LV*20+1
IF LV=0 THEN LY=1 ELSE LY=0
COLOR 4:LOCATE LX,LY:PRINT CMND$(SECT.NO,1,0)
COLOR 0
FOR I=2 TO CMND(SECT.NO)
IF LV=0 AND I<=5
THEN LY=I
IF LV=0 AND I>5
THEN LY=I+1
IF LV=1
THEN LY=I–1
LOCATE LX,LY:PRINT CMND$(SECT.NO,I,0)
NEXT I
*KY.IN
A$=INKEY$:IF A$=””
THEN GOTO *KY.IN
IF A$<>CHR$(&H1B)
THEN GOTO *KY1
COLOR 0
FOR I=1 TO CMND(SECT.NO)
IF LV=0 AND I<=5 THEN LY=I
IF LV=0 AND I>5
THEN LY=I+1
243
Key to Programs
5120
5130
5140
5150
5160
5170
5180
5190
5200
5210
5220
5230
5240
5250
5260
5270
5280
5290
5300
5310
5320
5330
5340
5350
5360
5370
5380
5390
5400
5410
5420
5430
5440
5450
5460
5470
5480
5490
5500
5510
5520
5530
5540
5550
5560
5570
244
Section 6-8
IF LV=1
THEN LY=I–1
LOCATE LX,LY:PRINT SPACE$(20)
NEXT I
SEL.NO=0
GOTO *SEL.RET
*KY1
IF A$<>CHR$(&H1E) AND A$<>CHR$(&H1F) THEN GOTO *KY2
IF LV=0 AND SEL.NO<=5
THEN LY=SEL.NO
IF LV=0 AND SEL.NO>5
THEN LY=SEL.NO+1
IF LV=1
THEN LY=SEL.NO–1
COLOR 0:LOCATE LX,LY:PRINT CMND$(SECT.NO,SEL.NO,0)
IF A$=CHR$(&H1E)
THEN SEL.NO=SEL.NO–1 ELSE SEL.NO=SEL.NO+1
IF SEL.NO=0
THEN SEL.NO=CMND(SECT.NO)
IF SEL.NO>CMND(SECT.NO) THEN SEL.NO=1
IF LV=0 AND SEL.NO<=5
THEN LY=SEL.NO
IF LV=0 AND SEL.NO>5
THEN LY=SEL.NO+1
IF LV=1
THEN LY=SEL.NO–1
COLOR 4:LOCATE LX,LY:PRINT CMND$(SECT.NO,SEL.NO,0)
GOTO *KY.IN
*KY2
IF A$<>CHR$(&HD) THEN GOTO *KY.IN
*SEL.RET
COLOR 0
RETURN
DATA ”SCREEN CONTROL”,”MEMORY TABLE OPERATION”,”LAMP, TOUCH SWITCH OPERATION”
DATA ”TOUCH SWITCH INPUT”,”SYSTEM CONTROL”,”CHARACTER SIZE”
DATA ”CHARACTER DISPLAY ATTRIBUTE”,”CHARACTER-STRING DISPLAY”,”FIGURE DISPLAY”
DATA 2
DATA ”Display specified screen”,”[ESC]0”
DATA ”Request screen number”,”[ESC]X”
DATA 4
DATA ”Write character-string memory table”,”[ESC]B”
DATA ”4-digit write numeral table”,”[ESC]C”
DATA ”8-digit write numeral table”,”[ESC]D”
DATA ”Copy memory table”,”[ESC]/”
DATA 3
DATA ”Lamp and touch switch display (bit specification)”,”[ESC]K”
DATA ”Lamp and touch switch display (address specification)”,”[ESC]Q”
DATA ”Lamp and touch switch display status enguiry”,”[ESC]R”
DATA 2
DATA ”Touch switch disable”,”[ESC]U”
DATA ”Touch switch enable”,”[ESC]V”
DATA 3
DATA ”Screen display control”,”[ESC]P”
DATA ”Buzzer control”,”[ESC]T”
DATA ”Mode Transition Enable”,”[ESC]W”
Section 6-8
Key to Programs
5580
5590
5600
5610
5620
5630
5640
5650
5660
5670
5680
5690
5700
5710
5720
5730
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
3
”Clear screen”,”[ESC]&”
”Character specify size”,”[ESC])”
”Specify character enlargement”,”[ESC]*”
5
”Normal display”,”[ESC]!”
”Set inverse display”,”@@@@@@”
”End inverse display”,”[ESC]#”
”Set flashing display”,”[ESC]$”
”End flashing display”,”[ESC]%”
2
”Set cursor position”,”[ESC]+”
”Specify displayed characters”,”[ESC]4”
2
”Draw polyline”,”[ESC]7”
”Draw circle”,”[ESC]8”
245
Key to Programs
246
Section 6-8
SECTION 7
Troubleshooting and Maintenance
This section describes the action to take when NT20 errors occur, and how to carry out maintenance and inspections to
prevent the occurrence of errors.
7-1
7-2
Hardware Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
248
Responding to Displayed Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
249
7-2-1
Errors Occurring When the Power Is Turned ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
249
7-2-2
Errors Occurring during Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
249
7-2-3
Errors Occurring on Screen Data Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
249
7-2-4
Errors Occurring on Resource Transmit Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
250
7-2-5
Errors Occurring on System Program Transmit Mode. . . . . . . . . . .
250
7-2-6
Communications Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
251
7-3
Maintenance of the NT20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
253
7-4
Inspection and Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
253
247
Section 7-1
Hardware Faults
7-1
Hardware Faults
When a fault relating to the operation of the NT20 occurs, find the symptoms
in the table below and respond by following the corresponding “Remedy” indicated in the table.
Note
1. Confirm system safety before turning the power ON/OFF or resetting.
2. Do not disassemble the PT for repair or modification.
NT20 Symptoms
Nothing is displayed on
the screen
Cause
Power is not being supplied.
Power supply fuse has blown
Remedy
Check the connections and make sure that power is
supplied correctly.
(Refer to 2-2-3 Power Supply Connection, page 23.)
Contact your OMRON service center.
Screen #0 has been read at the host. This is not an error. Change the screen number.
(Refer to 4-3 Screen Display, page 140.)
Communications with the
Support Tool not possible.
Cannot communicate with
the PLC/Host.
The Transmit Mode has not been
established.
Display the system menu and select the Transmit
Mode. (Refer to 3-6 Registering the Screen Data,
page 102.)
Not connected to the Support Tool.
Check the installation of the connector cable. (Refer
to 2-4 Connecting the NT Support Tool, page 35.)
The PT type/direct connection
settings made at the Support Tool do
not agree with the NT20.
Make the PT type setting and direct connection setting in the “PT Configuration” of the Support Tool
agree with the NT20.
Memory switch settings do not match. Check the communications setting in the “Memory
Switch” menu of the Maintenance Mode, and match
the PLC and NT20 settings.
(Refer to 3-5 Setting the Conditions of Communications with the Host by Using the Memory Switches,
page 91.)
NT20 and PLC are not correctly con- Check that the type, length and installation of the
nected.
connector cable match the specifications.
(Refer to 2-4 Connecting the NT Support Tool,
page 35, 2-6 Connecting to the RS-232C Port at the
Host, page 44.)
When NT link (1:N), there is unit num- Set again with no duplication.
ber duplication.
Power not supplied to the NT20, PLC, Check the power supply.
or host
Buzzer sounds, RUN LED
is OFF.
Malfunction due to external noise.
Distance the communications cable from the source
of the noise and insert a noise filter in the power supply line.
Touch panel does not
respond
Malfunction due to external noise
Distance the communications cable from the source
of the noise and insert a noise filter in the power supply line.
Touch panel is broken.
Check the touch panel by performing the touch panel
test in the I/O check in the maintenance mode.
The NT20 changes the mode during
host link communications.
This is normal with the NT20 specification. When
using a PLC that can also be connected using the NT
link, connect it with the NT link (the mode is not
changed when using the NT link).
PLC mode changes to
monitor mode.
248
Section 7-2
Responding to Displayed Error Messages
7-2
Responding to Displayed Error Messages
When the NT20 displays an error message, find the corresponding symptoms
in the appropriate table below and respond by following the “Remedy” indicated in the table.
7-2-1
Errors Occurring When the Power Is Turned ON
The table below shows the errors that can occur when the power supply to the
NT20 is turned ON, and their remedies.
Message
Cause
Screen Data
Corrupted
There is an error in the
registered screen data.
Mark Data
Corrupted
There is an error in the
registered mark data.
No direct infor- The allocated words for the
mation is set!
PT status control area and
PT status notify area have
not been set.
There is no screen data.
7-2-2
Remedy
After initializing the screen data memory in the Maintenance Mode, transmit
the screen data once more with the
Support Tool.
After initializing the screen data memory in the Maintenance Mode, transmit
the screen data once more using the
Support Tool.
Use the Support Tool to set the head
words of the PT status control area and
PT status notify area, and transmit the
screen data again.
Transmit screen data from the Support
Tool.
Errors Occurring during Operation
The table below shows the errors that can occur during operation of the NT20,
and their remedies.
7-2-3
Message
Setting Error
Cause
Remedy
Bits or words allocated to the Check the memory area in the
PLC memory cannot be found PLC used and correct the bit
in the screen data.
and word allocations in the
screen data.
QQ command is not
available
The PLC cannot be connected to the NT20.
Select a type of PLC that can
be connected to the NT20.
Errors Occurring on Screen Data Initialization
The table below shows the errors that can occur when data is written to the
NT20 screen data memory, and their remedies.
Message
Initialization Error
Cause
Remedy
Hardware fault or screen data If the same message is dismemory life reached
played even after executing
screen data memory initialization or screen data transmission several times, contact
your OMRON service center.
249
Section 7-2
Responding to Displayed Error Messages
7-2-4
Errors Occurring on Resource Transmit Mode
The table below shows the errors that can occur when erasing resource,
downloading resource or when NT20 is power on, and their remedies.
Message
Erasing failed.
Downloading failed.
Resource Error!
7-2-5
Cause
Hardware fault or resource
memory life reached
Remedy
Push the reset switch and
erase again. If the same message is displayed even after
executing erase several times,
contact your OMRON service
center.
Noise caused data corruption Push the reset switch and
during communications
download again. Use noiseresistant cable if communications occurs in an environment with high levels of noise.
Resource is missing or fragTurn ON the DIP switch 2-5
mentary. Checksum of
and push the reset switch to
Resource is wrong. There are download resource.
any two items unmatched
among system program, Font
Data and System Information
Data.
Errors Occurring on System Program Transmit Mode
The table below shows the errors that can occur when erasing system program, downloading system program or when NT20 is power on, and their remedies.
Message
250
Cause
Remedy
Erasing failed.
Hardware fault or resource
memory life reached
Push the reset switch and
erase again.
Communications
Error Time Out
The connectors or the connecting cable have become
disconnected.
Reconnect the cable. Push
the reset switch and download
again.
System program
error!
The power to the NT20 is
Please download system proswitched off, or the NT20 is
gram again.
reset, during transfer.
The power to the personal
computer that is running the
system transfer tool is
switched off, or the personal
computer is reset, during
transfer.
The cable connecting the personal computer running the
system transfer tool and the
NT20 becomes disconnected
or sustains a wire breakage
during transfer.
Transfer is terminated by
pressing any two of the function keys on the panel of the
NT20.
Transfer is terminated by
pressing the ESC key of the
personal computer running
the system transfer tool.
Section 7-2
Responding to Displayed Error Messages
7-2-6
Communications Errors
This section describes the errors relating to communications with the PLC/
Host that can occur during operation, and their remedies.
• Operation When a Communications Error Occurs
When a communications error occurs, the error message is displayed at
the NT20, and the buzzer sounds. Error messages are displayed when the
“Automatic Reset” memory switch is not set.
Some error messages are displayed even if the “Automatic Reset” memory
switch is set.
• Procedure When a Communications Error Occurs
When an error message is displayed, press the [EXIT] touch switch displayed on the screen. The screen display will return to the RUN mode.
• Display of Communications Errors
As shown below, communications errors are displayed in the center of the
screen, together with a classification indicating whether they are receive or
send errors.
Screen When an Error Has Occurred while Receiving
RECEIVING ERROR
EXIT
<Error Description>
Parity Error
Overrun Error
Overflow Error
Framing Error
Buffer Overflow
Time Out
NAK Received
Unit No. Error
FCS Error
Screen When an Error Has Occurred while Sending
RECEIVING ERROR
<Type of error>
Time Out
EXIT
Message
(ACIA)
Parity Error
Framing Error
Overflow Error
Overrun
Cause
Communications parameters/ Check whether the parity bit,
conditions of communications frame length, baud rate, stop
set incorrectly.
bit length, and flow control
settings of the PLC match the
settings of the NT20.
Noise caused data corruption
during communications.
The connectors of the connecting cable are not connected correctly.
Buffer Overflow
(NT20-ST128 only)
Remedy
The NT20 receive buffer is
full.
Use a noise-resistant cable if
communications occurs in an
environment with high levels
of noise.
Reconnect the cable.
Lengthen the command transmission intervals. If this error
occurs frequently, set flow
control for communications.
251
Section 7-2
Responding to Displayed Error Messages
Message
Time Out
Cause
The connectors of the connecting cable have become
disconnected.
The PLC is stopped.
During transmission of one
command, a time lapse
exceeding 5 seconds is
detected.
NAK Received
(end code simultaneously displayed)
Unit No. Error
252
Make sure the PLC is able to
communicate with the NT20.
Confirm the proper command
length.
Reconnect the cable.
Noise caused data corruption
during communications.
Use a noise-resistant cable if
communications occurs in an
environment with high levels
of noise.
Error returned by host.
Check the end code by referring to the PLC operation
manual.
The unit # does not match that Set the PLC unit # to “0”.
set on the PLC.
The PLC is transmitting incor- Check PLC operation.
rect data.
Noise caused data corruption
during communications.
FCS Error
Remedy
Reconnect the cable.
Use a noise-resistant cable if
communications occurs in an
environment with high levels
of noise.
The PLC is transmitting incor- Check PLC operation.
rect data.
Noise caused data corruption Use a noise-resistant cable if
during communications.
communications occurs in an
environment with high levels
of noise.
Section 7-3
Maintenance of the NT20
7-3
Maintenance of the NT20
Carry out maintenance work in order to ensure that the NT20 is always used
in its optimum condition.
!WARNING Do not attempt to take the PLC apart and do not touch any internal parts while
the power is being supplied. Doing either of these may result in electrical
shock.
Spare PT
It is advisable to have a spare NT20 available to minimize system downtime in
the event of an NT20 failure or if the screen display becomes difficult to read
due to deterioration of the display unit.
Backlight
The backlight must be replaced when the brightness of the display backlight
dims and the display becomes difficult to see. The backlight cannot be
replaced by the user.
Contact your nearest OMRON representative.
7-4
Inspection and Cleaning
Clean and inspect the NT20 regularly to ensure that it is always used in its
optimum condition.
Cleaning Method
If the display is dirty the screen is difficult to see. Clean the screen from time
to time as follows.
• In daily cleaning, wipe the display with a soft dry cloth.
• If the soiling cannot be removed with a dry cloth, wet the cloth with water,
wring it out well and wipe the display with it.
• If rubber or vinyl products, tape, etc. are left stuck to the display for long
periods they will cause staining. If such items are stuck to the display,
remove them during cleaning.
Note
Inspection Method
Never use volatile solvents such as benzene or thinners, or dusters.
In normal environments, inspect the NT20 at intervals of between 6 months
and a year. In environments that are extremely hot and humid, or very dusty
environments, shorten the inspection interval.
• Items Required for Inspection
Prepare the following items before starting the inspection.
• The tools supplied with the NT20
• Screwdrivers (Phillips, flat-head)
• Tester (or digital voltmeter)
• Industrial alcohol
• 100% cotton cloth
• Hygrometer (required in some cases)
• Thermometer (required in some cases)
• Synchroscope (required in some cases)
• Pen-writing oscilloscope (required in some cases)
253
Section 7-4
Inspection and Cleaning
• Faulty Display Pixels
Although the LCD panel has been manufactured with extremely high-level
technology, there can sometimes be pixels that will not light or that will be
lit constantly. These are characteristic of LCD panels and are not an indication of a faulty display. Please understand that, although we are constantly striving to keep these pixels to a minimum, it is not possible with
present technology to eliminate them completely.
• Points Inspected
Inspect the following points to determine if there is any divergence from the
stated criteria. If there is, either improve the surrounding environment so
that the values fall within the stated range, or adjust the NT20.
Point Inspected
Power supply voltage
Inspection Details
Fluctuation in power supply terminal voltage
Ambient environmen- Ambient temperature (temperature in the
tal conditions
operation panel)
Ambient humidity
(humidity in the operation panel)
Presence/absence of dust
Mounting conditions
External appearance
Criterion
Inspection Instrument
Permissible voltage fluctuation range (24 VDC −
15% +15%)
Tester
0 to 50°C
Thermometer
35% to 85%
Hygrometer
Dust must not be settled
Visual inspection
Looseness of mounting brackets etc.
To be no looseness
Connector connections of connecting cable To be fully inserted and
locked, with no looseness
Accessory tools
Looseness of screws in external wiring
Conditions of external connecting cables
To be no looseness
Faults such as incipient
disconnections.
Phillips screwdriver
Visual inspection
Peeling of front sheet
Front sheet must not
show any signs of peeling.
Visual inspection
Note
(1) Do not attempt to disassemble the NT20 for repair or modification.
(2) The disposal of the NT20 may be regulated by national or local authorities. Dispose of them according to the laws and regulations of the relevant
country and local authority.
(3) When replacing the NT20 after discovering a fault during inspections,
note the following points:
• Be sure to switch the power OFF before replacement.
• After replacement, check that the new NT20 is not subject to the same
error.
• If a faulty unit is returned for repairs, write as detailed a description of
the fault as possible and send this description together with the unit to
the OMRON address indicated on the back cover of this book.
254
Appendix A
Specifications
General Specifications
Item
Power supply voltage
Specification
24 VDC
Allowable power supply voltage range
Allowable momentary power interruption
time
20.4 VDC to 27.6 VDC (24 VDC –15% +15%)
Not specified.
Power consumption
Ambient operating temperature
10 W max.
0 to 50°C (with no freezing)
Storage temperature
Ambient operating humidity
–20 to 70°C
35% to 85% at 0 to 40°C (with no condensation)
35% to 50% at 40 to 50°C (with no condensation)
35% to 85% at −20 to 40°C (with no condensation)
35% to 50% at 40 to 50°C (with no condensation)
35% to 45% at 50 to 70°C (with no condensation)
No corrosive gases.
Ambient storage humidity
Operating environment
Noise immunity
Vibration resistance (during operation)
Shock resistance (during operation)
Based on IEC 61000-4-4: 2 kV (power line)
5 to 9 Hz with 3.5-mm single amplitude, 9 to 150 Hz with 9.8-m/s2 acceleration
for 10 times (1 octave/min) in each of X, Y and Z directions
147 m/s2, 3 times in each of X, Y and Z directions
Dimensions (mm)
Panel cutout dimensions
190 x 108 x 53.5 mm (W x H x D)
178.5 +0.5/0 x 98.5 +0.5/0 mm (H x V), Panel thickness: 1.6 to 4.8 mm
Weight
Degree of protection
0.7 kg max.
Front panel operating section: Equivalent to oil-resistant IP65 and equivalent
to NEMA4 (See note 2.)
UL 1604 Class 1 Division 2 and EC Directives
Applicable standards
Note
(1) The display quality (e.g., the contrast) will deteriorate at temperatures above 40°C. Also, response
will be slower due to the characteristics of liquid crystals at low temperatures.
(2) Do not use the PT in locations subject to long-term exposure to oil.
255
Appendix A
Specifications
Performance Specifications
Display Specifications
Item
Display panel
(See note 1.)
Backlight
(white cold
cathode tube)
Front-panel
indicator
Note
Display device
Specification
Monochrome STN LCD (with backlight)
Number of dots
(resolution)
140 (128) vertical × 260 (256) horizontal, dot size: 0.42 mm
Values in parentheses are the numbers of dots that can be used by the NT20
system program.
Effective display area
66 (57.6) mm vertical × 120 (115.2) mm horizontal
Values in parentheses are effective display area that can be used by the NT20
system program.
Display mode
View angle
Blue mode
Up: 40°, Down: 50°, Left: 35°, Right: 35°
Life expectancy
Contrast adjustment
50,000 hours minimum
The contrast can be adjusted with the contrast adjustment on the back of NT20.
Life expectancy
50,000 hours minimum (See note 2.)
Replacement
User must not replace the backlight.
Brightness adjustment Not provided.
Automatic turn-off
RUN
Can be set to turn off in 10 minutes, 1 hour, or to remain ON.
Lit green: Running normally and Memory Unit automatic transmission completed.
Flashing green: Memory Unit automatic transmission being executed or Memory
Unit automatic transmission error.
(1) There are sometimes faulty pixels in the touch panel but this does not indicate an error as long as
the number of bright or dark pixels does not exceed the following limits.
4 total defects max. of the following size with no more than one per 20-mm square:
0.2 mm < (short dia. + long dia.)/2 ≤ 0.55 mm
(2) Time taken for brightness to reduce to half at room temperature and humidity. This is a reference
value only. The life expectancy will be radically reduced at low temperatures. For example, the life
expectancy at 0°C or lower will be 10,000 hours (reference value).
Panel Specifications
Item
Touch panel
Specification
Number of switches: 72 (6 vertically × 12 horizontally)
Switch size: 9.14 mm horizontal × 9.18 mm vertical
Input: Pressure-sensitive type
Life expectancy: 1 million operations min.
256
Appendix A
Specifications
Display Capacity
Item
Specification
Host Link/NT Link
C200H direct communications
Display elements
Screen types
RS-232C (NT20-ST128)
Character displays
Character string
displays
Fixed character data (character strings registered for each screen)
32 positions per screen
128 strings per file, 32 positions per
screen
Numeral displays
(See note.)
50 positions per screen, 8-digit display
Graph displays
(See note.)
50 per screen
Graphic displays
Lamps
Can be displayed wherever required.
128 per screen
Touch switches
Numeral settings
(See note.)
72 per screen
256 strings per file max.
Display of set numerical values 50 per screen, 8 digits each
Normal screen
Overlapping screens
Displays screens registered as normal.
A maximum of 8 registered screens can be displayed overlapped with each
other.
A maximum of 8 screens can be displayed sequentially by scrolling.
(The screen can be changed by pressing the and touch switches)
Continuous screens
256 strings per file max.
Screen attributes
Buzzer, numeral setting, backlight
Buzzer, numeral setting, backlight, bit
input
Max. number of registered screens
Screen registration method
495
Transfer screen data created using the Support Tool to the PT.
Screen saving method
(screen data memory)
Saved to flash memory (recording format unique to NT20)
Note Number of numeral memory table entries that can be set (number used for numeral display + number
used for graphs + number used for numeral settings) ≤ 128
Display Element Specifications
Item
Display characters
Specification
Half-size characters (8 × 8 dots): Alphanumerics and symbols
Normal characters (8 × 16 dots): Alphanumerics and symbols
Marks (16 × 16 dots): User-defined pictographs
Enlargement function
Horizontal and vertical magnifications of double width, double height, 4x, 9x,
and 16x
Smoothing processing
Character display attributes
Enlarged characters up to 4x
Normal, inverse, flashing, inverse flashing
Graphics
Continuous straight lines, circles
Data Quantities
Item
Specification
RS-232C (NT20-ST128)
Host Link/NT Link
C200H direct communications
Strings
Numeral data
128 strings comprising 32 characters each
128 max. (8 digits each)
Marks
Touch switches
64 marks
No maximum restriction
256 strings per file max.
Lamps
No maximum restriction
256 strings per file max.
257
Appendix A
Specifications
Special Features
Item
Specification
Buzzer
Two types:
Setting:
Maintenance functions
• Self-test for memory, switches, etc.
• Status setting confirmation for communications and other conditions.
• Simple communications confirmation.
0.2 second input sound when a touch switch is pressed
Setting: Set “Key Sound” of the “Memory Switch” menu in the Maintenance
mode ON.
Key input sound setting
Continuous sound and intermittent sound
Set “Buzzer Sound” in the “Memory Switch” menu of the
Maintenance Mode ON.
If “ERR ON” is set the buzzer only sounds when an error
occurs.
ON:
The buzzer sounds on designation from the PLC, when a
screen with a buzzer-ON specification is called, or on display
of an error screen such as for a receive error.
OFF:
The buzzer is turned off on designation from the PLC, by
touch switch input, or when a screen without a buzzer-ON
specification is displayed.
Sound pressure: Min. 80 dB, average 87 dB (measured 10 cm from front face)
Note The NT20 system program does not provide a battery backup function.
258
Appendix A
Specifications
Communications Specifications
Host Link
Item
Communications standard
Specification
EIA RS-232C
Communications settings
Connector
Start-stop synchronization
Baud rate: 9,600, 19,200, 38,400, 57,600, 115,200 bps
Data length: 7 bits
Stop bits:
2 bits
Parity:
Even
9-pin, D-SUB connector (female)
Number of units connected
Transmission distance
1 to 1
15 m max.
NT Link (1:1)
Item
Specification
Communications standard
Connector
EIA RS-232C
9-pin D-SUB connector (female)
Number of units connected
Transmission distance
1 to 1
15 m max.
NT Link (1:N)
Item
Specification
Communications standard
Connector
EIA RS-232C
9-pin D-SUB connector (female)
Number of units connected
Transmission distance
1:1 to 8
RS-232C cable: 2 m max. (*)
RS-422A/485 cable: Total length 500 m (*)
(*) When NT-AL001 used
RS-232C (NT20-ST128)
Item
Communications standard
Specification
EIA RS-232C
Communications settings
Start-stop synchronization
Baud rate:
2,400, 4,800, 9,600, 19,200 bps
Data length:
7, 8 bits
Stop bits:
1, 2 bits
Parity:
Even, Odd, None
Flow control:
RS/CS control
XON/XOFF control
None
Connector
Number of units connected
9-pin D-SUB connector (female)
1 to 1
Transmission distance
15 m max.
259
Specifications
260
Appendix A
Appendix B
Dimensions
Outside Dimensions
108
98 −10
178.20
4.50
190
53.50
Unit: mm
Installation Dimensions
54
178
Installation panel
Mounting Bracket
16
5
122
98
108
RUN
37
142
190
Unit: mm
261
Appendix B
Dimensions
Cable Connection Dimensions
44
20
73
53
Unit: mm
Cable Connection Dimensions (with C200H Communications Interface Unit Mounted)
Installation panel
Mounting Bracket
99.4
45.9
27
9
98
120.3
93.2
12.1
19.5
52.5
(Unit: mm)
35.1 min.
39.3 max.
5.3
40.5
87.2
262
Appendix C
Transporting and Storing PTs
• Use the special packing box provided with the PT when shipping the PT.
• When storing the PT, store it under the following conditions:
Ambient storage temperature: −20 to 70°C
Ambient storage humidity: 35% to 85% (−20 to 40°C)
35% to 50% (40 to 50°C)
35% to 45% (50 to 70°C)
263
Transporting and Storing PTs
264
Appendix C
Appendix D
Making the Cable
The procedure for making up the cable is described below.
Also refer to this procedure for making a connecting cable for use with RS-422A/485 type connections.
Cable Preparation
The preparation of the cable differs according to whether or not the shielding wire is to be connected to the FG.
Cable with Shield Connected to FG
1. Cut the cable to the required length.
2. Remove the external vinyl insulation from the cable with a razor blade. Take care not to damage the
shielding underneath.
3. Cut back the shielding wire with scissors.
4. Use wire strippers to strip the insulation from each wire.
5. Fold back the shielding wire.
6. Wrap aluminum foil tape around the folded-back shielding wire.
(1)
(2)
40 (1.57) (RS-232C)
25 (0.98) (RS-422A)
(3)
10
(0.39)
(4)
5
(0.19)
(5)
(6)
Units: mm (inch)
Aluminum foil tape
Cable with Shield Not Connected to FG
1. Cut the cable to the required length.
2. Remove the external vinyl insulation from the cable with a razor blade. Take care not to damage the
shielding underneath.
3. Cut back the shielding wire with scissors.
4. Use wire strippers to strip the insulation from each wire.
265
Appendix D
Making the Cable
5. Wrap vinyl tape over the cut off end of the shielding wire.
(1)
(2)
40 (1.57) (RS-232C)
25 (0.98) (RS-422A)
(3)
(4)
5
(0.19)
(5)
Units: mm (inch)
Vinyl tape
Soldering
1. Slide heat-shrink tube over each wire.
2. Pre-solder each wire and connector terminal.
3. Solder each wire to each connector terminal.
1 mm
Soldering iron
Heat-shrink tube
(F, 1.5 mm dia., l = 10 mm)
4. Push the heat shrink tube over the soldered joint and heat the tube to shrink it in place.
Heat-shrink tube
Hood Assembly
Assemble the connector hood as shown below.
Aluminum foil tape
End connected to FG
266
End not connected to FG
Appendix E
Making the Cable for Connecting a Personal
Computer
Refer to the following when making a cable for connecting the NT Support Tool.
Assembly of Connecting Cables
Wiring should be carried out in one of the following ways, depending on the type of RS-232C connector.
25-pin Connector
SD
RD
Personal computer
RS
CS
SG
FG
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
7
9
1
Shield
Connector hood
6
SD
RD
RS
Connector for peripheral devices on PT
CS
SG
+5 V
Connector hood
Use the following recommended products when making the connecting cable.
Name
Connector
XM2D-2501
Remarks
25-pin, made by OMRON, for personal computer end
Connector hood
XM2A-0901
XM2S-2511
9-pin, made by OMRON, for PT end
25-pin, made by OMRON, for personal computer end
Connector set
XM2S-0911
XM2S-0911-S003
9-pin, made by OMRON, for PT end
9-pin, made by OMRON, for PT end
Connector and Connector hood
AWG28×5P IFVV-SB
CO-MA-VV-SB 5P×28AWG
Multi-core shielded cable, made by Fujikura Ltd.
Multi-core shielded cable, made by Hitachi Cable, Ltd.
Cable
Model
267
Appendix E
Making the Cable for Connecting a Personal Computer
9-pin Connector
RD
SD
Personal computer
RS
CS
SG
2
2
3
3
7
4
8
5
5
9
Shield
6
SD
RD
RS
Connector for peripheral devices on PT
CS
SG
+5 V
Connector hood
Connector hood
Use the following recommended products when making the connecting cable.
Name
Model
Remarks
Connector
XM2D-0901
XM2A-0901
9-pin, made by OMRON, for personal computer
9-pin, made by OMRON, for PT
Connector hood (See
note.)
XM2S-0911
XM2S-0913
9-pin, mm pitch screw, made by OMRON
9-pin, inch pitch screw, made by OMRON
Connector set
XM2S-0911-S003
9-pin, made by OMRON, for PT end
Connector and Connector hood
Cable
AWG28×5P IFVV-SB
CO-MA-VV-SB 5P×28AWG
Multi-core shielded cable, made by Fujikura Ltd.
Multi-core shielded cable, made by Hitachi Cable, Ltd.
Note One XM2S-0911 (for PT) and either one XM2S-0911 or -0913 (for your personal computer) are needed.
268
Appendix F
Model List
PTs
Model
NT20-ST121-E
Host link/NT link/C200H
Specification
Japanese/English language support (Ivory)
NT20-ST121B-E
NT20-ST128
Host link/NT link/C200H
RS232C
Japanese/English language support (Black)
Japanese/English language support (Ivory)
NT20-ST128B
RS232C
Japanese/English language support (Black)
Host Link Units
Model
C120-LK201-V1
Specification
• Features a connector for RS-232C connections
• Type mounted to a CPU
Applicable PLC
C-series
C120
C200H
C500(F)
C1000H
C2000(H)
C200H-LK201(-V1)
• Features a connector for RS-232C connections
• Type mounted to C200H base
C500-LK201-V1
Features a connector for RS-232C/RS-422A connections (switchable
type).
Type mounted to C500 base
C-series
C200H(S)/HE/HG/HX
C-series
C500(F)
C1000H
C2000(H)
C500-LK203
CV500-LK201
• Features a connector for RS-232C connections and a connector for
RS-232C/RS422A connections (switchable type).
• Type mounted to base for CVM1/CV use.
CVM1/CV-series
CV500
CV1000
CV2000
CVM1
Communications Units
Model
CS1W-SCU21-V1
CS1W-SCU31-V1
CJ1W-SCU21-V1
CJ1W-SCU31-V1
CJ1W-SCU41-V1
Specification
RS-232C (2 ports)
Rack-mounting Unit
RS-422A/485 (2 ports)
Rack-mounting Unit
RS-232C (2 ports)
RS-422A/485 (2 ports)
Features an RS-422A/485 (port 1)
and an RS-232C port (port 2)
Applicable PLC
CS-series
CS1G/H, CS1G/H-H
CJ-series
CJ1G, CJ1G/H-H
269
Appendix F
Model List
CPU Units (for Connection Via a Host Link)
Model
Specification
PLC Type
C20H/C28H/C40H/C60H
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections
C-series
C20H
C28H
C40H
C60H
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]@
[email protected]@
[email protected]@
Connect an RS-232C adapter to the peripheral port.
C-series
CPM1
CPM1A
[email protected]@[email protected]
[email protected]@[email protected]
[email protected]@[email protected]
Connect an RS-232C adapter to the peripheral port.
C-series
CPM2A
[email protected]@@@@@[email protected] (See note 1.) Connect an RS-232C adapter to the peripheral port.
[email protected]@@@@@[email protected] (See note 1.)
C-series
CPM2C
CQM1-CPU21-E
CQM1-CPU41-E
CQM1-CPU42-E
CQM1-CPU43-E
CQM1-CPU44-E
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections.
C-series
CQM1
CQM1H-CPU11 (See note 2.)
CQM1H-CPU21
CQM1H-CPU51
CQM1H-CPU61
C200HS-CPU21-E
C200HS-CPU23-E
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HS-CPU33-E
Connect an RS-232C adapter to the peripheral port.
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections.
C-series
CQM1H
Features a connector for RS-232C connections (selectable/9-pin).
C200HS
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E (*)
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections (selectable/9-pin)
C-series
C200HE
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E (*)
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections (selectable/9-pin).
C-series
C200HG
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E (*)
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections (selectable/9-pin).
C-series
C200HX
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E (*)
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU85-(Z)E
CV500-CPU01-EV1
CV1000-CPU01-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU01-EV1
CVM1-CPU11-EV1
CVM1-CPU21-EV1
Features a connector for RS-232C connections (selectable/9-pin).
CVM1/CV-series
CV500
CV1000
CV2000
CVM1
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E (*)
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
270
Appendix F
Model List
Model
CS1G-CPU42-EV1
CS1G-CPU43-E1
CS1G-CPU44-EV
CS1G-CPU45-EV
Specification
Features a connector for RS-232C connections.
PLC Type
CS-series
CS1G
CS1H-CPU63-EV1
CS1H-CPU64-EV1
CS1H-CPU65-EV1
CS1H-CPU66-EV1
CS1H-CPU67-EV1
CS1G-CPU42H
CS1G-CPU43H
CS1G-CPU44H
CS1G-CPU45H
Features a connector for RS-232C connections.
CS-series
CS1H
Features a connector for RS-232C connections.
CS-series
CS1G-H
CS1H-CPU63H
CS1H-CPU64H
CS1H-CPU65H
CS1H-CPU66H
CS1H-CPU67H
Features a connector for RS-232C connections.
CS-series
CS1H-H
CJ1G-CPU44
CJ1G-CPU45
Features a connector for RS-232C connections.
CS-series
CJ1G
Note For CPU units marked (*), a communications board is required.
1.Use a CPM2C-CN111 or CS1W-CN114/118 Connecting Cable, CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter, or
CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter to connect.
2.The CQM1H-CPU11 does not have a built-in RS-232C port, so connect to the PT at the peripheral port
with a CS1W-CN118 Connecting Cable.
271
Appendix F
Model List
CPU Units (for Connection Via an NT Link (1:1))
Model
Specification
PLC Type
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
Connect an RS-232C adapter to the peripheral port.
C-series
CPM1
CQM1-CPU41-E
CQM1-CPU42-E
CQM1-CPU43-E
CQM1-CPU44-E
CQM1H-CPU21-E (*)
CQM1H-CPU51-E
CQM1H-CPU61-E
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections.
C-series
CQM1
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections.
C-series
CPM1H
[email protected]@
[email protected]@
[email protected]@
[email protected]@
[email protected]@[email protected]
[email protected]@[email protected]
[email protected]@[email protected]
[email protected]@@@@@[email protected] (See note 1.)
[email protected]@@@@@[email protected] (See note 1.)
C200HS-CPU21-E
C200HS-CPU23-E
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HS-CPU33-E
Connect an RS-232C adapter to the peripheral port.
C-series
CPM1A
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections.
C-series
CPM2A
Connect an RS-232C adapter to the peripheral port.
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections.
C-series
CPM2C
C200HS
C200HE-CPU32-E(*)
C200HE-CPU42-E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin).
C-series
C200HE
C200HG-CPU33-E(*)
C200HG-CPU43-E
C200HG-CPU53-E(*)
C200HG-CPU63-E
C200HX-CPU34-E(*)
C200HX-CPU44-E
C200HX-CPU54-E(*)
C200HX-CPU64-E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin).
C-series
C200HG
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin).
C-series
C200HX
CV500-CPU01-V1-EV1
CV1000-CPU01-V1-EV1
CV2000-CPU01-V1-EV1
CV2000 CPU01 V1 EV1
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
Features a 9-pin connector for RS-232C connections
CV500
CV1000
CV2000
CVM1-series
Note For CPU units marked (*), a communications board is required.
1.Use a CPM2C-CN111 or CS1W-CN114/118 Connecting Cable, CPM1-CIF01 RS-232C Adapter, or
CPM1-CIF11 RS-422A Adapter to connect.
272
Appendix F
Model List
CPU Units (for Connection Via an NT Link (1:N))
Model
Specification
PLC Type
C200HE-CPU32-(Z)E(*)
C200HE-CPU42-(Z)E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin).
C-series
C200HE-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU33-(Z)E(*)
C200HG-CPU43-(Z)E
C200HG-CPU53-(Z)E(*)
C200HG-CPU63-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU34-(Z)E(*)
C200HX-CPU44-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU54-(Z)E(*)
C200HX-CPU64-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU65-(Z)E
C200HX-CPU85-(Z)E
CQM1H-CPU51 (*)
CQM1H-CPU61 (*)
CS1G-CPU42-EV1
CS1G-CPU43-EV1
CS1G-CPU44-EV1
CS1G-CPU45-EV1
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin).
C-series
C200HG-(Z)E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections
(selectable/9-pin).
C-series
C200HX-(Z)E
Features a connector for RS-232C connections.
C-series
CQM1H
CS-series
CS1G
CS1H-CPU63-EV1
CS1H-CPU64-EV1
CS1H-CPU65-EV1
CS1H-CPU66-EV1
CS1G-CPU42H
CS1G-CPU43H
CS1G-CPU44H
CS1G-CPU45H
Features a connector for RS-232C connections.
CS-series
CS1H
Features a connector for RS-232C connections.
CS-series
CS1G-H
CS1H-CPU63H
CS1H-CPU64H
CS1H-CPU65H
CS1H-CPU66H
CS1H-CPU67H
Features a connector for RS-232C connections.
CS-series
CS1H-H
CJ1G-CPU44
CJ1G-CPU45
Features a connector for RS-232C connections.
CJ-series
CJ1G
Features a connector for RS-232C connections.
Note For CPU units marked (*), a communications board is required.
273
Appendix F
Model List
CPU Units (for Connection Via an High-speed NT Link (1:N))
Model
Specification
PLC Type
CS1G-CPU42-EV1
CS1G-CPU43-EV1
CS1G-CPU44-EV1
CS1G-CPU45-EV1
CS1H-CPU63-EV1
CS1H-CPU64-EV1
CS1H-CPU65-EV1
CS1H-CPU66-EV1
Features a connector for RS-232C connections.
CS-series
CS1G
Features a connector for RS-232C connections.
CS-series
CS1H
CS1G-CPU42H
CS1G-CPU43H
CS1G-CPU44H
CS1G-CPU45H
CS1H-CPU63H
CS1H-CPU64H
CS1H-CPU65H
CS1H-CPU66H
CS1H-CPU67H
CJ1G-CPU44
CJ1G-CPU45
Features a connector for RS-232C connections.
CS-series
CS1G-H
Features a connector for RS-232C connections.
CS-series
CS1H-H
Features a connector for RS-232C connections.
CJ-series
CJ1G
Note The direct high-speed 1:N NT Link connection is not supported by CS1-series CPU Units without the
-EV1 suffix.
274
Appendix F
Model List
CPU Units (Connected by C200H Direct Communications)
Model
Product Name
[email protected]
[email protected]
C20H
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
C200H-CPU01-E
C200H-CPU03-E
C200H-CPU11-E
C200H-CPU21-E
C200H-CPU23-E
C200H-CPU31-E
C200HS-CPU01-E
C200HS-CPU03-E
C200HS-CPU11-E
C200HS-CPU21-E
C200HS-CPU23-E
C200HS-CPU31-E
C200HE-CPU11-E
C200HE-CPU32-E
C200HE-CPU42-E
C28H
C40H
C60H
C200H
C200HS
C200HE
C200HG
C200HG-CPU33-E
C200HG-CPU43-E
C200HG-CPU53-E
C200HG-CPU63-E
C200HX-CPU34-E
C200HX-CPU44-E
C200HX-CPU54-E
C200HX-CPU64-E
C200HX
RS-232C/RS-422A Link Adapter
Model
NT-AL001
Specification
RS-232C: 9-pin connector
RS-422A: 8-pin terminal block
RS-422A Converter
Model
CJ1W-CIF11
Specification
Converts RS-232C to RS-422A or RS-485.
RS-232C Adapter
Model
CPM1-CIF01
Specification
Connect the RS-232C port of the NT20 and the peripheral
port of the CPM1.
275
Appendix F
Model List
Related Products
Name
Support Tool
Options
Model
Remarks
NT-ZJCAT1-EV4
NT20S-KBA04
For IBM PC/AT compatible, media: CD-ROM
Reflection-suppressing protective sheet for NT20
NT20S-KBA01
NT-MF261
Chemical-resistant cover to NT20
Memory Unit for NT20
Parts Used for Connection
Cables with Connectors
Model
XW2Z-200S
2m
Cable Length
XW2Z-500S
XW2Z-200T
5m
2m
XW2Z-500T
C200H-CN311
5m
30 cm
NT20M-CNP711
C200H-CN711
70 cm
NT20M-CNP221
C200H-CN221
2m
NT20M-CNP521
C200H-CN521
NT20M-CNP131
C200H-CN131
C200H-CN312
5m
Applicable Units
Host link units with 25-pin
connectors
Communications Method
Host link
Host link units and CPU units
with 9-pin connectors
Host link,
NT link (1 to 1)
C200H, C200HS,
C200HX/HG/HE
C200H direct communications
10 m
30 cm
NT20M-CNP712
C200H-CN712
70 cm
NT20M-CNP222
C200H-CN222
2m
[email protected]@H
Connecting Cables (for Host Link, NT Link, and RS-232C)
Model
AWG28×5P
IFVV-SB
CO-MA-VV-SB
5P×28AWG
Specification
Multiconductor shielded cable (FUJIKURA, Ltd.)
Multiconductor shielded cable (HITACHI Cable, Ltd.)
Applicable Connectors (for Host Link, NT Link, and RS-232C)
Name
Connector
Connector cover
276
Model
XM2A-2501
Remarks
25-pin, manufactured by OMRON
XM2A-0901
DB-25P
9-pin (Plug), manufactured by OMRON
25-pin, manufactured by JAE
XM2S-2511
XM2S-0911
25-pin, manufactured by OMRON
9-pin, manufactured by OMRON
DB-C2-J9
25-pin, manufactured by JAE
Appendix G
Option List
Interface Unit ... NT20-IF001
This is the Interface Unit used when connecting a Host Interface Unit for C200H direct communications.
The PTs and Interface Units that can be used with the NT20-IF001 are listed in the following table. Be sure to
use an applicable PT and Interface Unit.
Mounting Attachment
NT20-IF001
Applicable PTs
NT20-series PTs
Applicable Interface Units
NT600M-LB122-V1
C200H Interface Unit ... NT600M-LB122-V1
This is the Interface Unit for C200H communications.
Reflection-suppressing Protective Sheet ... NT20-KBA04
Stuck to the display to prevent it from being soiled. The entire sheet is colorless and transparent.
277
Appendix G
Option List
Chemical-resistant Cover (NT20-KBA01)
Covers the front panel and protects it from chemical agents. The entire sheet is milky white and made of silicone rubber.
The protection the cover affords is summarized below.
Protects Against
Boric acid
Sulfuric acid
Nitric acid
Ammonia gas
Carbon dioxide
Phenol
Glycerin
Ammonia water
Calcium chloride
Developing fluid (“hypo”)
Acetaldehyde
Lard
Does Not Protect Against
Hexane
Lubricating oils
Benzene
Butane
Carbonic acid
Chlorinated solvents
Napthalene
Soya oil
Toluene
For information on protection against chemical agents not included in the table above, please ask OMRON. (If
it is a chemical agent to which silicone rubber is recognized to be resistant, the cover can be used with confidence even if that chemical agent is not listed in the “Protects Against” column above.
Note
(1) This cover does not afford protection against all chemical agents.
(2) Since the cover is milky white, it reduces the clarity of the display a little.
(3) This cover is intended to be affixed to the display in order to provide protection against chemical
agents. It will not provide protection against chemical agents that enter through the installation panel
or through the gap between the cover and the display.
Memory Unit (NT-MF261)
This is a special unit for reading/writing the screen data and the system programs in an NT20. Data is transmitted by DIP switch setting at the Memory Unit.
278
Appendix H
Special Characters
English Character Codes
Pin 2 of SW2 must be ON to enable English language messages to use the following codes.
Example: Hex code is represented by 30, decimal code by 48, and character by 0.
30
48
0
Code 20 and 32 in the table represents a space, as indicated by “SP.”
2-
Hex Digits
1st
2nd
3-
4-
5-
6-
7-
8-
9-
-0
20
32
SP
30
48
0
40
64
@
50
80
P
60
96
`
70
112
p
80
128
Ç
90
144
È
-1
21
33
!
31
49
1
41
65
A
51
81
Q
61
97
a
71
113
q
81
129
ü
91
145
æ
-2
22
34
”
32
50
2
42
66
B
52
82
R
62
98
b
72
114
r
82
130
é
92
146
Æ
-3
23
35
#
33
51
3
43
67
C
53
83
S
63
99
c
73
115
s
83
131
â
93
147
ô
-4
24
36
$
34
52
4
44
68
D
54
84
T
64
100
d
74
116
t
84
132
ä
94
148
ö
-5
25
37
%
35
53
5
45
69
E
55
85
U
65
101
e
75
117
u
85
133
à
95
149
ò
-6
26
38
&
36
54
6
46
70
F
56
86
V
66
102
f
76
118
v
86
134
å
96
150
û
-7
27
39
’
37
55
7
47
71
G
57
87
W
67
103
g
77
119
w
87
135
ç
97
151
ù
-8
28
40
(
38
56
8
48
72
H
58
88
X
68
104
h
78
120
x
88
136
ê
98
152
ÿ
-9
29
41
)
39
57
9
49
73
I
59
89
Y
69
105
i
79
121
y
89
137
ë
99
153
Ö
-A
2A
42
*
3A
58
:
4A
74
J
5A
90
Z
6A
106
j
7A
122
z
8A
138
è
9A
154
Ü
-B
2B
43
+
3B
59
;
4B
75
K
5B
91
[
6B
107
k
7B
123
{
8B
139
ï
9B
155
¢
-C
2C
44
,
3C
60
<
4C
76
L
5C
92
\
6C
108
l
7C
124
|
8C
140
î
9C
156
£
-D
2D
45
-
3D
61
=
4D
77
M
5D
93
]
6D
109
m
7D
125
}
8D
141
ì
9D
157
¥
-E
2E
46
.
3E
62
>
4E
78
N
5E
94
^
6E
110
n
7E
126
~
8E
142
Ä
9E
158
Pt
-F
2F
47
/
3F
63
?
4F
79
O
5F
95
_
6F
111
o
7F
127
8F
143
Å
9F
159
ƒ
279
Appendix H
Special Characters
A-
Hex Digits
1st
2nd
B-
C-
D-
E-
F-
-0
A0
á
B0
C0
D0
E0
α
F0
≡
-1
160
A1
í
176
B1
192
C1
208
D1
224
E1
β
240
F1
±
-2
161
A2
ó
177
B2
193
C2
209
D2
225
E2
Γ
241
F2
≥
-3
162
A3
ú
178
B3
194
C3
210
D3
226
E3
π
242
F3
≤
-4
163
A4
ñ
179
B4
195
C4
211
D4
227
E4
Σ
243
F4
⌠
-5
164
A5
Ñ
180
B5
196
C5
212
D5
228
E5
σ
244
F5
⌡
-6
165
A6
a
181
B6
197
C6
213
D6
229
E6
µ
245
F6
÷
-7
166
A7
o
182
B7
198
C7
214
D7
230
E7
τ
246
F7
≈
-8
167
A8
¿
183
B8
199
C8
215
D8
231
E8
Φ
247
F8
°
-9
168
A9
184
B9
200
C9
216
D9
232
E9
Θ
248
F9
.
-A
169
AA
185
BA
201
CA
217
DA
233
EA
Ω
249
FA
•
170
186
202
218
234
250
-B
AB
171
1
/2
BB
187
CB
203
DB
219
EB
235
δ
FB
251
√
-C
AC
172
1
/4
BC
188
CC
204
DC
220
EC
236
∞
FC
252
n
-D
AD
173
¡
BD
189
CD
205
DD
221
ED
237
φ
FD
253
2
-E
AE
174
«
BE
190
CE
206
DE
222
EE
238
ε
FE
254
■
-F
AF
175
»
BF
191
CF
207
DF
223
EF
239
∩
FF
255
(See
note.)
Note Used as the prefix for mark data codes (2 bytes).
280
Appendix I
Function Restrictions Depending on the
Support Tool
Screens can be created for Host link, NT link, or C200H direct communications by using the conventional Support Tool indicated below.
In addition, the NT series Support Tool ([email protected]) can be used with Ver.4 of the direct connection function.
However, when the above Support Tool is used, restrictions apply to some functions as shown in the table
below.
The expressions used for the Support Tools In the table have the following meanings.
NT V2:
Support Tool
NT V2
NT Series Support Tool ([email protected])
NT Model
Direct
Connection
Communications Mode
NT20M
Ver. 4
Standard
NT20S
Ver. 4
Standard/High-speed
NT20S
Ver. 5
Standard/High-speed
Support Tool
Restrictions
Mode
(NT20S memory
switch)
NT20M
250 screens max.,
Thumbwheel
numeral settings not
possible, no upper/
lower limits, hexaNT20S
decimal input not
possible, indirect
specification not possible, touch switch
input notification
fixed as “momentary”, data transmission in screen units
not possible.
NT20S
No restriction
The NT20 cannot be used with combinations of Support Tools and settings other than those indicated above.
Reference:
The RS-232C can be used in the same way with the NT series Support Tool ([email protected]). The
necessary Support Tool and “Tool Mode” (NT20 memory switch) settings in this case are as
follows:
NT Model: NT20S
Direct setting: No
Communications mode: Standard/High-speed
Tool Mode: NT20S
281
Function Restrictions Depending on the Support Tool
282
Appendix I
Index
Numerics
25-pin connector, 267
9-pin connector, 268
A
continuous buzzer sound, 108
controlling the display elements, 167
controlling the NT20 status, 168
CPUs, 57, 60, 65
D
allocatable bits and words, 166
data transmission in screen units, 102
automatic reset function, 98
description of parts, 18
determining touch switch status, 196
B
backlight, 205
backlight mode, 205
bar graphs, 147
before operating, 14
buzzer attribute, 205
C
cable preparation, 265
changing displayed numerals or character strings, 182
changing displayed numerical values or character strings,
184
changing the status of allocated bits, 195
changing the system settings, 83
character string memory table
direct specification, 177
displaying and referencing, 177
indirect specification, 177
initialization setting, 178
number of registration words, 178
setting, 178
checking the PT setting, 122
Communications Board, 44, 57, 60, 65
communications methods, 8
communications port, 8
dimensions, 261
DIP switch settings, 19, 124
display
numeric values (numeral table), 7
reverse and flashing display, 138, 145
display elements
character-string memory table, 11
lamps, 10
numeral memory table, 11
touch switches, 11
displaying the system menu, 86
displays
bar graphs, 7
characters (character-string memory table), 7
characters (text), 7
lamps, 7
marks, 7
numeric keys, 7
touch switches, 7
E
EC Directives, xx
EMI Standard, xxi
EMS Standard, xxi
enlarged display, 137, 145
error messages, 213, 249
communications type, 8
comparison between NT20S, NT20M, and NT20, 6
compatibility with NT2OM/NT20S, 4
CompoBus/S Master Control Units
manual, 15
connecting directly between RS-232C ports, 69
connecting the NT Support Tool, 35
connection method, 8
F
file units, 102
G
graph frame, 147
continuous buzzer, 205
283
Index
H
menu tree, 84
model list, 269
hardware faults, 212, 248
host link method, 44
Host Link Unit, 44
Host Link Units
manual, 15
N
ng, 195
notification of display elements, 170
notification of NT20 status, 170
I
I/O check, 115
buzzer, 119
communications with the Support Tool, 116
LCD, 118
LED, 120
screen memory, 121
touch switches, 115
initialization by using the DIP switch, 90
initialization by using the system menu, 88
notification of numbers to the PLC, 199
notification operation
alternate, 193
momentary, 193
reset, 194
set, 194
NT Link
1:1 NT Link, 56
1:N NT Link, 60
high-speed 1:N NT Link, 65
inspection and cleaning, 218, 253
NT Support Tool
connecting, 35
manual, 15
intermittent buzzer, 205
NT20 status control, 199
intermittent buzzer sound, 108
numeral memory table
direct specification, 179
displaying and referencing, 178
indirect specification, 179
initialization setting, 180
number of registration words, 180
initializing memory, 88
IP65 waterproof requirements, 4
K
key press sound, 106
L
numeral setting, 156
numeric key type, 157
thumbwheel type, 158
numeric keys, 158
lamps, 150
language function, 110
M
O
operating status, 209
operation flow, 82
maintenance of the NT20, 216, 253
operation panel, 22
marks, 137
operation with the system menu, 86
memory switches, 91
memory table
character-string memory table, 144
copying, 186
numeral memory table, 145
menu item
Maintenance Mode, 87
Quit, 87
Transmit Mode, 87
284
P
power supply connection, 23
precautions, xvii
EC Directives, xx
Programming Tools
manuals, 15
PT operating status, 208
Index
PT status, 208
serial port A, 8
PT status control area, 12, 168, 203
serial port B, 8
PT status notify area, 12, 170
setting the buzzer, 107
smoothing, 137, 145
R
radiated emission, xxi
S
screen
child screen, 140
classification, 140
composition of the screen, 136
continuous screen, 141
normal screen, 140
NT20 screen, 136
overlapping screen, 140
parent screen, 140
screen display, 140
screen management, 136
special screen number, 136
switching the continuous screens, 141
screen attributes
backlight attribute, 143
buzzer attribute, 142
numeral setting attribute, 142
soldering, 266
specifications, 255
starting the NT20, 83
Support Tool
connecting the NT Support Tool, 35
Support Tool mode setting, 111
switching the screen display, 172
switching to the RUN mode, 105
System Installer
manual, 15
system key functions, 154
system menu, 84
system program
erasing, 127
transferring, 126
system transfer tool, 126
T
touch switches, 152
transmitting the screen data, 103
screen data, 102
screen display, 203
screen switch setting, 172
screen switch strobe, 174, 209
screen switch timing, 173
screen switching function, 154
screen switching strobe, 171, 173
U
upgrade bar graphs, 189
upper/lower limit check, 157
using numeric keys, 160
using the thumbwheel type, 161
screens
creating, 134
selecting the host communications method, 93
selecting the host communications port, 94
selecting the host link communications speed, 95
selecting the menu items, 87
selecting the NT link (1
N) communications speed, 96
selecting unit numbers, 97
Serial Communications Board, 44, 61, 65
Serial Communications Boards
manuals, 15
Serial Communications Unit, 44
285
Index
286
Revision History
A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.
Cat. No. V091-E1-01
Revision code
The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the
previous version.
Revision code
Date
01
March 2007
Revised content
Original production
287
Revision History
288
OMRON Corporation
Control Devices Division H.Q.
Shiokoji Horikawa, Shimogyo-ku,
Kyoto, 600-8530 Japan
Tel: (81)75-344-7109/Fax: (81)75-344-7149
Regional Headquarters
OMRON EUROPE B.V.
Wegalaan 67-69, NL-2132 JD Hoofddorp
The Netherlands
Tel: (31)2356-81-300/Fax: (31)2356-81-388
OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
1 East Commerce Drive, Schaumburg, IL 60173
U.S.A.
Tel: (1)847-843-7900/Fax: (1)847-843-8568
OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD.
83 Clemenceau Avenue,
#11-01, UE Square,
Singapore 239920
Tel: (65)6835-3011/Fax: (65)6835-2711
OMRON (CHINA) CO., LTD.
Room 2211, Bank of China Tower,
200 Yin Cheng Zhong Road,
PuDong New Area, Shanghai, 200120 China
Tel: (86)21-5037-2222/Fax: (86)21-5037-2200
Authorized Distributor:
Cat. No. V091-E1-01
Note: Specifications subject to change without notice
This manual is printed on 100% recycled paper.
Printed in Japan
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement